JVC Home Theater System RX F31S User Manual

HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER  
RX-F31S  
INSTRUCTIONS  
LVT1306-009B  
[US]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Parts identification ................................................ 2  
Getting started ...................................................... 4  
Before Installation .................................................................. 4  
Checking the supplied accessories ....................................... 4  
Putting batteries in the remote control ................................... 4  
Setting the voltage selector ................................................... 4  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ................................... 5  
Connecting the speakers ....................................................... 6  
Connecting video components .............................................. 7  
Connecting the power cord .................................................. 11  
Basic operations ................................................. 12  
1 Turn on the power ............................................................. 12  
2 Select the source to play .................................................. 12  
3 Adjust the volume ............................................................. 13  
Selecting the digital decode mode....................................... 13  
Adjusting the subwoofer audio position ............................... 14  
Activating TV Direct ............................................................. 14  
Turning off the sounds temporarily ...................................... 15  
Changing the display brightness.......................................... 15  
Turning off the power with the Sleep Timer ......................... 15  
Basic settings...................................................... 16  
Setting the speaker information automatically  
—Smart Surround Setup ............................................... 16  
Basic setting items ............................................................... 18  
Operation through on-screen display menus ....................... 18  
Menu operation buttons................................................... 18  
Setup menu configuration ............................................... 19  
Menu operating procedure................................................... 20  
Setting the items .................................................................. 21  
Setting the speakers ....................................................... 21  
Activating the EX/ES/PLIIx setting—EX/ES/PLIIx ........... 22  
Selecting the main or sub channel—DUAL MONO ......... 23  
Setting bass sound.......................................................... 23  
Using the Midnight mode—MIDNIGHT MODE ............... 24  
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminals  
—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3 ................................................... 24  
Selecting the component video input mode  
—DVD VIDEO INPUT/VCR VIDEO INPUT ............... 25  
Superimposing the menus—SUPERIMPOSE ................ 25  
Converting S-video signals into composite video signals  
—DOWN MIX............................................................ 25  
Converting composite video signals into S-video signals  
—Y/C SEPARATE ..................................................... 25  
Sound adjustments............................................. 26  
Basic adjustment items........................................................ 26  
Operation through on-screen display menus ....................... 26  
Menu operation buttons................................................... 26  
Setup menu configuration ............................................... 27  
Menu operating procedure................................................... 28  
Adjusting the items .............................................................. 29  
Adjusting speaker output level ........................................ 29  
Adjusting the equalization patterns  
—DIGITAL EQ 63Hz/250Hz/1kHz/4kHz/16kHz ........ 30  
Adjusting the bass sounds .............................................. 30  
Adjusting the sound parameters for the  
Surround/DSP modes ............................................... 31  
Tuner operations ................................................. 32  
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing .................................. 32  
Tuning in to stations manually.............................................. 32  
Using preset tuning .............................................................. 32  
Selecting the FM reception mode ........................................ 33  
Creating realistic sound fields........................... 34  
Reproducing theater ambience ........................................... 34  
Introducing the Surround modes ......................................... 34  
Introducing the DSP modes................................................. 37  
Using the Surround/DSP modes ......................................... 38  
Activating the Surround/DSP modes ................................... 39  
AV COMPU LINK remote control system .......... 40  
Operating other JVC products ........................... 42  
Operating other manufacturers’ products ........ 44  
Troubleshooting .................................................. 47  
Specifications...................................................... 48  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control  
See pages in parentheses for details.  
Parts identification  
1
2
TV DIRECT button (14)  
Source selecting buttons (12, 14, 32, 33)  
DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, DVD MULTI, FM/AM  
Operating buttons for tuner (32, 33)  
3
4
( TUNING, FM MODE, TUNING 9, MEMORY  
On-screen display operation buttons (18, 26)  
Cursor buttons (3, 2, 5, ),  
SET  
5
6
7
8
9
SMART SURROUND SETUP button (16)  
EX/ES button (22)  
SOUND button (13, 14, 22, 24, 30, 31)  
SURROUND button (39)  
Adjusting buttons for speaker and subwoofer output levels (29)  
FRONT L +/–, FRONT R +/–, CENTER +/–, SUBWFR +/–,  
SURR L +/–, SURR R +/–, S.BACK +/–  
AUDIO button (12, 14)  
MUTING button (15)  
VOLUME +/– button (13)  
Mode selector (12, 14, 16, 18, 22, 24, 26, 29 – 32, 39)  
DVR, DVD, AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS  
MENU button (18, 26)  
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER  
-
REMOTE CONTROL RM SRXF31U  
1
2
p
q
w
e
p
r
t
• Numeric buttons (33)  
q
w
• Adjusting buttons (13, 14, 24, 30, 31)  
DECODE, EQ FREQ, BASS BOOST, C.TONE,  
EQ LEVEL 9, MIDNIGHT, EFFECT, EQ LEVEL (,  
A.POSITION  
e
y
u
i
o
DIMMER button (15)  
ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT button (12)  
TEST TONE button (17, 29)  
3
SLEEP button (15)  
r
SET  
The buttons which are not indicated here can be used for  
operating other JVC products or other manufacturers’ products.  
For details, see pages 42 to 46.  
4
5
• When operating this receiver, set the mode selector (e)  
to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
• When operating a JVC DVD recorder, set the mode  
selector (e) to “DVR.”  
t
• When operating a JVC DVD player, set the mode selector  
(e) to “DVD.”  
6
y
u
7
8
9
i
o
To open the cover of the  
remote control, push here  
then slide downward.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See pages in parentheses for details.  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
SOURCE  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
RX-F31  
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER  
/
MULTI JOG  
DVR MULTI  
DVR  
/
DVD  
VCR  
DBS  
TV  
FM / AM  
SET / TUNER PRESET  
STANDBY  
PHONES  
/
ON  
TV DIRECT  
SETTING  
ADJUST  
SURROUND  
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
1
2
STANDBY/ON button and standby lamp (12, 14, 32)  
Source lamps  
7
SETTING button (18, 32)  
ADJUST button (26, 32)  
SURROUND button (39)  
Remote sensor (4)  
Display window (see below)  
• SET button (17, 18, 26)  
8
9
p
q
w
DVD MULTI, DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, FM/AM  
• SOURCE SELECTOR (12, 14, 33)  
• MULTI JOG (18, 26, 33, 39)  
MASTER VOLUME control (13)  
PHONES jack (13)  
3
4
5
6
• TUNER PRESET button (33)  
TV DIRECT button (14)  
Display window  
1
2
3
4 5  
6
7
9
0
-
8
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
PL  
x
LPCM  
L
C
R
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
$
~
! @ #  
%
^
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
EQ indicator (30)  
C.TONE indicator (31)  
VIRTUAL SB indicator (38)  
and indicator (35)  
AUDIO P. (position) indicator (14)  
Neo:6 indicator (36)  
BASS indicator (30)  
Tuner operation indicators (32)  
TUNED, ST (stereo)  
-
=
ATT (attenuator) indicator (30)  
Digital signal format indicators (13, 34 – 36)  
LPCM (Linear PCM), DOLBY D (Dolby Digital), DTS, 96/24  
Signal and speaker indicators (15)  
DSP indicator (36, 37)  
AUTO SR (surround) indicator (39)  
3D indicator (36, 37)  
~
!
@
#
$
%
Main display  
Frequency unit indicators  
MHz (for FM station), kHz (for AM station)  
HP (headphones) indicator (13, 36, 37)  
9
0
AUTO MUTING indicator (33)  
SLEEP indicator (15)  
^
Rear panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
AM LOOP  
SUBWOOFER CENTER  
SURR-R  
SURR-L  
1(DVR/DVD) 2(DBS)  
3(VCR) DIGITAL OUT  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
ANTENNA  
CAUTION:SPEAKER  
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16  
Y
PB  
PR  
110V  
220V  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND  
PCM/  
STREAM  
BACK  
RIGHT LEFT  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
FM 75  
VCR  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL IN  
DVD MULTI IN  
AM EXT  
COAXIAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
230 -  
240V  
L
127V  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
R
AV  
VCR  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
SUB-  
VCR  
DVR  
OUT (REC)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COMPU  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO  
DVR  
OUT  
IN  
DBS  
IN  
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
WOOFER  
OUT (REC)  
(PLAY)  
(REC)  
(PLAY)  
OUT  
LINK-III  
7
8
9
p q  
w
1
2
3
Power cord (11)  
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (4)  
DVD MULTI IN jacks (8)  
SUBWOOFER, CENTER, SURR-R, SURR-L  
ANTENNA terminals (5)  
DIGITAL IN terminals (11)  
• Coaxial: 1(DVR/DVD)  
• Optical: 2(DBS), 3(VCR)  
DIGITAL OUT terminal (11)  
COMPONENT (Y, PB, PR) jacks (7 – 10)  
VCR IN, DVR/DVD IN, MONITOR OUT  
8
VIDEO terminals (7 – 10)  
VIDEO (composite video) jacks, S-VIDEO terminals  
• Input: DVR/DVD IN (PLAY), VCR IN (PLAY), DBS IN  
• Output: DVR OUT (REC), VCR OUT (REC), MONITOR OUT  
AUDIO jacks (7 – 10)  
• Input: DVR/DVD IN (PLAY), VCR IN (PLAY), DBS IN, TV IN  
• Output: DVR OUT (REC), VCR OUT (REC), MONITOR OUT  
SUBWOOFER OUT jack (6)  
AV COMPU LINK-III terminals (40)  
SPEAKERS terminals (6)  
FRONT, CENTER, SURROUND, SURROUND BACK  
4
5
9
p
q
w
6
7
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Putting batteries in the remote control  
Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first.  
Getting started  
1
2
3
1 Press and slide the battery cover on the back  
Before Installation  
of the remote control.  
2 Insert batteries.  
General precautions  
• Be sure your hands are dry.  
Turn the power off to all components.  
• Read the manuals supplied with the components you are going  
to connect.  
Make sure to match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).  
3 Replace the cover.  
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases,  
replace the batteries. Use two R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F) type dry-cell  
batteries.  
Locations  
• Install the receiver in a location that is level and protected from  
moisture and dust.  
• Supplied butteries are for initial setup. Replace for continued  
use.  
• The temperature around the receiver must be between –5˚C  
and 35˚C.  
CAUTION:  
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor  
ventilation could cause overheating and damage the receiver.  
• Leave sufficient distance between the receiver and the TV.  
Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells:  
• Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity:  
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).  
• Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may  
differ in voltage.  
• Always replace both batteries at the same time.  
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.  
Handling the receiver  
• Do not insert any metal object into the receiver.  
• Do not disassemble the receiver or remove screws, covers, or  
cabinet.  
• Do not expose the receiver to rain or moisture.  
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When  
unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage  
the cord.  
• When you are away on travel or otherwise for an extended  
period or time, remove the plug from the wall outlet. A small  
amount of power is always consumed while the power cord is  
connected to the wall outlet.  
When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at  
the remote sensor on the front panel.  
Remote sensor  
The receiver has a built-in cooling fan which operates  
while the receiver is turned on. Be sure to leave enough  
ventilation to obtain sufficient cooling effect.  
CAUTION:  
To operate the receiver, set  
the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all  
connections are completed.  
Checking the supplied accessories  
Check to be sure you have all of the following supplied  
accessories. If anything is missing, contact your dealer  
immediately.  
Setting the voltage selector  
Before connections, always do the following first if necessary.  
Select the correct voltage in VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear  
of the receiver by using a screw driver.  
• Remote control (× 1)  
• Batteries (× 2)  
• AM loop antenna (× 1)  
• FM antenna (× 1)  
• Digital coaxial cable (× 1)  
• AC plug adaptor (× 1)  
• Check to be sure if the voltage mark is set to the voltage for  
your area where this unit plugs in.  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
110V  
220V  
230 -  
240V  
127V  
Voltage mark  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas  
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.  
AM loop antenna  
(supplied)  
Snap the tabs on the loop  
into the slots of the base to  
assemble the AM loop  
antenna.  
If FM reception is poor, connect an  
outdoor FM antenna (not supplied).  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
FM 75  
If AM reception is poor, connect  
AM EXT  
COAXIAL  
an outdoor single vinyl-covered  
wire (not supplied).  
FM antenna (supplied)  
220V  
110V  
127V  
ANTENNA  
230 -  
240V  
NOTES  
AM antenna connection  
• If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl,  
remove the vinyl while twisting it as shown on the  
right.  
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch  
any other terminals, connecting cords and power  
cord. This could cause poor reception.  
Connect the AM loop antenna supplied to the AM LOOP  
terminals.  
Connect the white cord to the AM EXT terminal, and connect the  
black cord to the H terminal.  
Turn the loop until you have the best reception.  
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered  
wire (not supplied) to the AM EXT terminal. Keep the AM loop  
antenna connected.  
FM antenna connection  
Connect the FM antenna supplied to the FM 75 COAXIAL  
terminal as a temporary measure.  
Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally.  
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor FM antenna (not  
supplied). Before attaching a 75 coaxial cable with a  
connector (IEC or DIN 45325) , disconnect the supplied FM  
antenna.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the speakers  
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.  
Speaker Layout Diagram  
C
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
SW  
RS  
L
R
Center speaker (C)  
CAUTION:SPEAKER  
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16  
LS  
SB  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND  
BACK  
RIGHT LEFT  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
SPEAKERS  
Powered  
subwoofer  
(SW)  
AV  
COMPU  
LINK-III  
SUB-  
WOOFER  
OUT  
Right front speaker  
(R)  
Left front speaker  
(L)  
Surround back  
speaker (SB)  
Right surround  
speaker (RS)  
Left surround  
speaker (LS)  
Connecting the speakers  
Connecting the powered subwoofer  
By connecting a subwoofer, you can enhance the bass or  
reproduce the original LFE signals recorded in digital software.  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
Connect the input jack of a powered subwoofer to the  
SUBWOOFER OUT jack on the rear panel, using a cord  
with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).  
2
3
1
1
2
• Refer also to the manual supplied with your subwoofer.  
After connecting all the speakers and/or a subwoofer, set the  
speaker setting information properly to obtain the best possible  
surround effect. For details, see pages 16, 17, and 21 to 23.  
1 Twist and remove the insulation at the end of each  
NOTE  
speaker cord.  
You can place a subwoofer wherever you like since bass sound is  
non-directional. Normally place it in front of you.  
2 Press and hold the clamp of the speaker terminal  
(1), then insert the speaker cord (2).  
• For each speaker, connect the (+) and (–) terminals on the  
rear panel to the (+) and (–) terminals marked on the  
speakers.  
3 Release the finger from the clamp.  
CAUTIONS:  
• Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the  
speaker terminals (6 – 16 ).  
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to one speaker  
terminal.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting video components  
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.  
This receiver is equipped with the following video terminals—  
composite video, S-video, and component video terminals.  
• If your video components have S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or  
component video (Y, PB, PR) jacks, connect them using an S-  
video cable (not supplied) or component video cable (not  
supplied). By using these terminals, you can get a better picture  
quality in the order:  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their  
manuals.  
DO NOT use a TV through a VCR or a TV with a built-in  
VCR; otherwise, the picture may be distorted.  
Component > S-video > Composite  
IMPORTANT:  
CAUTION:  
Component video signals are transmitted only through component  
video output jacks. Therefore, if a recording video component and  
a playing video component are connected to the receiver through  
the video terminals of different type, you cannot record the picture.  
In addition, if the TV and a playing video component are  
connected to the receiver through the video terminals of different  
type, you cannot view the playback picture on the TV.  
On the other hand, S-video signals and composite video signals  
can be converted into each other and transmitted through the  
corresponding output jack. For details about the settings of the  
conversion, see page 25.  
If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic  
equalizer between the source components and this receiver, the  
sound output through this receiver may be distorted.  
If your video components have AV COMPU LINK terminal  
See also page 40 for detailed information about the connection  
and the AV COMPU LINK remote control system.  
7 Connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player with its stereo output jacks (DVR/DVD):  
Red  
White  
Stereo audio cable  
(not supplied)  
AUDIO  
White  
Red  
DVR  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
OUT (REC)  
DVD recorder or  
DVD player  
Å
ı
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Ç Î  
Composite video cable  
(not supplied)  
‰ Ï  
Ì
Y
PB  
PR  
VIDEO  
VCR  
IN  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
S-VIDEO  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
DVR  
OUT (REC)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
MONITOR  
OUT  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
COMPONENT  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Component video cable (not supplied)  
Å To left/right audio channel output  
NOTES  
ı Only for DVD recorder: To left/right audio channel  
input  
Ç Only for DVD recorder: To composite video input  
Î To composite video output  
To S-video output  
Ï Only for DVD recorder: To S-video input  
Ì To component video output  
• When connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player to the  
component video input jacks, make the component video input  
setting (DVD VIDEO INPUT) correctly. If you do not, you cannot  
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK  
remote control system cannot operate properly. For details, see  
page 25.  
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical  
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for  
a DVD recorder and DVD player is set to use the digital coaxial  
terminal (DIGITAL IN 1 (DVR/DVD)). For details of digital  
connection, see page 11.  
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player with its analog discrete output jacks (DVD MULTI IN):  
This connection is the best connection method for enjoying DVD Audio sounds. When a DVD Audio disc is played back, the original high-  
quality sounds can be reproduced only using this connection.  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.  
Monaural audio cable  
(not supplied)  
Red  
White  
Stereo audio cable  
(not supplied)  
Red  
AUDIO  
White  
White  
Stereo audio cable  
(not supplied)  
SUBWOOFER CENTER  
SURR-R  
SURR-L  
DVR  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
Red  
OUT (REC)  
DVD MULTI IN  
Å ı Ç Π‰  
220V  
110V  
230 -  
240V  
127V  
Ï
DVD recorder or  
DVD player  
Ì Ó È Ô  
Y
PB  
PR  
VIDEO  
Composite video  
VCR  
IN  
cable (not supplied)  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
S-VIDEO  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
DVR  
OUT (REC)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COMPONENT  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Component video cable (not supplied)  
Å To left/right front channel audio output  
NOTE  
ı Only for DVD recorder: To left/right front channel  
audio input  
Ç To left/right surround channel audio output  
Î To center channel audio output  
To subwoofer output  
When connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player to the  
component video input jacks, make the component video input  
setting (DVD VIDEO INPUT) correctly. If you do not, you cannot  
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK  
remote control system cannot operate properly. For details, see  
page 25.  
Ï Only for DVD recorder: To composite video input  
Ì To composite video output  
Ó To S-video output  
È Only for DVD recorder: To S-video input  
Ô To component video output  
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.  
About “DVD MULTI”  
When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source (see page 12), you can enjoy analog discrete output sound (5.1-channel reproduction)  
from the connected component.  
You may need to select analog discrete output mode on the component.  
NOTES  
• When using the headphones, you can listen to the front channel sounds (left and right) only. 3D HEADPHONE mode (see pages 36  
and 37) is not available.  
• When TV Direct is activated while “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, the source changes to the last selected source—  
“DVR/DVD,” “VCR,” and “DBS” (see page 14).  
• Surround/DSP modes (see pages 34 to 39) are not available for “DVD MULTI.”  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Connecting a VCR  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
Red  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.  
White  
Stereo audio cable (not supplied)  
White  
Red  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
VCR  
DBS  
IN  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
(PLAY)  
Å
ı
VCR  
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Ç
‰ Ï Ì  
Y
PB  
PR  
Î
Composite video  
VCR  
IN  
cable (not supplied)  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
COMPONENT  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Component video cable (not supplied)  
Å To left/right audio channel output  
NOTES  
ı To left/right audio channel input  
Ç To composite video input  
Î To composite video output  
To S-video output  
• When connecting a VCR to the component video input jacks,  
make the component video input setting (VCR VIDEO INPUT)  
correctly. If you do not, you cannot view the playback picture on  
the TV or the AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot  
operate properly. For details, see page 25.  
Ï To S-video input  
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical  
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for  
a video component other than DVD recorder and DVD player is  
set to use the digital optical terminal (DIGITAL IN 3 (VCR)). For  
details of digital connection, see page 11.  
Ì To component video output  
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.  
7 Connecting a DBS tuner  
White  
Stereo audio cable (not supplied)  
VCR  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
TV  
IN  
Red  
Å
DBS tuner  
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Ç
ı
Composite video cable (not supplied)  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
VCR  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Å To left/right audio channel output  
ı To composite video output  
Ç To S-video output  
NOTE  
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical  
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for a  
TV is set to use the digital optical terminal (DIGITAL IN 2 (DBS)).  
For details of digital connection, see page 11.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Connecting a TV  
Connect the TV to the appropriate MONITOR OUT jacks to view the playback picture from any other connected video components.  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.  
Red  
White  
L
Stereo audio cable  
White  
Red  
(not supplied)  
Å ı  
R
SUB-  
WOOFER  
OUT  
TV  
DBS  
IN  
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Ç
Î ‰  
Y
PB  
PR  
VCR  
Composite video cable  
(not supplied)  
IN  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
DBS  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
COMPONENT  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Component video cable (not supplied)  
Å To left/right audio channel input  
NOTES  
ı To left/right audio channel output  
Ç To composite video input  
Î To S-video input  
To component video input  
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.  
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical  
cable. For details of digital connection, see page 11.  
When connecting a TV through the COMPONENT MONITOR  
OUT jacks, the on-screen display does not appear on the TV  
screen (see page 25).  
IMPORTANT:  
Audio signals come out through the MONITOR OUT (L/R) jacks  
ONLY when TV Direct is in use (see page 14).  
Connect these jacks to the audio input jacks corresponding to the  
video connection; otherwise, no sound comes out of the TV  
speaker when TV Direct is in use.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Digital output terminal  
You can connect any digital components which have an optical  
digital input terminal.  
Digital connection  
This receiver is equipped with three DIGITAL IN terminals—one  
digital coaxial terminal and two digital optical terminals—and one  
DIGITAL OUT terminal.  
To reproduce the digital sound, use the digital connection in  
addition to the analog connection methods described on pages 7  
to 10.  
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Digital coaxial cable (supplied: 1 cable)  
Digital optical cable (not supplied)  
DIGITAL OUT  
PCM/  
STREAM  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
Connecting digital recording equipment to the  
DIGITAL OUT terminal enables you to perform  
digital-to-digital recording.  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their  
manuals.  
7 Digital input terminals  
220V  
110V  
127V  
NOTE  
230 -  
240V  
The digital signal format transmitted through the DIGITAL OUT  
terminal is the same as that of the input signal. For example,  
when the DTS signals are input, the DTS signals are transmitted.  
When the component has a digital coaxial output  
terminal, connect it to the 1(DVR/DVD) terminal,  
using a digital coaxial cable (supplied).  
Connecting the power cord  
When all the audio/video connections have been made, connect  
the AC power plug to the wall outlet. Make sure that the plugs are  
inserted firmly. The standby lamp lights in red.  
CAUTIONS:  
1(DVR/DVD)  
DIGITAL IN  
2(DBS)  
3(VCR)  
• Do not plug in before setting the VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch  
on the rear of the receiver and all connection procedures are  
complete.  
• Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.  
• Do not alter, twist or pull the power cord, or put anything heavy  
on it, which may cause fire, electric shock, or other accidents.  
• If the cord is damaged, consult a dealer and have the power  
cord replaced with a new one.  
When the component has a digital optical output  
terminal, connect it to the 2(DBS) or 3(VCR)  
terminal, using a digital optical cable (not supplied).  
NOTES  
• Keep the power cord away from the connecting cables and the  
antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen  
interference.  
Before connecting a digital  
optical cable, unplug the  
protective plug.  
• The preset settings such as preset channels and sound  
adjustment may be erased in a few days in the following cases:  
– When you unplug the power cord.  
– When a power failure occurs.  
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug, use the supplied  
AC plug adaptor.  
NOTES  
• When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have  
been set for use with the following components:  
– 1(DVR/DVD): For DVD recorder or DVD player  
– 2(DBS):  
– 3(VCR):  
For DBS tuner  
For VCR  
If you connect other components, change the digital input  
(DIGITAL IN) terminal setting correctly. See “Setting the digital  
input (DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3” on page 24.  
• Select the digital input mode. See “Selecting the analog or  
digital input mode” on page 12.  
• When you want to operate the connected component (except  
DBS tuner) using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system  
(see pages 40 and 41), connect them also as described on  
pages 7 to 10.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Select the source to play  
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until the source name  
you want appears on the display.  
Basic operations  
On the front panel:  
The source lamp corresponding to the selected source lights in  
red.  
• As you turn SOURCE SELECTOR, the source changes as  
follows:  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
The on-screen display appears on the TV screen for 5 seconds  
(except “turning off the sounds temporarily”) to show the  
indication in the following cases:  
– When you select the source (see right column).  
– When you adjust the volume (see page 13).  
– When you turn off the sounds temporarily (see page 15).  
– When you select the Surround/DSP modes (see page 39).  
To cancel the function, set “SUPERIMPOSE” to “SUPERIMPOSE:  
OFF” (see page 25).  
DVD MULTI  
DVR/DVD (DGT)  
DBS (DIGITAL)  
VCR (DIGITAL)  
TV (DIGITAL)  
(Back to the beginning)  
FM  
AM  
DVD MULTI:  
Select for the DVD player using the analog  
discrete output mode (5.1-channel  
reproduction).  
1
2
3
DVR/DVD (DGT) : Select for the DVD recorder or DVD player.  
*
VCR (DIGITAL) : Select for the VCR.  
*
DBS (DIGITAL) : Select for the DBS tuner.  
*
Source lamps  
TV (DIGITAL) :  
Select for the TV.  
*
FM:  
AM:  
Select for an FM broadcast.  
Select for an AM broadcast.  
1
2
From the remote control:  
Press one of the source selecting buttons.  
• For the tuner, press FM/AM. Each time you press FM/AM, the  
band alternates between “FM” and “AM.”  
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control, set  
the mode selector to  
3
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
* Selecting the analog or digital input mode  
For a component you have connected using both the analog  
connection and the digital connection methods (see pages 7 to 11),  
you need to select the correct input mode.  
You can select the digital input only for sources which you have  
selected digital input terminals for. (See “Setting the digital input  
(DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3” on page 24.)  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Press ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT to select the  
analog or digital input mode.  
1 Turn on the power  
AUDIO on the  
• Each time you press the button, the input mode alternates  
between the analog input (“ANALOG”) and the digital input  
(“DGTL AUTO”).  
Press  
STANDBY/ON (or  
This setting is memorized for each source.  
remote control).  
The standby lamp goes off and the source lamp of the current  
source lights in red.  
DGTL AUTO:  
Select for the digital input mode. The receiver  
automatically detects the incoming signal  
format, then the digital signal format indicator  
(LPCM, DOLBY D, DTS, or DTS 96/24) for  
the detected signal lights up.  
Current source name appears.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
ANALOG:  
Select for the analog input mode.  
Initial setting: DGTL AUTO  
To turn off the power (into standby)  
NOTE  
Press  
again.  
STANDBY/ON (or  
AUDIO on the remote control)  
When you select “DVD MULTI,FM,or “AM” as the source, the  
analog and digital input mode is not available.  
The standby lamp lights in red.  
NOTE  
A small amount of power is consumed in standby mode. To turn  
the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Adjust the volume  
Selecting the digital decode mode  
If the following symptoms occur while playing Dolby Digital or DTS  
software with “DGTL AUTO” selected (see page 12), follow the  
procedure below:  
• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.  
• Noise comes out while searching for or skipping chapters or  
tracks.  
To increase the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME  
control clockwise (or press VOLUME + on the  
remote control).  
To decrease the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME  
control counterclockwise (or press VOLUME – on  
the remote control).  
• When you adjust the volume, the volume level indication  
appears on the display for a while.  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Press SOUND, then press DECODE to select  
“DOLBY D” or “DTS.”  
• Each time you press DECODE, the digital decode mode  
changes as follows:  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
CAUTION:  
Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any  
sources. If the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of  
sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin  
your speakers.  
DGTL AUTO  
DOLBY D  
(Back to the beginning)  
DTS  
To play back software encoded with Dolby Digital, select  
“DOLBY D.”  
To play back software encoded with DTS, select “DTS.”  
NOTE  
The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0”  
(minimum) to “50” (maximum).  
NOTES  
• When you turn off the power or select another source,  
“DOLBY D” or “DTS” is canceled and the digital decode mode is  
automatically reset to “DGTL AUTO.”  
• After pressing SOUND, the numeric buttons work for sound  
adjustments. To use the numeric buttons to operate your target  
source, press the corresponding source selecting button before  
operation; otherwise, the remote control may not work as you  
intend.  
Listening with headphones  
You can enjoy not only stereo software but also multi-channel  
software through the headphones. (Sounds are down-mixed to the  
front channels while playing multi-channel software.)  
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the  
front panel to activate the HEADPHONE mode.  
The HP (headphone) indicator lights up on the display.  
You can also enjoy the Surround/DSP mode through the  
headphones—3D HEADPHONE mode. For details, see pages  
36 and 37.  
• Disconnecting a pair of headphones from the PHONES jack  
cancels the HEADPHONE (or 3D HEADPHONE) mode and  
activates the speakers.  
The following digital signal format indicators on the display  
indicate what type of signal comes into the receiver.  
LPCM:  
Lights up when Linear PCM signal comes in.  
DOLBY D: • Lights up when Dolby Digital signal comes in.  
• Flashes when “DOLBY D” is selected for any  
software other than Dolby Digital.  
CAUTION:  
DTS:  
• Lights up when conventional DTS signal comes  
in.  
• Flashes when “DTS” is selected for any  
software other than DTS.  
Be sure to turn down the volume:  
• Before connecting or putting on headphones, as high volume  
can damage both the headphones and your hearing.  
• Before removing headphones, as high volume may output from  
the speakers.  
DTS 96/24: Lights up when DTS 96/24 signal comes in.  
NOTE  
When “DGTL AUTO” cannot recognize the incoming signal, no  
digital signal format indicator lights up on the display.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Activating TV Direct  
TV Direct enables you to use this receiver as an AV selector  
while the receiver is turned off.  
When TV Direct is activated, the pictures and sounds go from the  
video components such as DVD player to the TV through this  
receiver. Thus, you can use the video components and the TV as  
if they were connected directly.  
• This function takes effect for the following sources—DVR/DVD,  
VCR, and DBS.  
To activate (or deactivate) TV Direct, follow the procedure below:  
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control, set  
the mode selector to  
1 Press TV DIRECT.  
All the indications disappear, then the source lamp of the  
current source lights in green.  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
2 Turn on the video component and TV.  
3 Select the target video component.  
On the front panel:  
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until one of the  
source lamps—DVR/DVD, VCR, or DBS—lights  
in green.  
From the remote control:  
Press one of the source selecting buttons—  
DVR/DVD, VCR, or DBS.  
The source lamp corresponding to the selected source lights  
in green.  
Adjusting the subwoofer audio  
position  
If the subwoofer sound is much reinforced for stereo sound  
compared to the sound reproduced with multi-channel, set the  
subwoofer audio position. The subwoofer output level is  
automatically decreased by the selected value when you are  
listening in stereo.  
To cancel TV Direct and turn off the receiver, press  
STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or  
control).  
AUDIO on the remote  
The receiver is turned off and the standby lamp lights up.  
The AUDIO P. indicator lights up when this function is activated.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
To cancel TV Direct and turn on the receiver, press TV DIRECT  
again.  
The receiver is turned on and the source lamp currently selected  
lights in red.  
From the remote control ONLY:  
NOTES  
Press SOUND, then press A.POSITION repeatedly.  
• When TV Direct is activated, you cannot enjoy any of the sound  
effects the receiver produces, and cannot use the speakers  
connected to the receiver.  
• When TV Direct is activated while “DVD MULTI,FM,or “AM” is  
selected as the source, the source changes to the last selected  
source—“DVR/DVD,VCR,or “DBS.”  
• Each time you press A.POSITION, the subwoofer audio position  
level changes as follows:  
AUDIO P. indicator  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
–2  
–4  
–6  
OFF (canceled)  
The smaller the number becomes, the more the level decreases  
automatically when listening in stereo.  
• If no adjustment is required, select “OFF” (initial setting).  
NOTES  
• The minimum subwoofer output level is –10 dB.  
Ex.: When setting the subwoofer output level to “–8 (dB)” and  
the subwoofer audio position to “–4 (dB),the subwoofer  
output level when listening in stereo will be –10 dB.  
To adjust the subwoofer output level, see page 29.  
• This function is not available when the Surround/DSP mode is  
activated or “DVD MULTI” is selected.  
• After pressing SOUND, the numeric buttons work for sound  
adjustments. To use the numeric buttons to operate your target  
source, press the corresponding source selecting button before  
operation; otherwise, the remote control may not work as you  
intend.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To cancel the Sleep Timer:  
Press SLEEP repeatedly so that “SLEEP OFF” appears on the  
display. (The SLEEP indicator goes off.)  
• The Sleep Timer is also canceled when:  
You turn off the receiver, or  
Turning off the sounds temporarily  
From the remote control ONLY:  
– TV Direct is activated.  
Press MUTING to turn off the sound through all  
connected speakers and headphones.  
“MUTING” appears on the display and the volume turns off.  
Basic adjustment of auto memory  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
This receiver memorizes sound settings for each source:  
• when you turn off the power, and  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
• when you change the source.  
To restore the sound, press MUTING again.  
When you change the source, the memorized settings for the  
newly selected source are automatically recalled.  
The following can be stored for each source:  
• Analog/digital input mode (see page 12)  
• Subwoofer audio position (see page 14)  
• Midnight mode (see page 24)  
• Speaker output level (see page 29)  
• Digital equalization pattern (see page 30)  
• Bass boost (see page 30)  
• Pressing VOLUME +/– (or turning MASTER VOLUME control  
on the front panel) also restores the sound.  
Changing the display brightness  
You can dim the display—Dimmer.  
• Subwoofer phase (see page 30)  
• Input attenuator mode (see page 30)  
• Surround/DSP mode selection (see page 39)  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Press DIMMER repeatedly.  
• Each time you press the button, the display brightness changes  
as follows:  
NOTE  
If the source is “FM” or “AM,” you can assign a different setting  
for each band.  
DIMMER 1:  
Dims the display slightly.  
Dims the blue illumination slightly.  
Dims the display more than DIMMER 1.  
Dims the blue illumination slightly (more than  
DIMMER 1).  
DIMMER 2:  
Signal and speaker indicators on the display  
Signal indicators  
Speaker indicators  
DIMMER 3:  
Turns off the display and blue illumination.  
(Temporarily canceled when you operate the  
receiver.*)  
L
C
R
L
C
R
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P.  
DIMMER OFF: Cancels the Dimmer (normal display).  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO :
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
x
S.WFRLFE  
OLBY D  
DTS
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
* Except when activating or deactivating TV Direct.  
LS SB RS  
The signal indicators light up as follows:  
Turning off the power with the Sleep  
Timer  
L:  
When digital input is selected: Lights up when the  
left channel signal comes in.  
When analog input is selected: Always lights up.  
When digital input is selected: Lights up when the  
right channel signal comes in.  
When analog input is selected: Always lights up.  
Lights up when the center channel signal comes in.  
You can fall asleep while listening to music—Sleep Timer.  
R:  
C:  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Press SLEEP repeatedly.  
• Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes in 10  
minute intervals. The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display.  
LS*: Lights up when the left surround channel signal comes  
in.  
RS*: Lights up when the right surround channel signal comes  
SLEEP indicator  
in.  
SB: Lights up when the surround back channel signal  
comes in.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
LFE: Lights up when the LFE channel signal comes in.  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
* When monaural surround signal comes in, only “S” lights up.  
10  
20  
30  
40  
90  
50  
80  
60  
NOTE  
When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, all the signal  
indicators except “SB” light up.  
OFF (canceled)  
70  
When the shut-off time comes:  
The receiver turns off automatically.  
The speaker indicators light up as follows:  
S . WFR  
• The subwoofer indicator (  
) lights up when  
“SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER:YES.” For details,  
see page 21.  
• The other speaker indicators light up only when the  
corresponding speaker is set to “SMALLor “LARGE,and  
also when required for the current playback.  
To check or change the remaining time until the shut-off  
time:  
Press SLEEP once.  
The remaining time (in minutes) until the shut-off time appears.  
To change the shut-off time, press SLEEP repeatedly.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Basic settings  
When operating the receiver using the remote control,  
set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
To obtain the best possible sound effect from Surround/DSP  
modes (see pages 34 to 39), you need to set up the speaker and  
subwoofer information after all the connections are completed.  
From pages 16 to 25, how to set speakers and other basic items  
of the receiver are explained.  
1
Take your position where you listen to the  
sound.  
• Make sure speaker cables are connected firmly.  
Setting the speaker information  
automatically—Smart Surround Setup  
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of  
the important elements to obtain the best possible sound effect  
from the Surround/DSP modes.  
By using Smart Surround Setup, the following are automatically  
calculated by one simple action—clapping hands.  
• Speaker distance (compared to that of the closest speaker)  
• Speaker output level (except the subwoofer)  
NOTES  
2 Press and hold SMART SURROUND SETUP  
• Before starting Smart Surround Setup, set the speaker  
information correctly (SMALL, LARGE, or NO) according to your  
speakers except the subwoofer (see page 21).  
• The speakers which are set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see  
page 21) are not indicated clearly on the TV screen.  
• When the setting is made by Smart Surround Setup, the  
speaker distance and output level you have set before will be  
inactive.  
until “SETTING UP” flashes.  
*1  
*2  
*3  
SMART SURROUND SETUP  
L
C
R
You can see the setting process on the TV screen and the  
display during Smart Surround Setup. If you have turned off the  
display, cancel the Dimmer (see page 15); otherwise, you  
cannot see the information on the display.  
SETTING UP  
SB  
LS  
RS  
*6  
*4  
• Smart Surround Setup will not be done correctly if you or other  
object blocks the sound.  
• When you change your speakers, do the following procedure  
again.  
*5  
*1  
*2  
*3  
*4  
*5  
*6  
L: Left front speaker  
C: Center speaker  
R: Right front speaker  
RS: Right surround speaker  
SB: Surround back speaker  
LS: Left surround speaker  
In this section, the on-screen display on the TV screen is used  
for explaining.  
• The on-screen display does not appear on the TV screen  
when connecting the TV through the COMPONENT  
MONITOR OUT jacks (see page 10).  
3 When “CLAPYOUR HANDS.appears, clap  
your hands over your head once while the  
indications still remain.  
• On the display, SETTING UP” stops flashing.  
The receiver starts detecting the level of the sound coming  
through each speaker (except the subwoofer).  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When your clapping sound is detected successfully,  
When your clapping sound is not detected correctly,  
• On the TV screen, “SUCCESSFUL,RESULT,” and the setting  
“SETTING UP” appears again after one of the following  
values appear. The setting values are shown for about 12  
messages. In this case, repeat step 3.  
seconds.  
Ex.:  
SILENT:  
• The receiver detects sound from only the left  
and right front speakers.  
• The receiver detects no sound from the front  
speakers and detects sound from at least one of  
other speakers.  
*7  
SMART SURROUND SETUP  
L+2  
C 0 R+2  
STD+0.3m  
SILENT-ALL: The receiver cannot detect any sound from any  
+0.3m  
speaker for about 10 seconds.  
AGAIN:  
• The receiver cannot detect sound from the left  
or right front speaker.  
• The receiver fails to calculate the speakers'  
output level and difference of each speaker's  
position in distance.  
LS+6 SUCCESSFUL RS+6  
+1.2m  
RESULT  
+1.2m  
*8  
*9  
SB+4  
+0.6m  
In the following cases, set the speakers manually.  
• On the display, SUCCESSFULappears, then the setting  
values are shown as follows for about 12 seconds:  
Ex.:  
• When “SILENT” appears twice in succession.  
The setting is partially made. (The distance of the speakers  
from which sound has not been detected is set to “+9.0m  
(+30ft).)  
*7  
The receiver exits from Smart Surround Setup.  
• When “MANUALappears.  
The receiver fails to detect the sound three times. The receiver  
exits from Smart Surround Setup.  
*8  
*9  
To cancel Smart Surround Setup, press SMART SURROUND  
SETUP while “SETTING UP” flashes.  
• No other operations can be accepted after “SETTING UP” stops  
flashing. Complete the Smart Surround Setup.  
R
LS  
L
RS  
C
SB  
To check the current setting made by Smart Surround Setup,  
press SMART SURROUND SETUP while the receiver is in  
normal operation mode.  
*7  
Standard channel (the closest speaker).  
This speaker position now works as the reference  
position (“0m/ft”) and other speakers’ distance is  
shown by the difference with this reference speaker  
position.  
The setting values appear. On the display, the setting values are  
shown one after another.  
• The current setting is not indicated but “MANUALappears if you  
change the following settings after using Smart Surround Setup:  
– If you change speaker distance manually.  
*8  
*9  
Difference of each speaker position in distance (in  
meters or feet).  
Each speaker’s output level (–6 to +6).  
– If you change one of the speaker sizes either from “NO” to  
“SMALLor “LARGE,or from “SMALLor “LARGE” to “NO.”  
To check the current setting, see each setting item of the  
speaker distance (see page 22) and the speaker output level  
(see page 29).  
When finishing to show the setting values,  
• If you have not used Smart Surround Setup, “NO S.S.S.”  
appears.  
On the TV screen, “COMPLETED” appears, then “TEST TONE”  
and “END” appear. On the display, TEST? END?” appears.  
To adjust the speakers’ output levels manually, press TEST  
TONE (see page 29).  
To disappear the on-screen display, press SET or any button  
except TEST TONE.  
• The receiver returns to normal operation mode automatically if  
no operations are done for about 10 seconds.  
Ex.:  
NOTES  
• The speaker distance and output level manually set will be  
applied instead of those set by using Smart Surround Setup in  
the following cases:  
– When you change one of the speaker distance (see page 22).  
– When you change one of the speaker size either from “NO” to  
“SMALLor “LARGE,or from “SMALLor “LARGE” to “NO”  
(see page 21).  
• When you want to adjust the speaker distance and output level  
manually, see pages 22 and 29.  
• When the headphone is in use or “DVD MULTI” is selected as  
the source, the receiver returns to normal operation mode  
without showing “TEST TONE.”  
SMART SURROUND SETUP  
L+2  
+0.3m  
C 0 R+2  
STD+0.3m  
LS+6  
+1.2m  
TEST TONE RS+6  
END  
+1.2m  
SB+4  
+0.9m  
• Do not clap your hands so hard that it may hurt your hands.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic setting items  
You can adjust the following items. See pages in parentheses for details.  
You cannot select the items which is not available with the current setting.  
• The name of the item shown below is the on-screen display indication and the name in parentheses is the display indication.  
Items and to do  
SUBWOOFER (SUBWOOFER)  
DUAL MONO (DUAL MONO)  
Register your subwoofer. (21)  
Select the Dual Mono sound channel. (23)  
FRONT SPK (FRONT SPK)  
SUBWFR OUT (SUBWFR OUT)  
Register your front speaker size. (21)  
Select sounds emitted from the subwoofer. (23)  
CENTER SPK (CENTER SPK)  
CROSSOVER (CROSSOVER)  
Register your center speaker size. (21)  
Select the cutoff frequency to the subwoofer. (23)  
SURR. SPK (SURRND SPK)  
LFE ATT (LFE ATT)  
Register your surround speaker size. (21)  
Attenuate the bass (LFE) sounds. (23)  
SURR. BACK SPK (S BACK SPK)  
MIDNIGHT (MIDNIGHT)  
Register your surround back speaker size. (21)  
Reproduce a powerful sound at night. (24)  
DISTANCE UNIT (DIST UNIT)  
DIGITAL IN 1 (DIGITAL IN1)  
Select the measuring unit for the speaker distance. (22)  
Select the component connected to the digital coaxial  
terminal—1(DVR/DVD). (24)  
FL SPK DISTANCE (FRNT L DIST)*  
Register the distance from the left front speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
DIGITAL IN 2 (DIGITAL IN2)  
Select the component connected to the digital optical  
terminal—2(VIDEO). (24)  
FR SPK DISTANCE (FRNT R DIST)*  
Register the distance from the right front speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
DIGITAL IN 3 (DIGITAL IN3)  
Select the component connected to the digital optical  
terminal—3(TV). (24)  
C SPK DISTANCE (CENTER DIST)*  
Register the distance from the center speaker to your listening DVD VIDEO (DVD VIDEO)  
point. (22)  
Select the type of video terminal used for the DVD recorder or  
DVD player. (25)  
LS SPK DISTANCE (SURR L DIST)*  
Register the distance from the left surround speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
VCR VIDEO (VCR VIDEO)  
Select the type of video terminal used for the VCR. (25)  
RS SPK DISTANCE (SURR R DIST)*  
Register the distance from the right surround speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
SUPERIMPOSE (SUPERIMPOSE)  
Select to superimpose the menus on the TV screen. (25)  
DOWN MIX (DOWN MIX)  
SB SPK DISTANCE (S BACK DIST)*  
Register the distance from the surround back speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
Select to convert S-video signals into composite video signals.  
(25)  
Y/C SEPARATE (Y/C SEP.)  
EX/ES/PLIIx (EX/ES/PLIIx)  
Select to convert composite video signals into S-video signals.  
(25)  
Select the EX/ES/PLIIx reproduction mode. (22)  
* If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17, these settings are not required.  
Operation through on-screen display menus  
You can make adjustments to the basic settings easily by using the on-screen display menus.  
Menu operation buttons  
From the remote control:  
On the front panel:  
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control,  
set the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Button / JOG  
To do  
SETTING button show setting item previously selected.  
SET button  
move to the selected menu or return to the  
previous SETTING MENU.  
Button  
To do  
MULTI JOG  
• select a menu or an item.  
• change a setting.  
MENU button show “TOP MENU.”  
5 / buttons select a menu or an item.  
SET button  
move to the selected menu or return to the  
previous SETTING MENU.  
2 / 3 buttons change a setting.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menu configuration  
• Items on the menus shown below are all set to the initial values when shipping from the factory.  
• Some of the menus or some items on the menu cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted depending on the current settings and the  
connections. (For details, see the respective explanations in this section.)  
TOP MENU  
SETTING MENU (5)  
SETTING MENU (1)  
TOP MENU  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
SETTING MENU (1)  
SUBWOOFER  
5
SUBWOOFER  
FRONT SPK  
CENTER SPK  
SURR. SPK  
:
NO  
: LARGE  
: SMALL  
: SMALL  
FRONT SPEAKER  
SURR. BACK SPK : SMALL  
CENTER SPEAKER  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
SURROUND SPEAKER  
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
SETTING MENU (2)  
SETTING MENU (2)  
DISTANCE UNIT  
5
DISTANCE UNIT  
:meter  
FL SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
FR SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
C SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
LS SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
RS SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
SB SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
FL SPK DISTANCE  
FR SPK DISTANCE  
CENTER SPK DISTANCE  
LS SPK DISTANCE  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
RS SPK DISTANCE  
SB SPK DISTANCE  
SETTING MENU (3)  
SETTING MENU (3)  
5
EX/ES/PL x  
DUAL MONO  
EX/ES/PL x :  
DUAL MONO :  
SUBWFR OUT :  
CROSSOVER :  
AUTO  
MAIN  
150Hz  
0dB  
LFE ATT  
MIDNIGHT  
:
:
SUBWOOFER OUT  
CROSSOVER  
OFF  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
LFE ATT  
MIDNIGHT MODE  
SETTING MENU (4)  
SETTING MENU (4)  
DIGITAL IN 1  
DIGITAL IN 2  
DIGITAL IN 3  
DVD VIDEO INPUT  
VCR VIDEO INPUT  
5
DIGITAL IN 1: DVR/DVD  
DIGITAL IN 2:  
DIGITAL IN 3:  
DBS  
VCR  
S/C  
S/C  
DVD VIDEO  
VCR VIDEO  
:
:
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
SETTING MENU (5)  
SETTING MENU (5)  
SUPERIMPOSE  
DOWN MIX  
5
SUPERIMPOSE :  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
DOWN MIX  
:
Y/C SEPARATE:  
Y/C SEPARATE  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
SETTING MENU (1)  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu operating procedure  
When operating, the on-screen display appears on the TV screen regardless of the SUPERIMPOSE setting (see page 25).  
Before you start, remember...  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.  
In this section, the operation of the remote control is used for explaining.  
Ex.:When setting DIGITAL IN 1 terminal.  
Operations  
On the TV screen  
On the display  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
1 To show “TOP MENU,press MENU.  
x
ATT  
TOP MENU  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
“SETTING” appears.  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
“TOP MENU” appears.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
2 To select “SETTING MENU,press SET.  
x
ATT  
SETTING MENU (1)  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
5
SUBWOOFER  
FRONT SPK  
CENTER SPK  
SURR. SPK  
:
NO  
: LARGE  
: SMALL  
: SMALL  
The submenu previously  
selected appears.  
SURR. BACK SPK : SMALL  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
The setting item previously selected  
appears.  
3 To select the desired submenu, press  
5 or repeatedly.  
There are five screens from “SETTING MENU (1)”  
to “SETTING MENU (5).” To change the screen,  
simply pressing 5 or repeatedly.You can go to  
the next/previous screen.  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.  
Button indications on the screen  
The buttons for operating the menu are shown on the TV screen.You can operate the menu with these buttons.  
TOP MENU  
DIGITAL IN 1  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
23:OPERATE  
:BACK  
Usable buttons and their functions  
Usable buttons and their functions  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
x
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
4 Press SET.  
DIGITAL IN 1  
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3  
The current setting of the  
selected item appears.  
23:OPERATE  
:BACK  
The selected submenu appears.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
5 To select the appropriate setting, press  
2 or 3 repeatedly, then press SET.  
x
ATT  
DIGITAL IN 1  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3  
The on-screen display returns to the previous  
SETTING MENU. In this example, “SETTING MENU  
(4)” appears on the TV screen and “DIGITAL IN1”  
appears on the display.  
DVR/DVD  
TV  
DBS  
VCR  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG, then press  
SET.  
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set other items  
if necessary.  
NOTES  
To return to “TOP MENU,” press MENU on the remote control.  
To exit from menu operations, press MENU on the remote control when “TOP MENU” appears. On the front panel, press SETTING  
when a menu except “TOP MENU” appears.  
• The setting item previously selected can be shown on the TV screen by pressing SETTING on the front panel when the receiver is in  
normal operation mode.  
Setting the items  
When performing the basic settings viewing the indications on the display, the indications are slightly different from what is shown  
on the on-screen display.  
This is because of the limited number of characters shown on the display.  
Ex.: • “SUBWOOFER:YES” is shown as “SUBWFR:YES” on the display.  
• “MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF” is shown as “NIGHT: OFF” on the display.  
7 Setting the speaker size—FRONT SPEAKER,  
CENTER SPEAKER, SURROUND SPEAKER,  
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER  
Setting the speakers  
7 Setting subwoofer information—SUBWOOFER  
Each time the receiver turns on, the receiver detects the  
subwoofer connection and automatically changes the setting of  
the subwoofer.  
When you want to change the setting manually, select either one  
below.  
Register the sizes of all the connected speakers.  
LARGE  
SMALL  
NO  
Select when the cone speaker size is larger than  
12 cm.  
Select when the cone speaker size is smaller than  
12 cm.  
SUBWOOFER:YES  
Select when you have connected a subwoofer.  
Select when you have disconnected a speaker.  
(Not selectable for the front speakers.)  
S . WFR  
The subwoofer indicator (  
) lights up on the display.You  
can adjust the subwoofer output level (see page 29).  
SUBWOOFER: NO  
Initial setting: SMALL for all speakers*  
Select when you have disconnected a subwoofer. Selecting  
this changes the front speaker size to “LARGE” (see right  
column).  
* When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER: NO,the front  
speaker size is fixed to “LARGE” (and you cannot select  
“SMALL).  
NOTES  
NOTE  
• If you have selected “SMALLfor the front speaker size, you  
cannot select “LARGE” for other speakers.  
You need to change the setting each time you turn on the receiver  
if you want to change the subwoofer information set automatically.  
• When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:  
SMALL,” you cannot select “LARGE” for the surround back  
speaker.  
• When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:  
NO,” the surround back speaker is fixed to “NO.”  
• If you change one of the speaker sizes either from “NO” to  
“SMALLor “LARGE,or from “SMALLor “LARGE” to “NO,the  
distance manually set will be applied instead of those set by  
using Smart Surround Setup.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Setting the speaker distance  
Activating the EX/ES/PLIIx setting  
—EX/ES/PLIIx  
Depending on this setting, available Surround modes for digital  
multi-channel software vary—EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel)  
reproduction or 5.1-channel reproduction. Select an appropriate  
setting for your enjoyment.  
• For details about relation between EX/ES/PLIIx setting and  
available Surround mode, see page 38.  
To activate the Surround mode, see page 39.  
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of  
the important elements to obtain the best possible sound effect  
from the Surround/DSP modes.  
By referring to the speaker distance, the receiver automatically  
sets the delay time of the sound through each speaker so that  
sounds through all the speakers can reach you at the same time.  
• If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17,  
this setting is not required.  
7 Measuring unit—DISTANCE UNIT  
Select which measuring unit you use.  
EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO  
According to the incoming signal, an appropriate Surround  
mode is applied.  
DISTANCE UNIT: meter Select to set the distance in meters.  
DISTANCE UNIT: feet  
Select to set the distance in feet.  
• For Dolby Digital Surround EX and DTS-ES software, 6.1-  
channel reproduction is applied*.  
• For other multi-channel (more than 4 channel) encoded  
software, 5.1-channel reproduction is applied.  
Initial setting: DISTANCE UNIT: meter  
7 Speaker distance—  
EX/ES/PLIIx: ON  
FL SPK DISTANCE (for the left front speaker),  
FR SPK DISTANCE (for the right front speaker),  
CENTER SPK DISTANCE (for the center speaker),  
LS SPK DISTANCE (for the left surround speaker),  
RS SPK DISTANCE (for the right surround speaker),  
SB SPK DISTANCE (for the surround back speaker)  
Select to apply 6.1-channel reproduction to both 5.1-channel  
and 6.1-channel encoded software.  
EX/ES/PLIIx: PLIIx MOVIE  
Select to apply “PLIIx MOVIE” (6.1-channel) reproduction to  
both 5.1-channel and 6.1-channel encoded software.  
Adjustable range: 0.3 m to 9.0 m in 0.3 m intervals  
EX/ES/PLIIx: PLIIx MUSIC  
(1 ft to 30 ft in 1 ft intervals)  
Select to apply “PLIIx MUSIC” (6.1-channel) reproduction to  
both 5.1-channel and 6.1-channel encoded software.  
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10 ft) for all speakers  
EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF  
Select to cancel the EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel) reproduction.  
C
R
L
Initial setting: EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO  
3.3 m  
(11 ft)  
3.0 m  
(10 ft)  
2.7 m  
(9 ft)  
* For some Dolby Digital Surround EX software, Dolby Digital 5.1-  
channel reproduction (“DOLBY D”) may be applied even though  
you have selected “EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO.In this case, select  
“EX/ES/PLIIx: ON” to apply “DOLBY D EX.”  
2.4 m  
(8 ft)  
From the remote control  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
2.1 m  
(7 ft)  
LS  
RS  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Press EX/ES repeatedly to select an  
appropriate setting for your  
enjoyment.  
SB  
In this case, set the distance as follows:  
Left front speaker (L):  
Right front speaker (R):  
Center speaker (C):  
“FRONT L: 3.0m (10ft)”  
“FRONT R: 3.0m (10ft)”  
“CENTER: 3.0m (10ft)”  
Left surround speaker (LS): “SURROUND L: 2.7m (9ft)”  
Right surround speaker (RS): “SURROUND R: 2.7m (9ft)”  
Surround back speaker (SB): “SURROUND BACK: 2.4m (8ft)”  
NOTES  
NOTES  
• This function is not available in the following cases:  
– When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:  
NO” (see page 21).  
You cannot set the speaker distance for the speakers you have  
set to “NO.”  
– When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source.  
• When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK  
SPK: NO” (see page 21), the Virtual Surround Back (see page  
38) is applied to EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel) reproduction.  
• If you change one of these settings manually, the distance  
manually set will be applied instead of those set by using Smart  
Surround Setup.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the main or sub channel  
—DUAL MONO  
You can select the playback sound (channel) you want while  
playing digital software recorded (or broadcasted) in Dual Mono  
mode (see page 36), which includes two monaural channels  
separately.  
Setting bass sound  
7 Setting subwoofer output—SUBWOOFER OUT  
You can select the type of the signal which can be transmitted  
through the subwoofer. In other words, you can determine  
whether or not the bass elements of the front speaker channels  
are transmitted through the subwoofer regardless of the front  
speaker size setting (either “SMALLor “LARGE”).  
DUAL MONO: MAIN  
Select to play back the main channel (Ch 1).*  
Signal indicator “Llights up while playing back this channel.  
SUBWFR OUT: LFE  
Select to emit only the LFE signals (while playing Dolby  
Digital and DTS software) or the bass elements of the  
“SMALLfront speakers (while playing any source other than  
above).  
DUAL MONO: SUB  
Select to play back the sub-channel (Ch 2).*  
Signal indicator “R” lights up while playing back this channel.  
SUBWFR OUT: LFE+MAIN  
DUAL MONO: ALL  
Select to always emit the bass elements of the front speaker  
channels (MAIN). While playing Dolby Digital and DTS  
software, the bass elements and the LFE signals are both  
emitted.  
Select to play back both the main and sub-channels (Ch 1/Ch 2).*  
Signal indicators “Land “R” light up while playing back these  
channels.  
Initial setting: DUAL MONO: MAIN  
Initial setting: SUBWFR OUT: LFE  
* Dual Mono signals can be heard from the following speakers—L  
(left front speaker), R (right front speaker), and C (center  
speaker), with respect to the current Surround setting:  
NOTE  
When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER: NO” (see page  
21), this function is not available.  
With Surround Activated  
Without  
Surround  
Center speaker setting  
Dual Mono  
setting  
SMALL/LARGE  
NO  
7 Setting the crossover frequency—CROSSOVER  
L
R
L
C
Ch 1  
R
L
R
Small speakers cannot reproduce the bass sounds efficiently. If  
you use a small speaker in any position, this receiver  
automatically reallocates the bass sound elements assigned to  
the small speaker to the large speakers.  
MAIN  
SUB  
ALL  
Ch 1 Ch 1  
Ch 2 Ch 2  
Ch 1 Ch 2  
Ch 1  
Ch 2  
Ch1  
Ch 2  
Ch 2  
Ch 1+Ch 2  
Ch 1+Ch 2 Ch 1+Ch 2  
To use this function properly, set this crossover frequency level  
according to the size of the small speaker connected.  
• If you have selected “LARGE” for all speakers (see page 21),  
this function will not take effect (“CROSSOVER: OFF” appears).  
NOTE  
The Dual Mono format is not identical with bilingual broadcasting  
for TV programs. So this setting does not take effect while  
watching such bilingual programs.  
CROSSOVER: 80Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is about 12 cm.  
CROSSOVER: 100Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is about 10 cm.  
CROSSOVER: 120Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is about 8 cm.  
CROSSOVER: 150Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is about 6 cm.  
CROSSOVER: 200Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is less than 5 cm.  
Initial setting: CROSSOVER: 150Hz  
NOTE  
Crossover frequency is not valid for the HEADPHONE and 3D  
HEADPHONE modes.  
7 Setting the low frequency effect attenuator  
—LFE ATT  
If the bass sound is distorted while playing back software  
encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, set the LFE level to eliminate  
distortion.  
• This function takes effect only when the LFE signals come in.  
LFE ATT: 0dB  
Normally select this.  
LFE ATT: –10dB Select when the bass sound is distorted.  
Initial setting: LFE ATT: 0dB  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Midnight mode  
—MIDNIGHT MODE  
You can enjoy a powerful sound at night using the Midnight mode.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN)  
terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3  
When you use the digital input terminals, register what  
components are connected to which terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3  
(see page 11) so that the correct source name will appear when  
you select the digital source.  
Select one of the following components for each terminal:  
MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF  
Select when you want to enjoy surround with its full dynamic  
range. (No effect applied.)  
DVR/DVD For the DVD player (or DVD recorder).  
MIDNIGHT MODE: 1  
DBS  
VCR  
TV  
For the DBS tuner.  
For the VCR.  
For the TV.  
Select when you want to reduce the dynamic range a little.  
MIDNIGHT MODE: 2  
Select when you want to apply the compression effect fully  
(useful at night).  
Initial setting: DVR/DVD (for “DIGITAL IN 1”)  
DBS (for “DIGITAL IN 2”)  
Initial setting: MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF  
VCR (for “DIGITAL IN 3”)  
From the remote control  
NOTES  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
You cannot assign the same component for different terminals.  
The priority order for assignment is as follows:  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
“DIGITAL IN 1” > “DIGITAL IN 2” > “DIGITAL IN 3.”  
“DIGITAL IN 1” can be set to any component.  
Press SOUND, then press MIDNIGHT  
repeatedly to select either one of the  
above.  
Ex.: When “DIGITAL IN 1” is set to “TV.”  
DIGITAL IN 1:  
TV  
NOTE  
“DVR/DVD,” “DBS,” and “VCR” are selectable for “DIGITAL  
IN 2.”  
And when “DIGITAL IN 2” is set to “DVR/DVD.”  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
DIGITAL IN 1:  
DIGITAL IN 2:  
TV  
DVR/DVD  
“DBS” and “VCR” are selectable for “DIGITAL IN 3.”  
• Setting “DIGITAL IN 1” affects “DIGITAL IN 2” and “DIGITAL IN  
3” settings. When you have changed “DIGITAL IN 1,confirm the  
components assigned to “DIGITAL IN 2” and “DIGITAL IN 3.”  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the component video input  
mode—DVD VIDEO INPUT/VCR VIDEO  
INPUT  
When you use the component video inputs for connecting the  
DVD recorder (or DVD player) or VCR, register the type of video  
input jacks.  
Converting S-video signals into composite  
video signals—DOWN MIX  
You can select whether or not to convert S-video signals into  
composite video signals.  
DOWN MIX: ON Select to convert S-video signals into  
composite video signals.  
If you have not selected appropriate video input jacks, you cannot  
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK  
remote control system cannot operate properly (see page 40).  
DOWN MIX: OFF Select not to use this function.  
Initial setting: DOWN MIX: OFF  
For the DVD recorder or DVD player (DVD VIDEO):  
NOTES  
DVD VIDEO: S/C  
• This function is available when satisfying all the following  
requirements:  
Select when connecting the DVD recorder (or DVD player) to  
the composite video or S-video input jacks.  
– When a video component is connected to this receiver  
through at least one of the S-video input terminals.  
– When a video component or the TV is connected to this  
receiver through at least one of the composite video output  
jacks.  
DVD VIDEO: COMPONENT  
Select when connecting the DVD recorder (or DVD player) to  
the component video input jacks.  
– Either the DVD VIDEO INPUT or VCR VIDEO INPUT is set to  
“S/C” (see left column).  
Initial setting: DVD VIDEO: S/C  
• When using this function, set the input mode of the TV correctly.  
(Refer also to the manual supplied with the TV.)  
For the VCR (VCR VIDEO):  
VCR VIDEO: S/C  
Select when connecting the VCR to the composite video or S- Converting composite video signals into S-  
video input jacks.  
video signals—Y/C SEPARATE  
VCR VIDEO: COMPONENT  
You can select whether or not to convert composite video signals  
Select when connecting the VCR to the component video  
come from a video component into S-video signals.  
input jacks.  
Y/C SEPARATE: ON  
Select to convert composite video signals  
into S-video signals.  
Initial setting: VCR VIDEO: S/C  
Y/C SEPARATE: OFF Select not to use this function.  
Superimposing the menus  
—SUPERIMPOSE  
You can select whether or not to superimpose the on-screen  
display on the TV screen.  
Initial setting: Y/C SEPARATE: OFF  
NOTES  
• This function is available when satisfying all the following  
requirements:  
SUPERIMPOSE: ON  
– When a video component is connected to this receiver  
through at least one of the composite video input jacks.  
– When a video component or the TV is connected to this  
receiver through at least one of the S-video output terminals.  
– Either the DVD VIDEO INPUT or VCR VIDEO INPUT is set to  
“S/C” (see left column).  
Select to superimpose the on-screen display on the TV  
screen.  
SUPERIMPOSE: OFF  
Select to cancel superimposition. The on-screen display will  
be shown on the blue background screen.  
• When using this function, set the input mode of the TV correctly.  
(Refer also to the manual supplied with the TV.)  
Initial setting: SUPERIMPOSE: ON  
NOTES  
• Some on-screen displays appear on the TV screen regardless  
of this setting.  
• The on-screen display does not appear on the TV screen when  
connecting the TV through the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT  
jacks (see page 10).  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sound adjustments  
You can make sound adjustment to your preference after  
completing basic setting.  
Basic adjustment items  
You can adjust the following items. See pages in parentheses for details.  
You cannot select the items which is not available with the current setting.  
• The name of the item shown below is the on-screen display indication and the name in parentheses is the display indication.  
Items and to do  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL (SUBWFR LVL)  
BASS BOOST (BASS BOOST)  
Adjust the subwoofer output level. (29)  
Boost the bass level. (30)  
FRONT L LEVEL (FRONT L LVL)  
SUBWFR PHASE (SBWFR PHASE)  
Adjust the left front speaker output level. (29)  
Select the subwoofer sound phase. (30)  
FRONT R LEVEL (FRONT R LVL)  
INPUT ATT (INPUT ATT)  
Adjust the right front speaker output level. (29)  
Attenuate the input level of analog source. (30)  
CENTER LEVEL (CENTER LVL)  
EFFECT (EFFECT)  
Adjust the center speaker output level. (29)  
Adjust the effect level. (31)  
SURR. L LEVEL (SURR L LVL)  
PANORAMA (PANORAMA)  
Adjust the left surround speaker output level. (29)  
Add wraparound sound effect with side-wall image. (31)  
SURR. R LEVEL (SURR R LVL)  
CENTER GAIN (CENTER GAIN)  
Adjust the right surround speaker output level. (29)  
Adjust the sound localization of the center channel. (31)  
SURR. BACK LEVEL (S BACK LVL)  
CENTER TONE (CENTER TONE)  
Adjust the surround back speaker output level. (29)  
Make the center tone soft or sharp. (31)  
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz (D EQ 63Hz)*  
CNTR ALIGNMENT (CNTR ALIGN)  
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz (D EQ 250Hz)*  
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz (D EQ 1kHz)*  
Align the vertical localization of the center channel. (31)  
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz (D EQ 4kHz)*  
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz (D EQ 16kHz)*  
Adjust the equalization pattern of each band. (30)  
* If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17, these settings are not required.  
Operation through on-screen display menus  
You can make adjustments to the basic settings easily by using the on-screen display menus.  
Menu operation buttons  
On the front panel:  
From the remote control:  
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control,  
set the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Button / JOG  
To do  
ADJUST button show adjustment item previously selected.  
SET button  
move to the selected menu or return to the  
previous ADJUST MENU.  
Button  
To do  
MULTI JOG  
• select a menu or an item.  
• change a setting.  
MENU button show “TOP MENU.”  
5 / buttons select a menu or an item.  
SET button  
move to the selected menu or return to the  
previous ADJUST MENU.  
2 / 3 buttons change a setting.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menu configuration  
• Items on the menus shown below are all set to the initial values when shipping from the factory.  
• Some of the menus or some items on the menu cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted depending on the current settings and the  
connections. (For details, see the respective explanations in this section.)  
• The “ADJUST MENU (3)” screen cannot be shown depending on the current settings and the connections.  
ADJUST MENU (3)  
TOP MENU  
TOP MENU  
ADJUST MENU (1)  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
ADJUST MENU (1)  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL  
FRONT L LEVEL  
5
SUBWOOFER LEVEL :  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FRONT L LEVEL  
FRONT R LEVEL  
CENTER LEVEL  
SURR. L LEVEL  
SURR. R LEVEL  
:
:
:
:
:
FRONT R LEVEL  
CENTER LEVEL  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
SURR. BACK LEVEL :  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
SURROUND L LEVEL  
SURROUND R LEVEL  
SURROUND BACK LEVEL  
ADJUST MENU (2)  
ADJUST MENU (2)  
5
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz  
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz  
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz  
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz  
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz  
BASS BOOST  
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz :  
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz :  
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz :  
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz :  
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz :  
0
0
0
0
0
BASS BOOST  
: OFF  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
ADJUST MENU (3)  
ADJUST MENU (3)  
SUBWOOFER PHASE  
INPUT ATT  
EFFECT  
5
SUBWFR PHASE : NORMAL  
INPUT ATT  
EFFECT  
: NORMAL  
:
:
:
:
3
OFF  
0.3  
3
PANORAMA  
CENTER GAIN  
CENTER TONE  
CNTR ALIGNMENT:  
OFF  
PANORAMA  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
CENTER GAIN  
CENTER TONE  
CENTER ALIGNMENT  
ADJUST MENU (1)  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu operating procedure  
When operating, the on-screen display appears on the TV screen regardless of the SUPERIMPOSE setting (see page 25).  
Before you start, remember...  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.  
In this section, the operation of the remote control is used for explaining.  
Ex.:When adjusting subwoofer output level.  
Operations  
On the TV screen  
On the display  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
1 To show “TOP MENU,press MENU.  
Then press 5 or to select “ADJUST  
MENU.”  
x
ATT  
TOP MENU  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
“SETTING” appears.  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
“TOP MENU” appears.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
2 To select “ADJUST MENU,press SET.  
x
ATT  
ADJUST MENU (1)  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
5
SUBWOOFER LEVEL :  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FRONT L LEVEL  
FRONT R LEVEL  
CENTER LEVEL  
SURR. L LEVEL  
SURR. R LEVEL  
:
:
:
:
:
The submenu previously  
selected appears.  
SURR. BACK LEVEL :  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
The adjustment item previously selected  
appears.  
3 To select the desired submenu, press  
5 or repeatedly.  
There are three screens from “ADJUST MENU (1)”  
to “ADJUST MENU (3).” To change the screen,  
simply pressing 5 or repeatedly.You can go to  
the next/previous screen.  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
4 Press SET.  
x
ATT  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
SUBWOOFER  
:2  
0
3
The current setting of the  
selected item appears.  
23:OPERATE  
:BACK  
The selected submenu appears.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
5 To adjust the selected item, press 2 or  
3 repeatedly, then press SET.  
x
ATT  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
SUBWOOFER  
:2  
0
3
The on-screen display returns to the previous  
ADJUST MENU. In this example, “ADJUST MENU  
(1)” appears on the TV screen and “SUBWFR LVL”  
appears on the display.  
–10  
0
+10  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG, then press  
SET.  
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set other items  
if necessary.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
From the remote control:  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
To return to “TOP MENU,press MENU on the remote control.  
To exit from menu operations, press MENU on the remote  
control when “TOP MENU” appears. On the front panel, press  
ADJUST when a menu except “TOP MENU” appears.  
• The adjustment item previously selected can be shown on the  
TV screen by pressing ADJUST on the front panel when the  
receiver is in normal operation mode.  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
2
1, 3  
Button indications on the screen  
The buttons for operating the menu are shown on the TV  
screen.You can operate the menu with these buttons.  
1
Press TEST TONE to check the speakers’ output  
balance.  
TOP MENU  
• On the TV screen, “TEST TONE” appears. The  
indicator corresponding to the speaker appears while a  
test tone comes out of the speakers.  
EX.:  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
TEST TONE  
SW+1 L+5 C 0 R-3  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
LS+5  
RS+5  
Usable buttons and their functions  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL  
SB+5  
SUBWOOFER  
:2  
0
3
• On the display, TEST Lstarts flashing, and a test tone  
comes out of the speakers in the following order:  
23:OPERATE  
:BACK  
Usable buttons and their functions  
C
R
L
SW  
LS  
Adjusting the items  
RS  
When performing the basic settings viewing the indications  
on the display, the indications are slightly different from what  
is shown on the on-screen display.  
This is because of the limited number of characters shown  
on the display.  
SB  
2
Adjust the speaker output levels.  
To adjust the left front speaker level (L), press  
FRONT L +/–.  
Ex.: • “SUBWOOFER: +10” is shown as “SUBWFR +10” on  
the display.  
To adjust the right front speaker level (R), press  
FRONT R +/–.  
• “BASS BOOST: ON” is shown as “B BOOST ON” on  
the display.  
To adjust the center speaker level (C), press  
CENTER +/–.  
To adjust the left surround speaker level (LS), press  
SURR L +/–.  
Adjusting speaker output level  
• SUBWOOFER LEVEL (subwoofer output level),  
• FRONT L LEVEL (left front speaker output level),  
• FRONT R LEVEL (right front speaker output level),  
• CENTER LEVEL (center speaker output level),  
• SURROUND L LEVEL (left surround speaker output level),  
• SURROUND R LEVEL (right surround speaker output level),  
• SURROUND BACK LEVEL (surround back speaker output  
level)  
To adjust the right surround speaker level (RS), press  
SURR R +/–.  
To adjust the surround back speaker level (SB), press  
S.BACK +/–.  
To adjust the subwoofer level (SW), press SUBWFR +/–.  
3
Press TEST TONE again to stop the test tone.  
You can adjust the speaker output levels.  
Adjust all the speakers’ output levels so that you can listen to the  
sounds from all the speakers at the same level.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
NOTES  
You can adjust the speaker output levels without the test tone.  
• No test tone comes out of the speakers and no speaker  
indication appears on the TV screen corresponding to the  
speaker which is set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see  
page 21).  
Adjustable range: –10 (dB) to +10 (dB) (in 1 step intervals)  
Initial setting: 0 (dB) for all speakers  
• No test tone is available when the headphone is in use or  
“DVD MULTI” is selected.  
NOTES  
• If you have selected “NO” for a speaker (see page 21), the  
output level for the corresponding speaker is not adjustable.  
• While using the headphones, you can adjust only the left and  
right front speakers’ output level.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the equalization patterns  
Adjusting the bass sounds  
—DIGITAL EQ 63Hz/250Hz/1kHz/4kHz/16kHz  
You can adjust equalization patterns in five frequency bands  
(center frequency: 63 Hz, 250 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 16 kHz) for the  
front speakers.  
7 Reinforcing the bass—BASS BOOST  
You can boost the bass level—Bass Boost.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
BASS BOOST: ON Select to boost the bass level.  
The BASS indicator lights up on the display.  
Adjustable range: –8 (dB) to +8 (dB) (in 2 dB intervals)  
Initial setting: 0 (dB) for all bands  
BASS BOOST: OFF Select to deactivate the Bass Boost.  
• When adjustment is made, the EQ indicator lights up on the  
display.  
Initial setting: BASS BOOST: OFF  
NOTE  
If no adjustment is required, set all the frequency bands to  
“0 (dB).”  
This function affects only the sound coming out through the front  
speakers.  
• The EQ indicator goes off from the display.  
From the remote control:  
From the remote control:  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
Before you start, remember...  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is  
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
Press SOUND, then press BASS  
BOOST repeatedly.  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
• Each time you press BASS BOOST, the  
Bass Boost turns on and off alternately.  
1
2
Press SOUND.  
Press EQ FREQ repeatedly to  
select the band you want to adjust.  
NOTE  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
3
4
Press EQ LEVEL 9/( to adjust  
the equalization pattern of the  
selected band.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust  
other bands.  
2
3
NOTE  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
1
7 Selecting the subwoofer sound phase—  
SUBWOOFER PHASE  
You can change the subwoofer sound phase to your preference.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
PHASE: NORMAL  
Normally select this.  
PHASE: REVERSE Select this when you feel the bass sound is  
better with this mode rather than with  
“PHASE: NORMAL.”  
Initial setting: PHASE: NORMAL  
NOTE  
This function takes effect only when “SUBWOOFER” is set to  
“SUBWOOFER:YES” (see page 21).  
7 Attenuating the input signal—INPUT ATT  
When the input level of analog source is too high, the sound will  
be distorted. If this happens, you need to attenuate the input  
signal level to prevent the sound distortion.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
INPUT ATT: ON  
Select to attenuate the input signal level.  
The ATT indicator lights up on the display.  
INPUT ATT: NORMAL Select to deactivate attenuation.  
Initial setting: INPUT ATT: NORMAL  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Making the center tone soft or sharp  
Adjusting the sound parameters for the  
Surround/DSP modes  
You can adjust the Surround/DSP sound parameters to your  
preference.  
—CENTER TONE  
This setting is available when one of the Surround/DSP modes is  
in use. To activate Surround/DSP mode, see page 39.  
• This setting is common to all Surround modes, and is  
memorized separately for DSP modes.  
• For details about the Surround/DSP modes, see pages 34 to 39.  
You cannot adjust the center tone in the following cases:  
– When “CENTER SPEAKER” is set to “CENTER SPK: NO”  
(see page 21).  
– When Dual Mono software is played back.  
– While listening with the headphones.  
7 Adjusting the effect level for DSP modes  
—EFFECT  
This setting is available only when one of the DSP modes (except  
ALL CH ST) is in use. To activate DSP mode, see page 39.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
DSP mode.  
Adjustable range: 1 to 5 (in 1 step intervals)  
Initial setting: CENTER TONE: 3  
Adjustable range: 1 to 5 (in 1 step intervals)  
Initial setting: EFFECT: 3  
As the number increases, the dialogue becomes stronger.  
Normally, select “3.”  
• When the center tone is set to other than “CENTER TONE: 3,”  
the C.TONE indicator lights up on the display.  
As the number increases, the effect becomes stronger.  
Normally, select “3.”  
From the remote control:  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
From the remote control:  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Press SOUND, then press C.TONE  
repeatedly.  
Press SOUND, then press EFFECT  
repeatedly.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
7 Align the vertical localization of the center  
7 Adjusting the panorama control for Pro Logic II  
channel —CENTER ALIGNMENT  
Music—PANORAMA  
This setting is available when one of the Surround/DSP modes  
(except “PLII MUSIC,PLIIx MUSIC,Neo:6 MUSIC,and “ALL  
CH ST”) is in use. To activate Surround/DSP mode, see page 39.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
Surround/DSP mode.  
This setting is available only when Pro Logic II Music is in use. To  
activate Pro Logic II Music, see page 39.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized until you  
change the setting.  
You cannot adjust the center alignment in the following cases:  
– When “CENTER SPEAKER” is set to “CENTER SPK: NO”  
(see page 21).  
PANORAMA: ON  
Select to add “wraparound” sound effect with  
side-wall image.  
– When Dual Mono software is played back.  
– While listening with the headphones.  
PANORAMA: OFF Select to listen to originally recorded sound.  
Initial setting: PANORAMA: OFF  
C ALIGNMENT: ON Select when you cannot feel as if the actors  
or singers are speaking or singing on the  
screen.  
7 Adjusting the sound localization of the center  
C ALIGNMENT: OFF Select not to use this function.  
channel—CENTER GAIN  
Initial setting: C ALIGNMENT: OFF  
This setting is available only when Neo:6 Music is in use.  
• If you have set “CENTER SPEAKER” to “CENTER SPK: NO”  
(see page 21), the center gain is not adjustable.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized until you  
change the setting.  
Adjustable range: 0 to 1.0 (in 0.1 step intervals)  
Initial setting: CENTER GAIN: 0.3  
As the number increases, the center channel will be localized  
clearly.  
Normally, select “0.3.”  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuning in to stations manually  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Tuner operations  
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.  
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.  
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates  
between “FM” and “AM.”  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
Tuner operations are mainly done from the remote control.  
2 Press repeatedly or hold TUNING 9 or  
( TUNING until the station you want is tuned  
in.  
• Pressing (or holding) TUNING 9 increases the frequency.  
• Pressing (or holding) ( TUNING decreases the frequency.  
NOTES  
• When you hold and release TUNING 9 or ( TUNING, the  
frequency keeps changing until a station is tuned in.  
• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the  
TUNED indicator lights up on the display.  
• When an FM stereo program is received, the ST (stereo)  
indicator also lights up.  
When operating the  
receiver using the remote  
control, set the mode  
selector to “AUDIO/TV/  
VCR/DBS.”  
Using preset tuning  
Once a station is assigned a channel number, the station can be  
quickly tuned simply by selecting the number.You can preset up to  
30 FM and 15 AM stations.  
To store the preset stations  
Before you start, remember...  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is  
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
NOTE  
When you have selected “FM” or “AM” by using SOURCE  
SELECTOR on the front panel, the remote control may not  
work for tuner operations. To use the remote control for tuner  
operations, select “FM” or “AM” by using the source selecting  
button on the remote control.  
From the remote control ONLY:  
1 Tune in to the station you want to preset (see  
Tuning in to stations manually” above).  
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for this station,  
select the FM reception mode you want. See “Selecting the  
FM reception mode” on page 33.  
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other  
countries use 10 kHz spacing. 9 kHz interval spacing is the initial  
setting.  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
• Be sure the receiver is turned off, but is plugged into an AC  
outlet when setting the AM tuner interval.  
2 Press MEMORY.  
The channel number position starts flashing on the display for  
about 5 seconds.  
On the front panel ONLY:  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
To select the 10 kHz interval:  
Hold down ADJUST and press  
STANDBY/ON.  
“10k STEP” appears on the display.  
To change back to the 9 kHz interval:  
Hold down SETTING and press  
“9k STEP” appears on the display.  
STANDBY/ON.  
NOTE  
When you change the AM tuner interval spacing, stored preset  
stations are erased. In this case, restore stations.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to  
select a channel number while the channel  
number position is flashing.  
On the front panel:  
2 1, 3  
• For channel number 5, press 5.  
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.  
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
Before you start, remember...  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is  
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
1 Turn SOURCE SELECTOR to select “FM” or  
“AM.”  
4 Press MEMORY again while the selected  
channel number is flashing on the display.  
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.  
The selected channel number stops flashing.  
The station is assigned to the selected channel number.  
2 PressTUNER PRESET.  
“P” appears on the display and MULTI JOG now works for  
selecting preset channels.  
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the  
stations you want.  
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select a preset channel  
To erase a stored preset station  
number while “P” appears on the display.  
Storing a new station on a used channel number erases the  
previously stored one.  
To increase the preset channel numbers, turn MULTI JOG  
clockwise.  
To decreases the preset channel numbers, turn MULTI JOG  
counterclockwise.  
To tune in a preset station  
From the remote control:  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.  
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in and  
the numeric buttons now work for tuner operations.  
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates  
between “FM” and “AM.”  
Selecting the FM reception mode  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive or noisy, you can  
change the FM reception mode while receiving an FM broadcast.  
You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station  
(see page 32).  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
2 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to  
From the remote control ONLY:  
select a preset channel number.  
While listening to an FM station, press FM MODE.  
• Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode  
alternates between “AUTO MUTING” and “MONO.”  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
AUTO MUTING  
Normally select this.  
When a program is broadcast in stereo,  
you will hear stereo sound; when in  
monaural, you will hear monaural sound.  
This mode is also useful to suppress  
static noise between stations. The AUTO  
MUTING indicator lights up on the display.  
• For channel number 5, press 5.  
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.  
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.  
MONO  
Select this to improve the reception (but  
stereo effect will be lost).  
In this mode, you will hear noise while  
tuning in to the stations. The AUTO  
MUTING indicator goes off from the  
display. (The ST indicator also goes off.)  
Initial setting: AUTO MUTING  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introducing the Surround modes  
Dolby Digital*  
Dolby Digital is a digital signal compression method, developed by  
Dolby Laboratories, and enables multi-channel encoding and  
decoding.  
Creating realistic  
sound fields  
• When Dolby Digital signal is detected through the digital input,  
the DOLBY D indicator lights up on the display.  
Dolby Digital 5.1CH  
Dolby Digital 5.1CH (DOLBY D) encoding method records and  
digitally compresses the left front channel, right front channel,  
center channel, left surround channel, right surround channel, and  
LFE channel signals (total 6 channels, but the LFE channel is  
counted as 0.1 channel. Therefore, called 5.1 channel).  
Dolby Digital enables stereo surround sounds, and sets the cutoff  
frequency of the surround treble at 20 kHz, compared to 7 kHz for  
Dolby Pro Logic. As such, the sound movement and “being-there”  
feeling are enhanced much more than Dolby Pro Logic.  
Reproducing theater ambience  
In a movie theater, many speakers are located on the walls to  
reproduce impressive multi-channel sound, reaching you from all  
directions.  
With these many speakers, sound localization and sound  
movement can be expressed.  
Surround/DSP modes built in this receiver can create almost the  
same Surround sound as you can feel in a real movie theater.  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX (DOLBY D EX) is a digital surround encoding  
format that adds the third surround channels, called “surround  
back.”  
Compared to the conventional Dolby Digital 5.1CH, these newly  
added surround back channels can reproduce more detailed  
movements behind you while viewing the video software. In  
addition, surround sound localization will become more stable.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dolby Surround  
DTS**  
DTS is another digital signal compression method, developed by  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc., and enables multi-channel  
encoding and decoding (1ch up to 6.1ch).  
• When DTS signal is detected through the digital input, the DTS  
indicator lights up on the display.  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Pro Logic II is a multi-channel playback format to convert  
2-channel software into 5-channel (plus subwoofer). The matrix-  
based conversion method used for Dolby Pro Logic II makes no  
limitation for the cutoff frequency of the surround treble and  
enables stereo surround sound.  
• This receiver provides two types of Dolby Pro Logic II modes—  
Pro Logic II Movie (PLII MOVIE) and Pro Logic II Music (PLII  
MUSIC).  
DTS Digital Surround  
DTS Digital Surround (DTS) is another discrete 5.1 channel  
digital audio format available on CD, LD, and DVD software.  
Compared to Dolby Digital, the DTS Digital Surround format has a  
lower audio compression rate which enables it to add breadth and  
depth to the sounds reproduced. As such, DTS Digital Surround  
features natural, solid, and clear sound.  
When Dolby Pro Logic II is activated, the  
up on the display.  
indicator lights  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
Suitable for playing any Dolby Surround encoded  
software.You can enjoy a sound field very close  
to the one created with discrete 5.1-channel  
sounds.  
DTS Extended Surround (DTS-ES)  
Suitable for playing any 2-channel stereo  
DTS-ES is another multi-channel digital encoding format.  
It greatly improves the 360-degree surround impression and  
space expression by adding the third surround channel—surround  
back channel.  
software.You can enjoy wide and deep sounds.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
DTS-ES includes two signal formats with different surround signal  
recording methods—DTS-ES Discrete 6.1ch (ES DISCRETE)  
and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1ch (ES MATRIX).  
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1ch has been designed to encode (and  
decode) a 6.1-channel signal discretely to avoid interference with  
each channel.  
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1ch has been designed to add an extra  
surround channel to DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel. By using a  
matrix encoding/decoding method, an additional “surround back”  
channel signal is encoded (and decoded) in both the left and right  
surround channel signals.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a newly introduced multi-channel playback  
format to convert not only multi-channel software but 2-channel  
software into 6.1 channel (or 7.1 channel) that developed from  
Dolby Pro Logic II. The matrix-based conversion method used for  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx makes no limitation for the cutoff frequency of  
the surround treble.  
• This receiver provides two types of Dolby Pro Logic IIx modes—  
Pro Logic IIx Movie (PLIIx MOVIE) and Pro Logic IIx Music  
(PLIIx MUSIC).  
When Dolby Pro Logic IIx is activated, the  
lights up on the display.  
indicator  
** “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks  
PLIIx MOVIE Suitable for playing any Dolby Surround encoded  
software.You can enjoy a sound field with a  
natural wraparound effect.  
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
PLIIx MUSIC Suitable for playing any 2-channel stereo  
software.You can enjoy wide and deep 6.1-  
channel sounds.  
To enjoy software encoded with Dolby Digital, connect the  
source component using the digital terminal on the rear of this  
receiver. (See page 11.)  
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When using Surround mode, the sounds come out of the  
activated speakers which the Surround mode requires.  
DTS 96/24  
In recent years, there has been increasing interest in higher  
sampling rates both for recording and for reproducing at home.  
Higher sampling rates allow wider frequency range and greater bit  
depths provide extended dynamic range.  
DTS 96/24 is a multi-channel digital signal format (fs 96 kHz/24  
bits) introduced by Digital Theater Systems, Inc. to deliver “better-  
than-CD sound quality” into the home.  
• When DTS 96/24 signal is detected, the DTS and 96/24  
indicators light up.You can enjoy its 5.1-channel sound with full-  
quality.  
• If either the surround speakers or center speaker is set to  
“NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21), the corresponding  
channel signals are allocated to and emitted through the front  
speakers.  
• If both the surround speakers and center speaker are set to  
“NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-  
PHONIC processing (which has been developed to create the  
surround effect through the front speakers only) is used. The 3D  
indicator lights up on the display.  
3D HEADPHONE mode  
DTS Neo:6  
If you connect a pair of headphones while one of the Surround  
modes is in use, the 3D HEADPHONE mode is activated  
without respect to the type of software played back.  
“3DHEADPHONE” appears on the display and the DSP, 3D,  
and HP indicators light up.  
DTS Neo:6 is another conversion method to create 6-channel  
(plus subwoofer) from analog/digital 2-channel software by using  
the high precision digital matrix decoder used for DTS-ES Matrix  
6.1ch.  
• This receiver provides the following DTS Neo:6 modes—Neo:6  
Cinema (NEO:6CINEMA) and Neo:6 Music (NEO:6 MUSIC).  
When one of them is activated, the NEO:6 indicator lights up on  
the display.  
About other digital signals  
Linear PCM  
NEO:6CINEMA Suitable for playing movies.You can get the  
same atmosphere with 2-channel software as  
with 6.1-channel software. It is also effective for  
playing software encoded with conventional  
surround formats.  
Uncompressed digital audio data used for DVDs, CDs, and  
Video CDs.  
DVDs support 2 channels with sampling rates of 48/96 kHz, at  
quantization of 16/20/24 bits. On the other hand, CDs and  
Video CDs are limited to 2 channels with 44.1 kHz at 16 bits.  
• When Linear PCM signal is detected, the LPCM indicator  
lights up.  
NEO:6 MUSIC Suitable for playing music software. The front  
channel signals bypass the decoder (resulting in  
no loss of sound quality) and the surround  
signals transmitted through the other speakers  
expand the sound field naturally.  
Dual Mono  
Dual Mono can be easily understood when you think of the  
bilingual broadcast for TV programs (however, the Dual Mono  
format is not identical with those analog formats).  
This format is now adopted in Dolby Digital, DTS, and so on. It  
allows two independent channels (called main channel and  
sub-channel) to be recorded separately.  
You can select either channel you want to listen to (see  
page 23).  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When using the DAP mode, the sounds come out of all the  
connected and activated speakers.  
Introducing the DSP modes  
If the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker  
setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC processing  
(which has been developed to create the surround effect  
through the front speakers only) is used.  
The sound heard in a concert hall, club, etc. consists of direct  
sound and indirect sound—early reflections and reflections from  
behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly without any  
reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are delayed by the  
distances of the ceiling and walls. These direct sounds and  
indirect sounds are the most important elements of the acoustic  
surround effects.  
The 3D indicator lights up on the display.  
MONO FILM  
The DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes can create these  
important elements, and give you a real “being there” feeling.  
In order to reproduce a more acoustic sound field in your listening  
room while viewing monaural sound video software (analog and  
2-channel digital signals including Dual Mono signal), you can use  
this mode.  
The surround effect will be added, and the sound localization of  
actor’s words will be improved.  
Reflections from behind  
Early reflections  
This mode cannot be used for multi-channel digital signals.  
When “MONO FILM” is used, sounds come out of all the  
connected (and activated) speakers.  
If the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker  
setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC processing  
(which has been developed to create the surround effect  
through the front speakers only) is used.  
The 3D indicator lights up on the display.  
• If incoming signals change from 2-channel digital signal to  
another digital signal type, “MONO FILM” is canceled and an  
appropriate Surround mode is activated.  
Direct sounds  
The DSP modes include the following modes:  
• Digital Acoustic Processor (DAP) modes—HALL1, HALL2, LIVE  
CLUB, DANCE CLUB, PAVILION, THEATER1, THEATER2  
• MONO FILM—Used for all types of 2-channel signals (including  
Dual Mono signal)  
All Channel Stereo mode (ALL CH ST)  
This mode can reproduce a larger stereo sound field using all the  
connected (and activated) speakers.  
• All Channel Stereo mode (ALL CH ST)  
This mode cannot be used if the surround speakers are set  
to “NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21).  
When one of the DSP modes is activated, the DSP indicator lights  
up on the display.  
Digital Acoustic Processor (DAP) modes  
You can use the following DAP modes in order to reproduce a  
more acoustic sound field in your listening room.  
HALL1  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large  
shoebox-shaped hall designed primarily for  
classical concerts. (Its seating capacity is about  
2000.)  
Sound reproduced from  
normal stereo  
Sound reproduced from All  
Channel Stereo mode  
HALL2  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large  
vineyard-shaped hall designed primarily for  
classical concerts. (Its seating capacity is about  
2000.)  
3D HEADPHONE mode  
LIVE CLUB  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a live music club  
with a low ceiling.  
If you connect a pair of headphones while one of the DSP  
modes is in use, the 3D HEADPHONE mode is activated  
without respect to the type of software played back.  
“3DHEADPHONE” appears on the display and the DSP, 3D,  
and HP indicators light up.  
DANCE CLUB Reproduces the spatial feeling of a rocking dance  
club.  
PAVILION  
THEATER1  
THEATER2  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of an exhibition  
hall with a high ceiling.  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large theater  
where the seating capacity is about 600.  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a small theater  
where the seating capacity is about 300.  
NOTE  
When “THEATER1” or “THEATER2” is activated while playing  
back 2-channel analog or digital source, the built-in Dolby Pro  
Logic II decoder is activated and the  
indicator lights up.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Surround/DSP modes  
Available Surround/DSP modes vary depending on the speaker settings and the incoming signals. See the table below.  
• The numbers inside the parentheses following the incoming signal type indicate the number of the front channels and that of the  
surround channels. For example, (3/2) indicates that the signals are encoded with three front signals (left/right/center) and two (stereo)  
surround signals.  
• For EX/ES/PLIIx setting, see page 22.  
The name of the mode shown below is the display indication.  
EX/ES/PLIIx setting  
Incoming Signal Type  
AUTO  
ON  
PLIIx MOVIE  
PLIIx MUSIC  
OFF  
Dolby Digital Surround EX  
DOLBY D EX*2*5  
DOLBY D EX*2  
DOLBY D EX*2*3  
D + PLIIx MU*2  
DOLBY D  
Dolby Digital (3/2, 2/2)  
Dolby Digital (3/1, 2/1, 3/0, 1/0)  
Dolby Digital (Dual Mono)  
DTS-ES Discrete*1  
DOLBY D  
DOLBY D EX*2  
DOLBY D EX*2*3  
DOLBY D  
D + PLIIx MU*2  
DOLBY D  
DUAL MONO  
ES DISCRETE*2 ES DISCRETE*2  
DTS +  
DTS +  
DTS +  
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2  
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2  
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2  
DTS  
DTS  
DTS  
DTS-ES Matrix*1  
ES MATRIX*2  
DTS  
ES MATRIX*2  
DTS (3/2, 2/2)*1  
DTS + NEO:6*2  
DTS (3/1, 2/1, 3/0, 1/0)  
DTS (Dual Mono)  
DTS  
DUAL MONO  
Dolby Digital (2/0)  
DTS (2/0)  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
NEO:6CINEMA  
NEO:6 MUSIC  
PLIIx MOVIE*4/PLIIx MUSIC*4/NEO:6CINEMA/NEO:6 MUSIC  
Lenear PCM  
Analog  
DVD MULTI  
None  
*1 DTS 96/24 processing is not applied when the EX/ES/PLIIx setting is activated. If you want to apply the processing, set the EX/ES/  
PLIIx setting to “EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF” (see page 22).  
*2 When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK SPK: NO” (see page 21), Virtual Surround Back is activated for the  
modes.  
*3 When using PLIIx Movie to reproduce Dolby Digital or DTS software, this receiver applies Dolby Digital EX (DOLBY D EX) or DTS plus  
Dolby Digital EX (DTS +  
EX) processing (6.1-channel reproduction) to the software.  
*4 When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK SPK: NO” (see page 21), “PLIIx MOVIE” is changed to “PLII MOVIE”  
and “PLIIx MUSIC” is changed to “PLII MUSIC.”  
*5 For some Dolby Digital Surround EX software, Dolby Digital 5.1-channel reproduction (“DOLBY D”) may be applied. In this case, select  
“EX/ES/PLIIx: ON” to apply “DOLBY D EX.”  
About the DSP modes  
• The following DSP modes are available regardless of incoming signal type:  
HALL1, HALL2, LIVE CLUB, DANCE CLUB, PAVILION, THEATER1, THEATER2  
• When an incoming signal is a multi-channel (more than 2-channel) digital signal, “MONO FILM” is not available.  
You cannot select “ALL CH ST” when the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21).  
Virtual Surround Back  
This function creates the great surround effect from the behind as if you have connected the surround back speaker. The VIRTUAL  
SB (Surround Back) indicator lights up on the display.  
If you have connected (and activated) the surround speakers, you can use Virtual Surround Back without connecting the surround  
back speaker.  
Virtual Surround Back is activated when “EX/ES/PLIIx” is set to other than “EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF” and when playing back the software  
including the following signals:  
– Dolby Digital Surround EX  
– DTS-ES  
– Dolby Digital or DTS with more than 4-channels  
Virtual Surround Back is activated when one of the Surround modes is selected.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On the front panel:  
2
Activating the Surround/DSP modes  
Available Surround/DSP modes vary depending on the incoming  
1, 3  
signals. For details, see page 38.  
Activating one of the Surround/DSP modes automatically  
recalls the memorized settings and adjustments.  
Before you start, remember...  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is  
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
• To adjust the speaker output level, see page 29.  
• To adjust the effect level for the DSP mode (except All  
Channel Stereo mode,) see page 31.  
1 Select and play any source other than “DVD  
MULTI.”  
• To add “wraparound” sound effect to “PLII MUSIC”  
(PANORAMA control,) see page 31.  
• Make sure you have selected the input mode (analog or  
digital) correctly.  
• To adjust the sound localization of the center channel  
for “NEO:6 MUSIC” (center gain,) see page 31.  
2 Press SURROUND.  
To adjust the vertical localization of the center channel  
for Surround/DSP modes (except “PLII MUSIC,PLIIx  
MUSIC,Neo6: MUSIC,and “ALL CH ST”) (center  
alignment,) see page 31.  
MULTI JOG now works for selecting Surround/DSP modes.  
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select the Surround/DSP  
mode you want.  
Ex.: When “DOLBY D” is selected for Dolby Digital multi-  
channel software:  
NOTES  
You cannot use any Surround/DSP modes when selecting “DVD  
MULTI” as the playback source.  
• The on-screen display appears on the TV screen to show the  
Surround/DSP mode name for 5 seconds when you select the  
Surround/DSP mode.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
AUTO SURR  
HALL1  
Surround modes*  
HALL2  
To cancel the function, set “SUPERIMPOSE” to  
“SUPERIMPOSE: OFF” (see page 25).  
LIVE CLUB  
PAVILION  
THEATER2  
ALL CH ST  
(Back to the beginning)  
DANCE CLUB  
THEATER1  
MONO FILM  
SURR OFF  
From the remote control:  
1
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control, set the  
mode selector to  
To cancel Surround/DSP modes  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Turn MULTI JOG so that “SURR OFF” appears on the display.  
NOTE  
The initial setting is “AUTO SURR.”  
* Available Surround modes vary depending on the incoming  
signals. For details, see “Using the Surround/DSP modes” on  
page 38.  
2
1 Select and play any source other than “DVD  
When you select “AUTO SURR” (Auto Surround)  
You can enjoy the Surround mode easily.  
MULTI.”  
• For details about the Surround modes, see pages 34 to 36.  
• When “AUTO SURR” is activated, the AUTO SR indicator lights  
up on the display.  
• Make sure you have selected the input mode (analog or  
digital) correctly.  
2 Press SURROUND repeatedly to select the  
How does “AUTO SURR” work?  
Surround/DSP mode you want.  
• If a multi-channel signal comes in, an appropriate Surround  
mode will be selected automatically.  
Ex.: When “DOLBY D” is selected for Dolby Digital multi-  
channel software:  
• If a Dolby Digital 2-channel or DTS 2-channel signal with  
surround signal comes in, “PLII MOVIE” will be selected.  
• If a Dolby Digital 2-channel or DTS 2-channel signal without  
surround signal, or a Linear PCM signal comes in, “SURR  
OFF (stereo)” will be selected.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
AUTO SURR  
HALL1  
Surround modes*  
HALL2  
NOTES  
LIVE CLUB  
PAVILION  
THEATER2  
ALL CH ST  
(Back to the beginning)  
DANCE CLUB  
THEATER1  
MONO FILM  
SURR OFF  
• “AUTO SURR” does not take effect in the following cases:  
– While playing an analog source.  
– While selecting one of the fixed digital decode modes—  
“DOLBY D” or “DTS” (see page 13).  
• While listening with the headphones, the 3D HEADPHONE  
mode (see pages 36 and 37) is activated without respect to the  
type of software played back.  
To cancel Surround/DSP modes  
• When “AUTO SURR” is selected, sound may not come out at  
the beginning of playback. If it occurs, select a Surround mode  
manually.  
Press SURROUND repeatedly so that “SURR OFF” appears on  
the display.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections 2: Video cable connection  
This receiver is equipped with three types of the video terminals—  
composite video, S-video, and component video, and the signals  
coming into this receiver through one type of video terminals can  
output only through the terminal of the same type. So you need to  
connect the video components to this receiver using one of the  
following three ways.  
• When using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, set  
the video input for the DVD player and the VCR correctly (see  
“Selecting the component video input mode—DVD VIDEO  
INPUT/VCR VIDEO INPUT” on page 25); otherwise, the correct  
input for this receiver will not be selected on the TV.  
AV COMPU LINK  
remote control  
system  
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to  
operate JVC’s video components (TV, DVD player*, and VCR)  
through this receiver.  
Case 1*:  
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver  
through the S-video terminals, connect this receiver to the  
TV’s video input 1 terminal using S-video cables.  
This receiver is equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which has  
added a function to operate JVC’s video components through the  
component video jacks. To use this remote control system, you  
need to connect the video components you want to operate,  
following the diagrams below and the procedures on page 41.  
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your video components.  
S-video cable  
S-video cable  
Source  
equipment  
RX-F31S  
TV  
* “DVD player” on pages 40 and 41 can be replaced with “DVD  
recorder.”  
To video input 1  
Connections 1: AV COMPU LINK connection  
Case 2*:  
TV  
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver  
through the composite video jacks, connect this receiver  
to the TV’s video input 2 terminal (composite video input)  
using composite video cables.  
AV  
AV  
COMPU LINK-III  
COMPU LINK EX  
Composite video cable  
Composite video cable  
Monaural mini-plugs  
(not supplied)  
Source  
equipment  
RX-F31S  
TV  
To video input 2  
(Composite)  
AV  
COMPU  
LINK-III  
Case 3:  
220V  
110V  
127V  
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver  
through the component video jacks, connect this receiver  
to the TV’s video input 2 terminals (component video  
input) using component video cables.  
230 -  
240V  
Component video cable  
Component video cable  
Monaural  
mini-plugs  
(not supplied)  
AV  
COMPU LINK  
Source  
equipment  
RX-F31S  
TV  
To video input 2  
(Component)  
DVD player  
AV  
COMPU LINK  
* When using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, set  
“DOWN MIX” and “Y/C SEPARATE” to “OFF”; otherwise, this  
system does not work correctly. For details about each setting,  
see page 25.  
VCR  
IMPORTANT:  
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot control the  
DBS tuner connected to the DBS IN jacks.  
NOTES  
• When connecting the receiver and aTV with the AV COMPU LINK  
EX terminal by using a component video cable, you cannot use  
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode (see page 41).  
• When connecting only the VCR and DVD player to this receiver,  
connect it directly to the receiver using cable with the monaural  
mini-plugs.  
You can connect only the TV with AV COMPU LINK EX or AV  
COMPU LINK-III terminal to the AV COMPU LINK-III terminal.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One-touch DVD play  
Connecting procedure  
Simply by starting playback on the DVD player, you can enjoy the  
DVD playback without setting other switches manually.  
• When the DVD player is connected through the analog input  
jacks on this receiver (and analog input is selected), the  
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to  
“DVR/DVD” or “DVD MULTI.”  
1 If you have already plugged your VCR, DVD  
player,TV, and this receiver into the AC  
outlets, unplug their AC power cords first.  
• When the DVD player is connected through the digital input  
terminal on this receiver (and digital input is selected), the  
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to  
“DVR/DVD DGT.”  
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the  
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.  
2 Connect your VCR, DVD player,TV, and this  
receiver as follows, using the cables with the  
monaural mini-plugs (not supplied).  
• See “Connections 1” on the previous page.  
3 Connect the audio input/output jacks on the  
VCR, DVD player,TV, and this receiver using  
the audio cables.  
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode  
• When you select “TV” (or “TV DIGITAL) as the source to play on  
the receiver, the TV automatically changes the input mode to  
the TV tuner so that you can watch TV.  
• When you select “DVR/DVD” (or “DVR/DVD DGT”), “DVD  
MULTI,VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL), or “DBS” (or “DBS DIGITAL)  
as the source to play on the receiver, the TV automatically  
changes the input mode to the appropriate position (either video  
input 1 or video input 2) so that you can view the playback  
picture.  
• See pages 7 to 10.  
4 Connect the video input/output jacks on the  
VCR, DVD player,TV, and this receiver using  
the S-video cables, composite video cables,  
or component video cables.  
• See “Connections 2” on the previous page.  
5 Plug the AC power cords of the connected  
components and this receiver into the AC  
outlets.  
NOTE  
This function does not work when you connect this receiver and  
the TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal using a component  
video cable. In this case, reconnect the TV referring to Case 1 or  
Case 2 on page 40.  
6 When turning on the TV for the first time after  
the AV COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV  
volume to the minimum using the TV volume  
control on the TV.  
Automatic power on/off  
The TV, DVD player, and VCR turn on and off along with the  
receiver.  
7 Turn on other connected components first,  
then turn on this receiver.  
When you turn on the receiver;  
• If the previously selected source is “TV” (or “TV DIGITAL) or  
“DBS” (or “DBS DIGITAL), only the TV will turn on automatically.  
• If the previously selected source is “DVR/DVD” (or “DVR/DVD  
DGT”) or “DVD MULTI,the TV and DVD player will turn on  
automatically.  
• If the previously selected source is “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL),  
the TV and VCR will turn on automatically.  
When you turn off the receiver, the TV, DVD player, and VCR will  
turn off.  
• When turning on the VCR, use the remote control supplied  
with this receiver (press VCR  
).  
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use  
the five basic functions listed below.  
Remote control of the TV, DVD player, and VCR using this  
remote control  
See pages 42 and 43 for details.  
NOTE  
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each  
component.  
If you turn off the receiver while recording on the VCR, the VCR  
will not turn off, but continue recording.  
One-touch video play  
Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the  
VCR, you can enjoy the video playback without setting other  
switches manually. The receiver automatically turns on and  
changes the source to “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL).  
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the  
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.  
When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab, press the  
play (3) button on the VCR or on the remote control. So, you can  
get the same result.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 VCR  
Operating other  
JVC products  
Set the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
You can use the supplied remote control to operate not only  
this receiver but also other JVC products.  
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.  
Some JVC VCRs can accept two types of the control signals—  
remote codes “A” and “B.”  
– When operating a VCR whose remote control code is set to  
“A,set the manufacturer’s code to “01.”  
– When operating a VCR whose remote control code is set to  
“B,set the manufacturer’s code to “02.”  
The initial setting is “01.” For details about the setting, see  
“Changing the transmittable signals for operating a VCR” on  
page 45.  
To operate other products, aim the remote control directly at the  
remote sensor on the target product.  
You can always perform the following operation:  
VCR Turn on or off the VCR.  
:
7 TV  
After pressing VCR, you can perform the following operations on  
the VCR.  
CHANNEL +/–:  
Change the channel numbers on the VCR.  
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.  
Start playback.  
1 – 9, 0:  
3:  
Set the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
7:  
Stop playback.  
8:  
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.  
Fast-wind a tape.  
¡:  
1:  
Rewind a tape.  
REC PAUSE:  
Enter recording pause. To start recording,  
press this button then 3.  
7 DVD recorder or DVD player  
To operate the DVD  
recorder, set the mode  
selector to “DVR.”  
You can always perform the following operations:  
To operate the DVD player,  
set the mode selector to  
“DVD.”  
TV  
:
Turn on or off the TV.  
TV VOL +/–:  
TV/VIDEO:  
Adjust the volume on the TV.  
Change the input mode (either video input  
or TV tuner) on the TV.  
After pressing TV, you can perform the following operations on the  
TV.  
CHANNEL +/–:  
1 – 9, 0, 100+:  
Change the channel numbers.  
Select the channel numbers.  
TV RETURN (10): Function as the TV RETURN button.  
(Switches between the previous channel  
and the current channel.)  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After setting the mode selector correctly, you can perform the  
following operations on the DVD recorder or DVD player.  
For various playback:  
(one touch replay):  
See the instructions supplied with the DVD recorder or DVD  
player for details.  
Move the playback position back 10 seconds  
before the current position.  
RETURN:  
CANCEL:  
Return to the main menu during menu  
operation.  
7 Changing the remote control code for DVD  
recorder  
Cancel the programmed track, etc.  
Some JVC DVD recorders can accept four types of the control  
signals.You can assign one of the four codes to the remote  
control supplied with this receiver for operating your DVD  
recorder. For details, refer to the manual supplied with the  
DVD recorder.  
Only for DVD recorder operations:  
CHANNEL +/–: Change the channel numbers.  
Initial setting: 03  
DVD/HDD:  
Select the DVD recorder or HDD deck. (Only for  
a DVD recorder incorporated with HDD deck.)  
1 Set the mode selector to “DVR.”  
(skip):  
Move the playback position ahead 30 seconds  
after the current position.  
2 Press and hold DVR/DVD  
3 Press DVR/DVD.  
.
1 – 9, 0:  
Select a channel number (while stopped) or a  
chapter/title number, track number (while playing  
back). Press ENTER to enter the number.  
4 Enter the remote control code you want using  
buttons 1 – 4, and 0.  
REC MODE:  
REC PAUSE:  
Select the recording mode.  
EX.: To enter the code “2”, press 0, then 2.  
Enter recording pause. To start recording,  
press 3.  
Code for DVR  
Number to enter  
1
2
3
4
01  
02  
03  
04  
DISPLAY:  
Change the display information.  
Only for DVD player operations:  
5 Release DVR/DVD  
.
fs/Rate*:  
Show the sampling frequency.  
Now, the remote control code has been changed.  
TITLE/GROUP: Make the numeric buttons work for selecting the  
title/group number.  
You can always perform the following operation:  
ZOOM:  
Zoom in and out.  
DVR/DVD  
3:  
:
Turn on or off the DVD recorder or DVD player.  
Start playback.  
1 – 10, 0, +10: Select a chapter/title number, track number,  
menu item, etc.  
DVD/CARD:  
Select the disc or memory card to play. (Only for  
a DVD player incorporated with memory card  
slots.)  
7:  
Stop playback.  
8:  
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.  
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter.  
¢:  
4:  
DIMMER:  
THUMBNAIL:  
SLIDE:  
Change the display brightness.  
Return to the beginning of the current (or  
previous) chapter.  
Show the thumbnail screen for JPEG discs.  
Start the slide show playback for JPEG discs.  
¡:  
1:  
Fast-forward playback.  
Fast-reverse playback.  
3D/S.EFFECT: Apply the 3D effect.  
PAGE: Show browsable still pictures on DVD Audio  
discs.  
TOP MENU/MENU:  
Display the menu recorded on discs.  
* Press and hold when using these buttons.  
ON SCREEN:  
5//3/2:  
ENTER:  
Shows the on-screen bar.  
Select an item on the menu screen.  
Enter the selected item, channel number,  
chapter/title number, or track number (if  
required).  
If these buttons do not function normally, use the remote  
control supplied with your DVD recorder or DVD player.  
Refer also to the manuals supplied with the DVD recorder  
or DVD player for details.  
You can also use the following buttons to operate JVC DVD  
recorder and/or DVD player if it supports the corresponding  
function:  
For various settings:  
AUDIO:  
SUBTITLE:  
SET UP:  
VFP:  
Select the audio language/channel.  
Select the subtitle language.  
Display the Preference display.  
Show the picture adjustment screen.  
PROGRESSIVE*: Change the scanning mode.  
ANGLE: Select the view angle.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manufacturers’ codes for TV  
Manufacturer  
Codes  
Operating other  
manufacturers’  
products  
JVC  
Akai  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
Bell+Howell  
Centurion  
Coronad  
Daewoo  
Emerson  
Fisher  
06, 07, 08  
09, 10, 11, 12, 13  
14  
GE•Pana  
GE•RCA  
Gold Star  
Hitachi  
15, 16  
17  
18, 19  
20, 21  
22, 23  
24  
25  
25  
By changing the transmittable signals, you can use the  
supplied remote control to operate other manufacturers’  
products.  
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.  
To operate those components with the remote control, first you  
need to set the manufacturers’ codes each for the TV, VCR, and  
DBS.  
• After replacing batteries of the remote control, set the  
manufacturers’ codes again.  
KTV  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Mitsubishi  
Panasonic  
Philips  
26, 27  
24  
Pioneer  
Proscan  
Quasar  
Radioshack  
RCA  
28  
29  
30  
31  
Changing the transmittable signals for operating  
a TV  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
02, 17, 32, 33, 34, 35  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Sears  
36, 37  
14  
38  
1 Press and hold TV  
2 Press TV.  
.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons  
Sharp  
Sony  
39  
40  
1 – 9, and 0.  
Symphonic  
Toshiba  
Zenith  
41, 42  
38  
43, 44  
See “Manufacturers’ codes for TV” on the right.  
4 Release TV  
.
Now, you can perform the following operations on the TV.  
Initial setting: 01  
TV  
:
Turn on or off the TV.  
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without  
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot  
operate the equipment.  
TV VOL +/–:  
TV/VIDEO:  
Adjust the volume on the TV.  
Change the input mode (either TV or  
VIDEO).  
After pressing TV, you can perform the following operations on  
the TV.  
CHANNEL +/–:  
Change the channel numbers.  
Select the channel numbers.  
1 – 9, 0, 100+ (+10):  
See the instructions supplied with the TV for details.  
5 Try to operate your TV by pressing TV  
.
When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct  
code.  
If more than one code is listed for your brand of TV, try each  
one until the correct one is entered.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manufacturers’ codes for VCR  
Changing the transmittable signals for operating  
a VCR  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Codes  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
01, 02, 03, 04  
1 Press and hold VCR  
2 Press VCR.  
.
Aiwa  
Akai  
Bell+Howell  
Daewoo  
Emerson  
Fisher  
05  
06, 07, 08  
09  
10  
11, 12, 13, 14, 15  
16, 17, 18, 19  
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons  
1 – 9, and 0.  
See “Manufacturers’ codes for VCR” on the right.  
G.E.  
20, 21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
20, 26  
4 Release VCR  
.
Go Video  
Gold Star  
Go-Video A  
Go-Video B  
Hitachi  
Now, you can perform the following operation on the VCR.  
VCR Turn on or off the VCR.  
:
Magnavox  
Mitsubishi  
NEC  
27, 28, 29  
30, 31, 32, 33  
34, 35  
After pressing VCR, you can perform the following operations  
on the VCR.  
Panasonic  
Philips  
RCA  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Scott  
Sharp  
Shintom  
Sony  
Symphonic  
Teknica  
Toshiba  
Zenith  
36, 37  
27  
38  
39, 40, 41  
16, 17, 18, 19  
42  
43, 44  
45  
46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51  
52  
53, 54  
55  
56  
CHANNEL +/–:  
Change the channel numbers on the  
VCR.  
1 – 9, 0:  
3:  
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.  
Start playback.  
7:  
Stop playback.  
8:  
Pause playback.  
¡:  
1:  
Fast-wind a tape.  
Rewind a tape.  
See the instructions supplied with the VCR for details.  
5 Try to operate your VCR by pressing VCR  
.
Initial setting: 01  
When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct  
code.  
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without  
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot  
operate the equipment.  
If more than one code is listed for your brand of VCR, try each  
one until the correct one is entered.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the transmittable signals for operating  
Changing the transmittable signals for operating  
a DVD player  
a DBS tuner  
Set the mode selector to “DVD.”  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
1 Press and hold DVR/DVD  
2 Press DVR/DVD.  
.
1 Press and hold DBS  
2 Press DBS.  
.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons  
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons  
1 – 9, and 0.  
1 – 9, and 0.  
See “Manufacturers’ codes for DVD player” below.  
See “Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner” below.  
4 Release DVR/DVD  
.
4 Release DBS  
.
Now, you can perform the following operation on the DVD  
player.  
Now, you can perform the following operation on the DBS  
tuner.  
DVR/DVD  
:
Turn on or off the DVD player.  
DBS  
:
Turn on or off the DBS tuner.  
3:  
Start playback.  
After pressing DBS, you can perform the following operations  
on the DBS tuner.  
1:  
Return to the beginning of the current  
chapter (or fast-forward for some models).  
¡:  
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter  
(or fast-reverse for some models).  
CHANNEL +/–:  
1 – 9, 0:  
Change the channel numbers on the  
DBS tuner.  
7:  
Stop playback.  
Select the channel numbers on the  
DBS tuner.  
8:  
Pause playback.  
MENU:  
Display the menu recorded on DVD  
VIDEO discs.  
See the instructions supplied with the DBS tuner for details.  
5//3/2:  
ENTER:  
1 – 9, 0:  
Select an item on the menu screen.  
Enter the selected item.  
5 Try to operate your DBS tuner by pressing  
DBS  
.
When your DBS tuner turns on or off, you have entered the  
correct code.  
Select the chapter number.  
See the instructions supplied with the DVD player for details.  
If more than one code is listed for your brand of DBS tuner,  
try each one until the correct one is entered.  
5 Try to operate your DVD player by pressing  
DVR/DVD  
.
Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner  
When your DVD player turns on or off, you have entered the  
correct code.  
Manufacturer  
Codes  
Echostar  
G.I.  
40  
01, 41  
02  
03, 04, 05, 06  
42  
43  
07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13,  
14, 15  
16, 17, 18  
19  
20, 21, 22  
23, 24, 44  
25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30  
31, 32  
45  
If more than one code is listed for your brand of DVD player,  
try each one until the correct one is entered.  
Gemini  
Hamlin  
Hitachi  
Hughes  
Jerrold  
Manufacturers’ codes for DVD player  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Hitachi  
Codes  
01  
12  
Macom  
Magnavox  
Oak  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Primestar  
RCA  
S. Atlanta  
Samsung  
Sony  
Kenwood  
Mitsubishi  
Onkyo  
Panasonic  
Philips  
05, 08  
10  
15, 16  
04  
07  
Pioneer  
Samsung  
Sony  
03  
14  
02  
46  
33, 34, 35  
36  
Toshiba  
Yamaha  
06  
09  
47  
Tocom  
Toshiba  
Zenith  
37  
48  
38, 39  
Initial setting: 01  
NOTE  
You cannot use this remote control to operate other  
manufacturers’ DVD recorder.  
Initial setting: 01  
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without  
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot  
operate the equipment.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If  
there are any problems you cannot solve, contact your JVC’s  
service center.  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
The power cord is not plugged in.  
SOLUTION  
The power does not come on.  
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.  
The receiver turns off (enters standby  
mode).  
Speakers are overloaded because of high  
volume.  
1. Stop the playback source.  
2. Turn on the receiver again, then turn the  
volume down.  
Speakers are overloaded because of a  
short circuit at the speaker terminals.  
Check the speaker wiring. If speaker wiring  
is not short-circuited, contact your dealer.  
The receiver is overloaded because of a  
high voltage.  
Consult your dealer after unplugging the  
power cord.  
“OVER HEAT” flashes on the display,  
then the receiver turns off.  
The receiver is overloaded because of high Turn on the receiver again. If the receiver  
volume or long time usage.  
turns off soon, consult your dealer after  
unplugging the power cord.  
No sound from speakers.  
Speaker signal cables are not connected.  
Check speaker wiring, then reconnect if  
necessary (see page 6) after unplugging  
the power cord.  
Connections are incorrect.  
Check the audio connections (see pages 7  
to 11) after unplugging the power cord.  
An incorrect source is selected.  
Muting is activated.  
Select the correct source.  
Press MUTING to cancel the mute (see  
page 15).  
An incorrect input mode (analog or digital)  
is selected.  
Select the correct input mode (analog or  
digital).  
TV Direct is activated.  
Deactivate TV Direct (see page 14).  
Sound from one speaker only.  
Speaker signal cables are not connected  
properly.  
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if  
necessary (see page 6) after unplugging  
the power cord.  
Bass sound is reinforced too much  
when listening in stereo.  
Appropriate bass level is not selected.  
The sounds may be intermittently distorted  
Adjust audio position level (see page 14).  
Sounds are intermittently distorted or  
the noise is heard by the outside noise or the noise may be heard by the outside  
This is not a malfunction. But if this  
continues, turn on the receiver again.  
such as a lightning discharge.  
noise such as a lightning discharge but the  
sound will be restored automatically.  
No picture is displayed on the monitor. Connections are incorrect.  
Input mode is incorrect.  
Check the video connections (see pages 7  
to 10) after unplugging the power code.  
Check the component video input mode  
(see page 25).  
Remote control does not operate as  
you intend.  
The remote control is not ready for your  
intended operation.  
Set the mode selector correctly, then press  
the corresponding source selecting button  
or SOUND before operation  
Remote control does not work.  
There is an obstruction hiding the remote  
sensor on the receiver.  
Remove the obstruction.  
Batteries are weak.  
Replace batteries.  
The mode selector is set to the incorrect  
position.  
Set the mode selector to the proper  
position.  
Buttons cannot be used.  
TV Direct is activated.  
Deactivate TV Direct (see page 14).  
Continuous hiss or buzzing during FM Incoming signal is too weak.  
reception.  
Connect an outdoor FM antenna or contact  
your dealer.  
The station is too far away.  
Select another station.  
The wrong antenna is being used.  
Check with your dealer to be sure you have  
the correct antenna.  
Antennas are not connected properly.  
Check the connections.  
Occasional cracking noise during FM  
reception.  
Ignition noise from automobiles.  
Move the antenna farther from automobile  
traffic.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video  
Video Input Sensitivity/Impedance:  
Specifications  
Composite video: DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS:  
1 V(p-p)/75  
S-video: DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS:  
Y (luminance):  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
C (chrominance, burst):  
Component: DVR/DVD, VCR:  
Y (luminance):  
0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
PB, PR:  
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Video Output Level/Impedance:  
Designs and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Composite video: DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
S-video: DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:  
Y (luminance):  
C (chrominance, burst):  
Component: MONITOR OUT:  
Y (luminance):  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Amplifier  
Output Power  
0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
At stereo operation:  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Negative  
Front channels:  
100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven  
into 6 at 1 kHz with no more than 10%  
total harmonic distortion.  
PB, PR:  
Synchronization:  
At surround operation:  
Front channels:  
100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven  
into 6 at 1 kHz with no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
FM tuner (IHF)  
Tuning Range:  
Usable Sensitivity:  
Monaural:  
87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz  
Center channel:  
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 6 at  
1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total  
harmonic distortion.  
12.8 dBf (1.2 µV/75 )  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
Monaural:  
Surround channels: 100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven  
into 6 at 1 kHz, with no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
16.0 dBf (1.7 µV/75 )  
37.5 dBf (20.5 µV/75 )  
Stereo:  
Stereo Separation at OUT(REC): 35 dB at 1 kHz  
Surround back channel:  
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 6 at  
1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total  
harmonic distortion.  
AM tuner  
Tuning Range:  
* Measured on AC 110 V, 127 V, 220 V, and 240 V.  
531 kHz to 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)  
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)  
Audio  
General  
Audio Input Sensitivity/Impedance:  
Power Requirements:  
AC 110 V/127 V/220 V/230 V – 240 V  
adjustable with the voltage selector,  
50 Hz/60 Hz  
,
DVR/DVD (DVD MULTI), VCR, DBS, TV:  
330 mV/47 kΩ  
Audio Input (DIGITAL IN)*:  
Power Consumption:  
120 W (at operation)  
Coaxial: DIGITAL IN 1(DVR/DVD):  
5 W (in standby mode)  
0.5 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Optical: DIGITAL IN 2(DBS), 3(VCR):  
–21 dBm to –15 dBm  
Dimensions (W x H x D): 435 mm x 70 mm x 317.2 mm  
Mass: 6.3 kg  
(660 nm 30 nm)  
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS (with  
sampling frequency—32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz).  
Audio Output Level:  
DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:  
330 mV  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (’66 IHF/DIN): 80 dB/62 dB  
Frequency Response (8 ):  
Bass Boost:  
20 Hz to 20 kHz ( 1 dB)  
+4 dB 1 dB at 100 Hz  
Equalization (at DSP operation):  
Center frequency:  
Control range:  
63 Hz, 250 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 16 kHz  
8 dB  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A.,  
Canada, and U.K.)  
AM LOOP  
SUBWOOFER CENTER  
SURR-R  
SURR-L  
1(DVR/DVD) 2(DBS)  
DIGITAL IN  
3(VCR) DIGITAL OUT  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
110V  
ANTENNA  
CAUTION:SPEAKER  
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16  
Y
PB  
PR  
220V  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND  
PCM/  
STREAM  
BACK  
RIGHT LEFT  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
VCR  
IN  
FM 75  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
DVD MULTI IN  
AM EXT  
COAXIAL  
AUDIO  
230 -  
240V  
L
127V  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
R
AV  
VCR  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
SUB-  
VCR  
DVR  
OUT (REC)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COMPU  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO  
DVR  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
DBS  
IN  
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
WOOFER  
OUT (REC)  
(PLAY)  
(PLAY)  
OUT  
LINK-III  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
110V  
220V  
230 -  
240V  
127V  
CAUTION for mains (AC) line  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your  
mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the  
position of the voltage selector switch provided on  
the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset  
the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a  
damage or risk of fire/electric shock.  
EN, CS  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0505RYMMDWJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER  
RX-F31S  
INSTRUCTIONS  
LVT1306-011B  
[UJ]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings, Cautions, and Others  
Caution––  
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely.  
The STANDBY/ON button in any position does not  
STANDBY/ON button!  
disconnect the mains line. The power can be remote controlled.  
CAUTION  
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:  
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.  
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.  
CAUTION  
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.  
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper  
or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)  
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted  
candles, on the apparatus.  
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be  
considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of  
these batteries must be followed strictly.  
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or  
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids such as  
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.  
Caution: Proper Ventilation  
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage.  
Locate the apparatus as follows:  
Front:  
Sides:  
Back:  
No obstructions open spacing.  
No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides.  
No obstructions in 15 cm from the back.  
No obstructions, place on the level surface.  
Bottom:  
In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated.  
Spacing 15 cm or more  
RX-F31S  
Front  
Wall or  
obstructions  
Stand height 15 cm or more  
Floor  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Parts identification ................................................ 2  
Getting started ...................................................... 4  
Before Installation .................................................................. 4  
Checking the supplied accessories ....................................... 4  
Putting batteries in the remote control ................................... 4  
Setting the voltage selector ................................................... 4  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ................................... 5  
Connecting the speakers ....................................................... 6  
Connecting video components .............................................. 7  
Connecting the power cord .................................................. 11  
Basic operations ................................................. 12  
1 Turn on the power ............................................................. 12  
2 Select the source to play .................................................. 12  
3 Adjust the volume ............................................................. 13  
Selecting the digital decode mode....................................... 13  
Adjusting the subwoofer audio position ............................... 14  
Activating TV Direct ............................................................. 14  
Turning off the sounds temporarily ...................................... 15  
Changing the display brightness.......................................... 15  
Turning off the power with the Sleep Timer ......................... 15  
Basic settings...................................................... 16  
Setting the speaker information automatically  
—Smart Surround Setup ............................................... 16  
Basic setting items ............................................................... 18  
Operation through on-screen display menus ....................... 18  
Menu operation buttons................................................... 18  
Setup menu configuration ............................................... 19  
Menu operating procedure................................................... 20  
Setting the items .................................................................. 21  
Setting the speakers ....................................................... 21  
Activating the EX/ES/PLIIx setting—EX/ES/PLIIx ........... 22  
Selecting the main or sub channel—DUAL MONO ......... 23  
Setting bass sound.......................................................... 23  
Using the Midnight mode—MIDNIGHT MODE ............... 24  
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminals  
—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3 ................................................... 24  
Selecting the component video input mode  
—DVD VIDEO INPUT/VCR VIDEO INPUT ............... 25  
Superimposing the menus—SUPERIMPOSE ................ 25  
Converting S-video signals into composite video signals  
—DOWN MIX............................................................ 25  
Converting composite video signals into S-video signals  
—Y/C SEPARATE ..................................................... 25  
Sound adjustments ............................................. 26  
Basic adjustment items........................................................ 26  
Operation through on-screen display menus ....................... 26  
Menu operation buttons................................................... 26  
Setup menu configuration ............................................... 27  
Menu operating procedure................................................... 28  
Adjusting the items .............................................................. 29  
Adjusting speaker output level ........................................ 29  
Adjusting the equalization patterns  
—DIGITAL EQ 63Hz/250Hz/1kHz/4kHz/16kHz ........ 30  
Adjusting the bass sounds .............................................. 30  
Adjusting the sound parameters for the  
Surround/DSP modes ............................................... 31  
Tuner operations ................................................. 32  
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing .................................. 32  
Tuning in to stations manually.............................................. 32  
Using preset tuning .............................................................. 32  
Selecting the FM reception mode ........................................ 33  
Creating realistic sound fields........................... 34  
Reproducing theater ambience ........................................... 34  
Introducing the Surround modes ......................................... 34  
Introducing the DSP modes................................................. 37  
Using the Surround/DSP modes ......................................... 38  
Activating the Surround/DSP modes ................................... 39  
AV COMPU LINK remote control system .......... 40  
Operating other JVC products ........................... 42  
Operating other manufacturers’ products ........ 44  
Troubleshooting .................................................. 47  
Specifications...................................................... 48  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control  
See pages in parentheses for details.  
Parts identification  
1
2
TV DIRECT button (14)  
Source selecting buttons (12, 14, 32, 33)  
DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, DVD MULTI, FM/AM  
Operating buttons for tuner (32, 33)  
3
4
( TUNING, FM MODE, TUNING 9, MEMORY  
On-screen display operation buttons (18, 26)  
Cursor buttons (3, 2, 5, ),  
SET  
5
6
7
8
9
SMART SURROUND SETUP button (16)  
EX/ES button (22)  
SOUND button (13, 14, 22, 24, 30, 31)  
SURROUND button (39)  
Adjusting buttons for speaker and subwoofer output levels (29)  
FRONT L +/–, FRONT R +/–, CENTER +/–, SUBWFR +/–,  
SURR L +/–, SURR R +/–, S.BACK +/–  
AUDIO button (12, 14)  
MUTING button (15)  
VOLUME +/– button (13)  
Mode selector (12, 14, 16, 18, 22, 24, 26, 29 – 32, 39)  
DVR, DVD, AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS  
MENU button (18, 26)  
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER  
-
REMOTE CONTROL RM SRXF31U  
1
2
p
q
w
e
p
r
t
• Numeric buttons (33)  
q
w
• Adjusting buttons (13, 14, 24, 30, 31)  
DECODE, EQ FREQ, BASS BOOST, C.TONE,  
EQ LEVEL 9, MIDNIGHT, EFFECT, EQ LEVEL (,  
A.POSITION  
e
y
u
i
o
DIMMER button (15)  
ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT button (12)  
TEST TONE button (17, 29)  
3
SLEEP button (15)  
r
SET  
The buttons which are not indicated here can be used for  
operating other JVC products or other manufacturers’ products.  
For details, see pages 42 to 46.  
4
5
• When operating this receiver, set the mode selector (e)  
to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
• When operating a JVC DVD recorder, set the mode  
selector (e) to “DVR.”  
t
• When operating a JVC DVD player, set the mode selector  
(e) to “DVD.”  
6
y
u
7
8
9
i
o
To open the cover of the  
remote control, push here  
then slide downward.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See pages in parentheses for details.  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
SOURCE  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
RX-F31  
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER  
/
MULTI JOG  
DVR MULTI  
DVR  
/
DVD  
VCR  
DBS  
TV  
FM / AM  
SET / TUNER PRESET  
STANDBY  
PHONES  
/
ON  
TV DIRECT  
SETTING  
ADJUST  
SURROUND  
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
1
2
STANDBY/ON button and standby lamp (12, 14, 32)  
Source lamps  
7
SETTING button (18, 32)  
ADJUST button (26, 32)  
SURROUND button (39)  
Remote sensor (4)  
Display window (see below)  
• SET button (17, 18, 26)  
8
9
p
q
w
DVD MULTI, DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, FM/AM  
• SOURCE SELECTOR (12, 14, 33)  
• MULTI JOG (18, 26, 33, 39)  
MASTER VOLUME control (13)  
PHONES jack (13)  
3
4
5
6
• TUNER PRESET button (33)  
TV DIRECT button (14)  
Display window  
1
2
3
4 5  
6
7
9
0
-
8
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
PL  
x
LPCM  
L
C
R
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
$
~
! @ #  
%
^
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
EQ indicator (30)  
C.TONE indicator (31)  
VIRTUAL SB indicator (38)  
and indicator (35)  
AUDIO P. (position) indicator (14)  
Neo:6 indicator (36)  
BASS indicator (30)  
Tuner operation indicators (32)  
TUNED, ST (stereo)  
-
=
ATT (attenuator) indicator (30)  
Digital signal format indicators (13, 34 – 36)  
LPCM (Linear PCM), DOLBY D (Dolby Digital), DTS, 96/24  
Signal and speaker indicators (15)  
DSP indicator (36, 37)  
AUTO SR (surround) indicator (39)  
3D indicator (36, 37)  
~
!
@
#
$
%
Main display  
Frequency unit indicators  
MHz (for FM station), kHz (for AM station)  
HP (headphones) indicator (13, 36, 37)  
9
0
AUTO MUTING indicator (33)  
SLEEP indicator (15)  
^
Rear panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
AM LOOP  
SUBWOOFER CENTER  
SURR-R  
SURR-L  
1(DVR/DVD) 2(DBS)  
3(VCR) DIGITAL OUT  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
ANTENNA  
CAUTION:SPEAKER  
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16  
Y
PB  
PR  
110V  
220V  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND  
PCM/  
STREAM  
BACK  
RIGHT LEFT  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
FM 75  
VCR  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL IN  
DVD MULTI IN  
AM EXT  
COAXIAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
230 -  
240V  
L
127V  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
R
AV  
VCR  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
SUB-  
VCR  
DVR  
OUT (REC)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COMPU  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO  
DVR  
OUT  
IN  
DBS  
IN  
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
WOOFER  
OUT (REC)  
(PLAY)  
(REC)  
(PLAY)  
OUT  
LINK-III  
7
8
9
p q  
w
1
2
3
Power cord (11)  
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (4)  
DVD MULTI IN jacks (8)  
SUBWOOFER, CENTER, SURR-R, SURR-L  
ANTENNA terminals (5)  
DIGITAL IN terminals (11)  
• Coaxial: 1(DVR/DVD)  
• Optical: 2(DBS), 3(VCR)  
DIGITAL OUT terminal (11)  
COMPONENT (Y, PB, PR) jacks (7 – 10)  
VCR IN, DVR/DVD IN, MONITOR OUT  
8
VIDEO terminals (7 – 10)  
VIDEO (composite video) jacks, S-VIDEO terminals  
• Input: DVR/DVD IN (PLAY), VCR IN (PLAY), DBS IN  
• Output: DVR OUT (REC), VCR OUT (REC), MONITOR OUT  
AUDIO jacks (7 – 10)  
• Input: DVR/DVD IN (PLAY), VCR IN (PLAY), DBS IN, TV IN  
• Output: DVR OUT (REC), VCR OUT (REC), MONITOR OUT  
SUBWOOFER OUT jack (6)  
AV COMPU LINK-III terminals (40)  
SPEAKERS terminals (6)  
FRONT, CENTER, SURROUND, SURROUND BACK  
4
5
9
p
q
w
6
7
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Putting batteries in the remote control  
Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first.  
Getting started  
1
2
3
1 Press and slide the battery cover on the back  
Before Installation  
of the remote control.  
2 Insert batteries.  
General precautions  
• Be sure your hands are dry.  
Turn the power off to all components.  
• Read the manuals supplied with the components you are going  
to connect.  
Make sure to match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).  
3 Replace the cover.  
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases,  
replace the batteries. Use two R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F) type dry-cell  
batteries.  
Locations  
• Install the receiver in a location that is level and protected from  
moisture and dust.  
• Supplied butteries are for initial setup. Replace for continued  
use.  
• The temperature around the receiver must be between –5˚C  
and 35˚C.  
CAUTION:  
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor  
ventilation could cause overheating and damage the receiver.  
• Leave sufficient distance between the receiver and the TV.  
Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells:  
• Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity:  
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).  
• Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may  
differ in voltage.  
• Always replace both batteries at the same time.  
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.  
Handling the receiver  
• Do not insert any metal object into the receiver.  
• Do not disassemble the receiver or remove screws, covers, or  
cabinet.  
• Do not expose the receiver to rain or moisture.  
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When  
unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage  
the cord.  
• When you are away on travel or otherwise for an extended  
period or time, remove the plug from the wall outlet. A small  
amount of power is always consumed while the power cord is  
connected to the wall outlet.  
When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at  
the remote sensor on the front panel.  
Remote sensor  
The receiver has a built-in cooling fan which operates  
while the receiver is turned on. Be sure to leave enough  
ventilation to obtain sufficient cooling effect.  
CAUTION:  
To operate the receiver, set  
the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all  
connections are completed.  
Checking the supplied accessories  
Check to be sure you have all of the following supplied  
accessories. If anything is missing, contact your dealer  
immediately.  
Setting the voltage selector  
Before connections, always do the following first if necessary.  
Select the correct voltage in VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear  
of the receiver by using a screw driver.  
• Remote control (× 1)  
• Batteries (× 2)  
• AM loop antenna (× 1)  
• FM antenna (× 1)  
• Digital coaxial cable (× 1)  
• AC plug adaptor (× 1)  
• Check to be sure if the voltage mark is set to the voltage for  
your area where this unit plugs in.  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
110V  
220V  
230 -  
240V  
127V  
Voltage mark  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas  
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.  
AM loop antenna  
(supplied)  
Snap the tabs on the loop  
into the slots of the base to  
assemble the AM loop  
antenna.  
If FM reception is poor, connect an  
outdoor FM antenna (not supplied).  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
FM 75  
If AM reception is poor, connect  
AM EXT  
COAXIAL  
an outdoor single vinyl-covered  
wire (not supplied).  
FM antenna (supplied)  
220V  
110V  
127V  
ANTENNA  
230 -  
240V  
NOTES  
AM antenna connection  
• If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl,  
remove the vinyl while twisting it as shown on the  
right.  
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch  
any other terminals, connecting cords and power  
cord. This could cause poor reception.  
Connect the AM loop antenna supplied to the AM LOOP  
terminals.  
Connect the white cord to the AM EXT terminal, and connect the  
black cord to the H terminal.  
Turn the loop until you have the best reception.  
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered  
wire (not supplied) to the AM EXT terminal. Keep the AM loop  
antenna connected.  
FM antenna connection  
Connect the FM antenna supplied to the FM 75 COAXIAL  
terminal as a temporary measure.  
Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally.  
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor FM antenna (not  
supplied). Before attaching a 75 coaxial cable with a  
connector (IEC or DIN 45325) , disconnect the supplied FM  
antenna.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the speakers  
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.  
Speaker Layout Diagram  
C
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
SW  
RS  
L
R
Center speaker (C)  
CAUTION:SPEAKER  
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16  
LS  
SB  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND  
BACK  
RIGHT LEFT  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
SPEAKERS  
Powered  
subwoofer  
(SW)  
AV  
COMPU  
LINK-III  
SUB-  
WOOFER  
OUT  
Right front speaker  
(R)  
Left front speaker  
(L)  
Surround back  
speaker (SB)  
Left surround  
speaker (LS)  
Right surround  
speaker (RS)  
Connecting the speakers  
Connecting the powered subwoofer  
By connecting a subwoofer, you can enhance the bass or  
reproduce the original LFE signals recorded in digital software.  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
Connect the input jack of a powered subwoofer to the  
SUBWOOFER OUT jack on the rear panel, using a cord  
with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).  
2
3
1
1
2
• Refer also to the manual supplied with your subwoofer.  
After connecting all the speakers and/or a subwoofer, set the  
speaker setting information properly to obtain the best possible  
surround effect. For details, see pages 16, 17, and 21 to 23.  
1 Twist and remove the insulation at the end of each  
NOTE  
speaker cord.  
You can place a subwoofer wherever you like since bass sound is  
non-directional. Normally place it in front of you.  
2 Press and hold the clamp of the speaker terminal  
(1), then insert the speaker cord (2).  
• For each speaker, connect the (+) and (–) terminals on the  
rear panel to the (+) and (–) terminals marked on the  
speakers.  
3 Release the finger from the clamp.  
CAUTIONS:  
• Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the  
speaker terminals (6 – 16 ).  
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to one speaker  
terminal.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting video components  
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.  
This receiver is equipped with the following video terminals—  
composite video, S-video, and component video terminals.  
• If your video components have S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or  
component video (Y, PB, PR) jacks, connect them using an S-  
video cable (not supplied) or component video cable (not  
supplied). By using these terminals, you can get a better picture  
quality in the order:  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their  
manuals.  
DO NOT use a TV through a VCR or a TV with a built-in  
VCR; otherwise, the picture may be distorted.  
Component > S-video > Composite  
IMPORTANT:  
CAUTION:  
Component video signals are transmitted only through component  
video output jacks. Therefore, if a recording video component and  
a playing video component are connected to the receiver through  
the video terminals of different type, you cannot record the picture.  
In addition, if the TV and a playing video component are  
connected to the receiver through the video terminals of different  
type, you cannot view the playback picture on the TV.  
On the other hand, S-video signals and composite video signals  
can be converted into each other and transmitted through the  
corresponding output jack. For details about the settings of the  
conversion, see page 25.  
If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic  
equalizer between the source components and this receiver, the  
sound output through this receiver may be distorted.  
If your video components have AV COMPU LINK terminal  
See also page 40 for detailed information about the connection  
and the AV COMPU LINK remote control system.  
7 Connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player with its stereo output jacks (DVR/DVD):  
Red  
White  
Stereo audio cable  
(not supplied)  
AUDIO  
White  
Red  
DVR  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
OUT (REC)  
DVD recorder or  
DVD player  
Å
ı
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Ç Î  
Composite video cable  
(not supplied)  
‰ Ï  
Ì
Y
PB  
PR  
VIDEO  
VCR  
IN  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
S-VIDEO  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
DVR  
OUT (REC)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
MONITOR  
OUT  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
COMPONENT  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Component video cable (not supplied)  
Å To left/right audio channel output  
NOTES  
ı Only for DVD recorder: To left/right audio channel  
input  
Ç Only for DVD recorder: To composite video input  
Î To composite video output  
To S-video output  
Ï Only for DVD recorder: To S-video input  
Ì To component video output  
• When connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player to the  
component video input jacks, make the component video input  
setting (DVD VIDEO INPUT) correctly. If you do not, you cannot  
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK  
remote control system cannot operate properly. For details, see  
page 25.  
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical  
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for  
a DVD recorder and DVD player is set to use the digital coaxial  
terminal (DIGITAL IN 1 (DVR/DVD)). For details of digital  
connection, see page 11.  
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player with its analog discrete output jacks (DVD MULTI IN):  
This connection is the best connection method for enjoying DVD Audio sounds. When a DVD Audio disc is played back, the original high-  
quality sounds can be reproduced only using this connection.  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.  
Monaural audio cable  
(not supplied)  
Red  
White  
Stereo audio cable  
(not supplied)  
Red  
AUDIO  
White  
White  
Stereo audio cable  
(not supplied)  
SUBWOOFER CENTER  
SURR-R  
SURR-L  
DVR  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
Red  
OUT (REC)  
DVD MULTI IN  
Å ı Ç Π‰  
220V  
110V  
230 -  
240V  
127V  
Ï
DVD recorder or  
DVD player  
Ì Ó È Ô  
Y
PB  
PR  
VIDEO  
Composite video  
VCR  
IN  
cable (not supplied)  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
S-VIDEO  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
DVR  
OUT (REC)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COMPONENT  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Component video cable (not supplied)  
Å To left/right front channel audio output  
NOTE  
ı Only for DVD recorder: To left/right front channel  
audio input  
Ç To left/right surround channel audio output  
Î To center channel audio output  
To subwoofer output  
When connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player to the  
component video input jacks, make the component video input  
setting (DVD VIDEO INPUT) correctly. If you do not, you cannot  
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK  
remote control system cannot operate properly. For details, see  
page 25.  
Ï Only for DVD recorder: To composite video input  
Ì To composite video output  
Ó To S-video output  
È Only for DVD recorder: To S-video input  
Ô To component video output  
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.  
About “DVD MULTI”  
When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source (see page 12), you can enjoy analog discrete output sound (5.1-channel reproduction)  
from the connected component.  
You may need to select analog discrete output mode on the component.  
NOTES  
• When using the headphones, you can listen to the front channel sounds (left and right) only. 3D HEADPHONE mode (see pages 36  
and 37) is not available.  
• When TV Direct is activated while “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, the source changes to the last selected source—  
“DVR/DVD,” “VCR,” and “DBS” (see page 14).  
• Surround/DSP modes (see pages 34 to 39) are not available for “DVD MULTI.”  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Connecting a VCR  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
Red  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.  
White  
Stereo audio cable (not supplied)  
White  
Red  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
VCR  
DBS  
IN  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
(PLAY)  
Å
ı
VCR  
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Ç
‰ Ï Ì  
Y
PB  
PR  
Î
Composite video  
VCR  
IN  
cable (not supplied)  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
COMPONENT  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Component video cable (not supplied)  
Å To left/right audio channel output  
NOTES  
ı To left/right audio channel input  
Ç To composite video input  
Î To composite video output  
To S-video output  
• When connecting a VCR to the component video input jacks,  
make the component video input setting (VCR VIDEO INPUT)  
correctly. If you do not, you cannot view the playback picture on  
the TV or the AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot  
operate properly. For details, see page 25.  
Ï To S-video input  
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical  
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for  
a video component other than DVD recorder and DVD player is  
set to use the digital optical terminal (DIGITAL IN 3 (VCR)). For  
details of digital connection, see page 11.  
Ì To component video output  
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.  
7 Connecting a DBS tuner  
White  
Stereo audio cable (not supplied)  
VCR  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
TV  
IN  
Red  
Å
DBS tuner  
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Ç
ı
Composite video cable (not supplied)  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
VCR  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Å To left/right audio channel output  
ı To composite video output  
Ç To S-video output  
NOTE  
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical  
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for a  
TV is set to use the digital optical terminal (DIGITAL IN 2 (DBS)).  
For details of digital connection, see page 11.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Connecting a TV  
Connect the TV to the appropriate MONITOR OUT jacks to view the playback picture from any other connected video components.  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.  
Red  
White  
L
Stereo audio cable  
White  
Red  
(not supplied)  
Å ı  
R
SUB-  
WOOFER  
OUT  
TV  
DBS  
IN  
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Ç
Î ‰  
Y
PB  
PR  
VCR  
Composite video cable  
(not supplied)  
IN  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
DBS  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
COMPONENT  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Component video cable (not supplied)  
Å To left/right audio channel input  
NOTES  
ı To left/right audio channel output  
Ç To composite video input  
Î To S-video input  
To component video input  
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.  
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical  
cable. For details of digital connection, see page 11.  
When connecting a TV through the COMPONENT MONITOR  
OUT jacks, the on-screen display does not appear on the TV  
screen (see page 25).  
IMPORTANT:  
Audio signals come out through the MONITOR OUT (L/R) jacks  
ONLY when TV Direct is in use (see page 14).  
Connect these jacks to the audio input jacks corresponding to the  
video connection; otherwise, no sound comes out of the TV  
speaker when TV Direct is in use.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Digital output terminal  
You can connect any digital components which have an optical  
digital input terminal.  
Digital connection  
This receiver is equipped with three DIGITAL IN terminals—one  
digital coaxial terminal and two digital optical terminals—and one  
DIGITAL OUT terminal.  
To reproduce the digital sound, use the digital connection in  
addition to the analog connection methods described on pages 7  
to 10.  
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Digital coaxial cable (supplied: 1 cable)  
Digital optical cable (not supplied)  
DIGITAL OUT  
PCM/  
STREAM  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
Connecting digital recording equipment to the  
DIGITAL OUT terminal enables you to perform  
digital-to-digital recording.  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their  
manuals.  
7 Digital input terminals  
220V  
110V  
127V  
NOTE  
230 -  
240V  
The digital signal format transmitted through the DIGITAL OUT  
terminal is the same as that of the input signal. For example,  
when the DTS signals are input, the DTS signals are transmitted.  
When the component has a digital coaxial output  
terminal, connect it to the 1(DVR/DVD) terminal,  
using a digital coaxial cable (supplied).  
Connecting the power cord  
When all the audio/video connections have been made, connect  
the AC power plug to the wall outlet. Make sure that the plugs are  
inserted firmly. The standby lamp lights in red.  
CAUTIONS:  
1(DVR/DVD)  
DIGITAL IN  
2(DBS)  
3(VCR)  
• Do not plug in before setting the VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch  
on the rear of the receiver and all connection procedures are  
complete.  
• Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.  
• Do not alter, twist or pull the power cord, or put anything heavy  
on it, which may cause fire, electric shock, or other accidents.  
• If the cord is damaged, consult a dealer and have the power  
cord replaced with a new one.  
When the component has a digital optical output  
terminal, connect it to the 2(DBS) or 3(VCR)  
terminal, using a digital optical cable (not supplied).  
NOTES  
• Keep the power cord away from the connecting cables and the  
antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen  
interference.  
Before connecting a digital  
optical cable, unplug the  
protective plug.  
• The preset settings such as preset channels and sound  
adjustment may be erased in a few days in the following cases:  
– When you unplug the power cord.  
– When a power failure occurs.  
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug, use the supplied  
AC plug adaptor.  
NOTES  
• When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have  
been set for use with the following components:  
– 1(DVR/DVD): For DVD recorder or DVD player  
– 2(DBS):  
– 3(VCR):  
For DBS tuner  
For VCR  
If you connect other components, change the digital input  
(DIGITAL IN) terminal setting correctly. See “Setting the digital  
input (DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3” on page 24.  
• Select the digital input mode. See “Selecting the analog or  
digital input mode” on page 12.  
• When you want to operate the connected component (except  
DBS tuner) using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system  
(see pages 40 and 41), connect them also as described on  
pages 7 to 10.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Select the source to play  
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until the source name  
you want appears on the display.  
Basic operations  
On the front panel:  
The source lamp corresponding to the selected source lights in  
red.  
• As you turn SOURCE SELECTOR, the source changes as  
follows:  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
The on-screen display appears on the TV screen for 5 seconds  
(except “turning off the sounds temporarily”) to show the  
indication in the following cases:  
– When you select the source (see right column).  
– When you adjust the volume (see page 13).  
– When you turn off the sounds temporarily (see page 15).  
– When you select the Surround/DSP modes (see page 39).  
To cancel the function, set “SUPERIMPOSE” to “SUPERIMPOSE:  
OFF” (see page 25).  
DVD MULTI  
DVR/DVD (DGT)  
DBS (DIGITAL)  
VCR (DIGITAL)  
TV (DIGITAL)  
(Back to the beginning)  
FM  
AM  
DVD MULTI:  
Select for the DVD player using the analog  
discrete output mode (5.1-channel  
reproduction).  
1
2
3
DVR/DVD (DGT) : Select for the DVD recorder or DVD player.  
*
VCR (DIGITAL) : Select for the VCR.  
*
DBS (DIGITAL) : Select for the DBS tuner.  
*
Source lamps  
TV (DIGITAL) :  
Select for the TV.  
*
FM:  
AM:  
Select for an FM broadcast.  
Select for an AM broadcast.  
1
2
From the remote control:  
Press one of the source selecting buttons.  
• For the tuner, press FM/AM. Each time you press FM/AM, the  
band alternates between “FM” and “AM.”  
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control, set  
the mode selector to  
3
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
* Selecting the analog or digital input mode  
For a component you have connected using both the analog  
connection and the digital connection methods (see pages 7 to 11),  
you need to select the correct input mode.  
You can select the digital input only for sources which you have  
selected digital input terminals for. (See “Setting the digital input  
(DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3” on page 24.)  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Press ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT to select the  
analog or digital input mode.  
1 Turn on the power  
AUDIO on the  
• Each time you press the button, the input mode alternates  
between the analog input (“ANALOG”) and the digital input  
(“DGTL AUTO”).  
Press  
STANDBY/ON (or  
This setting is memorized for each source.  
remote control).  
The standby lamp goes off and the source lamp of the current  
source lights in red.  
DGTL AUTO:  
Select for the digital input mode. The receiver  
automatically detects the incoming signal  
format, then the digital signal format indicator  
(LPCM, DOLBY D, DTS, or DTS 96/24) for  
the detected signal lights up.  
Current source name appears.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
ANALOG:  
Select for the analog input mode.  
Initial setting: DGTL AUTO  
To turn off the power (into standby)  
NOTE  
Press  
again.  
STANDBY/ON (or  
AUDIO on the remote control)  
When you select “DVD MULTI,FM,or “AM” as the source, the  
analog and digital input mode is not available.  
The standby lamp lights in red.  
NOTE  
A small amount of power is consumed in standby mode. To turn  
the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Adjust the volume  
Selecting the digital decode mode  
If the following symptoms occur while playing Dolby Digital or DTS  
software with “DGTL AUTO” selected (see page 12), follow the  
procedure below:  
• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.  
• Noise comes out while searching for or skipping chapters or  
tracks.  
To increase the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME  
control clockwise (or press VOLUME + on the  
remote control).  
To decrease the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME  
control counterclockwise (or press VOLUME – on  
the remote control).  
• When you adjust the volume, the volume level indication  
appears on the display for a while.  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Press SOUND, then press DECODE to select  
“DOLBY D” or “DTS.”  
• Each time you press DECODE, the digital decode mode  
changes as follows:  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
CAUTION:  
Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any  
sources. If the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of  
sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin  
your speakers.  
DGTL AUTO  
DOLBY D  
(Back to the beginning)  
DTS  
To play back software encoded with Dolby Digital, select  
“DOLBY D.”  
To play back software encoded with DTS, select “DTS.”  
NOTE  
The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0”  
(minimum) to “50” (maximum).  
NOTES  
• When you turn off the power or select another source,  
“DOLBY D” or “DTS” is canceled and the digital decode mode is  
automatically reset to “DGTL AUTO.”  
• After pressing SOUND, the numeric buttons work for sound  
adjustments. To use the numeric buttons to operate your target  
source, press the corresponding source selecting button before  
operation; otherwise, the remote control may not work as you  
intend.  
Listening with headphones  
You can enjoy not only stereo software but also multi-channel  
software through the headphones. (Sounds are down-mixed to the  
front channels while playing multi-channel software.)  
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the  
front panel to activate the HEADPHONE mode.  
The HP (headphone) indicator lights up on the display.  
You can also enjoy the Surround/DSP mode through the  
headphones—3D HEADPHONE mode. For details, see pages  
36 and 37.  
• Disconnecting a pair of headphones from the PHONES jack  
cancels the HEADPHONE (or 3D HEADPHONE) mode and  
activates the speakers.  
The following digital signal format indicators on the display  
indicate what type of signal comes into the receiver.  
LPCM:  
Lights up when Linear PCM signal comes in.  
DOLBY D: • Lights up when Dolby Digital signal comes in.  
• Flashes when “DOLBY D” is selected for any  
software other than Dolby Digital.  
CAUTION:  
DTS:  
• Lights up when conventional DTS signal comes  
in.  
• Flashes when “DTS” is selected for any  
software other than DTS.  
Be sure to turn down the volume:  
• Before connecting or putting on headphones, as high volume  
can damage both the headphones and your hearing.  
• Before removing headphones, as high volume may output from  
the speakers.  
DTS 96/24: Lights up when DTS 96/24 signal comes in.  
NOTE  
When “DGTL AUTO” cannot recognize the incoming signal, no  
digital signal format indicator lights up on the display.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Activating TV Direct  
TV Direct enables you to use this receiver as an AV selector  
while the receiver is turned off.  
When TV Direct is activated, the pictures and sounds go from the  
video components such as DVD player to the TV through this  
receiver. Thus, you can use the video components and the TV as  
if they were connected directly.  
• This function takes effect for the following sources—DVR/DVD,  
VCR, and DBS.  
To activate (or deactivate) TV Direct, follow the procedure below:  
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control, set  
the mode selector to  
1 Press TV DIRECT.  
All the indications disappear, then the source lamp of the  
current source lights in green.  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
2 Turn on the video component and TV.  
3 Select the target video component.  
On the front panel:  
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until one of the  
source lamps—DVR/DVD, VCR, or DBS—lights  
in green.  
From the remote control:  
Press one of the source selecting buttons—  
DVR/DVD, VCR, or DBS.  
The source lamp corresponding to the selected source lights  
in green.  
Adjusting the subwoofer audio  
position  
If the subwoofer sound is much reinforced for stereo sound  
compared to the sound reproduced with multi-channel, set the  
subwoofer audio position. The subwoofer output level is  
automatically decreased by the selected value when you are  
listening in stereo.  
To cancel TV Direct and turn off the receiver, press  
STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or  
control).  
AUDIO on the remote  
The receiver is turned off and the standby lamp lights up.  
The AUDIO P. indicator lights up when this function is activated.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
To cancel TV Direct and turn on the receiver, press TV DIRECT  
again.  
The receiver is turned on and the source lamp currently selected  
lights in red.  
From the remote control ONLY:  
NOTES  
Press SOUND, then press A.POSITION repeatedly.  
• When TV Direct is activated, you cannot enjoy any of the sound  
effects the receiver produces, and cannot use the speakers  
connected to the receiver.  
• When TV Direct is activated while “DVD MULTI,FM,or “AM” is  
selected as the source, the source changes to the last selected  
source—“DVR/DVD,VCR,or “DBS.”  
• Each time you press A.POSITION, the subwoofer audio position  
level changes as follows:  
AUDIO P. indicator  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
–2  
–4  
–6  
OFF (canceled)  
The smaller the number becomes, the more the level decreases  
automatically when listening in stereo.  
• If no adjustment is required, select “OFF” (initial setting).  
NOTES  
• The minimum subwoofer output level is –10 dB.  
Ex.: When setting the subwoofer output level to “–8 (dB)” and  
the subwoofer audio position to “–4 (dB),the subwoofer  
output level when listening in stereo will be –10 dB.  
To adjust the subwoofer output level, see page 29.  
• This function is not available when the Surround/DSP mode is  
activated or “DVD MULTI” is selected.  
• After pressing SOUND, the numeric buttons work for sound  
adjustments. To use the numeric buttons to operate your target  
source, press the corresponding source selecting button before  
operation; otherwise, the remote control may not work as you  
intend.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To cancel the Sleep Timer:  
Press SLEEP repeatedly so that “SLEEP OFF” appears on the  
display. (The SLEEP indicator goes off.)  
• The Sleep Timer is also canceled when:  
You turn off the receiver, or  
Turning off the sounds temporarily  
From the remote control ONLY:  
– TV Direct is activated.  
Press MUTING to turn off the sound through all  
connected speakers and headphones.  
“MUTING” appears on the display and the volume turns off.  
Basic adjustment of auto memory  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
This receiver memorizes sound settings for each source:  
• when you turn off the power, and  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
• when you change the source.  
To restore the sound, press MUTING again.  
When you change the source, the memorized settings for the  
newly selected source are automatically recalled.  
The following can be stored for each source:  
• Analog/digital input mode (see page 12)  
• Subwoofer audio position (see page 14)  
• Midnight mode (see page 24)  
• Speaker output level (see page 29)  
• Digital equalization pattern (see page 30)  
• Bass boost (see page 30)  
• Pressing VOLUME +/– (or turning MASTER VOLUME control  
on the front panel) also restores the sound.  
Changing the display brightness  
You can dim the display—Dimmer.  
• Subwoofer phase (see page 30)  
• Input attenuator mode (see page 30)  
• Surround/DSP mode selection (see page 39)  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Press DIMMER repeatedly.  
• Each time you press the button, the display brightness changes  
as follows:  
NOTE  
If the source is “FM” or “AM,” you can assign a different setting  
for each band.  
DIMMER 1:  
Dims the display slightly.  
Dims the blue illumination slightly.  
Dims the display more than DIMMER 1.  
Dims the blue illumination slightly (more than  
DIMMER 1).  
DIMMER 2:  
Signal and speaker indicators on the display  
Signal indicators  
Speaker indicators  
DIMMER 3:  
Turns off the display and blue illumination.  
(Temporarily canceled when you operate the  
receiver.*)  
L
C
R
L
C
R
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P.  
DIMMER OFF: Cancels the Dimmer (normal display).  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO :
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
x
S.WFRLFE  
OLBY D  
DTS
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
* Except when activating or deactivating TV Direct.  
LS SB RS  
The signal indicators light up as follows:  
Turning off the power with the Sleep  
Timer  
L:  
When digital input is selected: Lights up when the  
left channel signal comes in.  
When analog input is selected: Always lights up.  
When digital input is selected: Lights up when the  
right channel signal comes in.  
When analog input is selected: Always lights up.  
Lights up when the center channel signal comes in.  
You can fall asleep while listening to music—Sleep Timer.  
R:  
C:  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Press SLEEP repeatedly.  
• Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes in 10  
minute intervals. The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display.  
LS*: Lights up when the left surround channel signal comes  
in.  
RS*: Lights up when the right surround channel signal comes  
SLEEP indicator  
in.  
SB: Lights up when the surround back channel signal  
comes in.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
LFE: Lights up when the LFE channel signal comes in.  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
* When monaural surround signal comes in, only “S” lights up.  
10  
20  
30  
40  
90  
50  
80  
60  
NOTE  
When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, all the signal  
indicators except “SB” light up.  
OFF (canceled)  
70  
When the shut-off time comes:  
The receiver turns off automatically.  
The speaker indicators light up as follows:  
S . WFR  
• The subwoofer indicator (  
) lights up when  
“SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER:YES.” For details,  
see page 21.  
• The other speaker indicators light up only when the  
corresponding speaker is set to “SMALLor “LARGE,and  
also when required for the current playback.  
To check or change the remaining time until the shut-off  
time:  
Press SLEEP once.  
The remaining time (in minutes) until the shut-off time appears.  
To change the shut-off time, press SLEEP repeatedly.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Basic settings  
When operating the receiver using the remote control,  
set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
To obtain the best possible sound effect from Surround/DSP  
modes (see pages 34 to 39), you need to set up the speaker and  
subwoofer information after all the connections are completed.  
From pages 16 to 25, how to set speakers and other basic items  
of the receiver are explained.  
1
Take your position where you listen to the  
sound.  
• Make sure speaker cables are connected firmly.  
Setting the speaker information  
automatically—Smart Surround Setup  
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of  
the important elements to obtain the best possible sound effect  
from the Surround/DSP modes.  
By using Smart Surround Setup, the following are automatically  
calculated by one simple action—clapping hands.  
• Speaker distance (compared to that of the closest speaker)  
• Speaker output level (except the subwoofer)  
NOTES  
2 Press and hold SMART SURROUND SETUP  
• Before starting Smart Surround Setup, set the speaker  
information correctly (SMALL, LARGE, or NO) according to your  
speakers except the subwoofer (see page 21).  
• The speakers which are set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see  
page 21) are not indicated clearly on the TV screen.  
• When the setting is made by Smart Surround Setup, the  
speaker distance and output level you have set before will be  
inactive.  
until “SETTING UP” flashes.  
*1  
*2  
*3  
SMART SURROUND SETUP  
L
C
R
You can see the setting process on the TV screen and the  
display during Smart Surround Setup. If you have turned off the  
display, cancel the Dimmer (see page 15); otherwise, you  
cannot see the information on the display.  
SETTING UP  
SB  
LS  
RS  
*6  
*4  
• Smart Surround Setup will not be done correctly if you or other  
object blocks the sound.  
• When you change your speakers, do the following procedure  
again.  
*5  
*1  
*2  
*3  
*4  
*5  
*6  
L: Left front speaker  
C: Center speaker  
R: Right front speaker  
RS: Right surround speaker  
SB: Surround back speaker  
LS: Left surround speaker  
In this section, the on-screen display on the TV screen is used  
for explaining.  
• The on-screen display does not appear on the TV screen  
when connecting the TV through the COMPONENT  
MONITOR OUT jacks (see page 10).  
3 When “CLAPYOUR HANDS.appears, clap  
your hands over your head once while the  
indications still remain.  
• On the display, SETTING UP” stops flashing.  
The receiver starts detecting the level of the sound coming  
through each speaker (except the subwoofer).  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When your clapping sound is detected successfully,  
When your clapping sound is not detected correctly,  
• On the TV screen, “SUCCESSFUL,RESULT,” and the setting  
“SETTING UP” appears again after one of the following  
values appear. The setting values are shown for about 12  
messages. In this case, repeat step 3.  
seconds.  
Ex.:  
SILENT:  
• The receiver detects sound from only the left  
and right front speakers.  
• The receiver detects no sound from the front  
speakers and detects sound from at least one of  
other speakers.  
*7  
SMART SURROUND SETUP  
L+2  
C 0 R+2  
STD+0.3m  
SILENT-ALL: The receiver cannot detect any sound from any  
+0.3m  
speaker for about 10 seconds.  
AGAIN:  
• The receiver cannot detect sound from the left  
or right front speaker.  
• The receiver fails to calculate the speakers'  
output level and difference of each speaker's  
position in distance.  
LS+6 SUCCESSFUL RS+6  
+1.2m  
RESULT  
+1.2m  
*8  
*9  
SB+4  
+0.6m  
In the following cases, set the speakers manually.  
• On the display, SUCCESSFULappears, then the setting  
values are shown as follows for about 12 seconds:  
Ex.:  
• When “SILENT” appears twice in succession.  
The setting is partially made. (The distance of the speakers  
from which sound has not been detected is set to “+9.0m  
(+30ft).)  
*7  
The receiver exits from Smart Surround Setup.  
• When “MANUALappears.  
The receiver fails to detect the sound three times. The receiver  
exits from Smart Surround Setup.  
*8  
*9  
To cancel Smart Surround Setup, press SMART SURROUND  
SETUP while “SETTING UP” flashes.  
• No other operations can be accepted after “SETTING UP” stops  
flashing. Complete the Smart Surround Setup.  
R
LS  
L
RS  
C
SB  
To check the current setting made by Smart Surround Setup,  
press SMART SURROUND SETUP while the receiver is in  
normal operation mode.  
*7  
Standard channel (the closest speaker).  
This speaker position now works as the reference  
position (“0m/ft”) and other speakers’ distance is  
shown by the difference with this reference speaker  
position.  
The setting values appear. On the display, the setting values are  
shown one after another.  
• The current setting is not indicated but “MANUALappears if you  
change the following settings after using Smart Surround Setup:  
– If you change speaker distance manually.  
*8  
*9  
Difference of each speaker position in distance (in  
meters or feet).  
Each speaker’s output level (–6 to +6).  
– If you change one of the speaker sizes either from “NO” to  
“SMALLor “LARGE,or from “SMALLor “LARGE” to “NO.”  
To check the current setting, see each setting item of the  
speaker distance (see page 22) and the speaker output level  
(see page 29).  
When finishing to show the setting values,  
• If you have not used Smart Surround Setup, “NO S.S.S.”  
appears.  
On the TV screen, “COMPLETED” appears, then “TEST TONE”  
and “END” appear. On the display, TEST? END?” appears.  
To adjust the speakers’ output levels manually, press TEST  
TONE (see page 29).  
To disappear the on-screen display, press SET or any button  
except TEST TONE.  
• The receiver returns to normal operation mode automatically if  
no operations are done for about 10 seconds.  
Ex.:  
NOTES  
• The speaker distance and output level manually set will be  
applied instead of those set by using Smart Surround Setup in  
the following cases:  
– When you change one of the speaker distance (see page 22).  
– When you change one of the speaker size either from “NO” to  
“SMALLor “LARGE,or from “SMALLor “LARGE” to “NO”  
(see page 21).  
• When you want to adjust the speaker distance and output level  
manually, see pages 22 and 29.  
• When the headphone is in use or “DVD MULTI” is selected as  
the source, the receiver returns to normal operation mode  
without showing “TEST TONE.”  
SMART SURROUND SETUP  
L+2  
+0.3m  
C 0 R+2  
STD+0.3m  
LS+6  
+1.2m  
TEST TONE RS+6  
END  
+1.2m  
SB+4  
+0.9m  
• Do not clap your hands so hard that it may hurt your hands.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic setting items  
You can adjust the following items. See pages in parentheses for details.  
You cannot select the items which is not available with the current setting.  
• The name of the item shown below is the on-screen display indication and the name in parentheses is the display indication.  
Items and to do  
SUBWOOFER (SUBWOOFER)  
DUAL MONO (DUAL MONO)  
Register your subwoofer. (21)  
Select the Dual Mono sound channel. (23)  
FRONT SPK (FRONT SPK)  
SUBWFR OUT (SUBWFR OUT)  
Register your front speaker size. (21)  
Select sounds emitted from the subwoofer. (23)  
CENTER SPK (CENTER SPK)  
CROSSOVER (CROSSOVER)  
Register your center speaker size. (21)  
Select the cutoff frequency to the subwoofer. (23)  
SURR. SPK (SURRND SPK)  
LFE ATT (LFE ATT)  
Register your surround speaker size. (21)  
Attenuate the bass (LFE) sounds. (23)  
SURR. BACK SPK (S BACK SPK)  
MIDNIGHT (MIDNIGHT)  
Register your surround back speaker size. (21)  
Reproduce a powerful sound at night. (24)  
DISTANCE UNIT (DIST UNIT)  
DIGITAL IN 1 (DIGITAL IN1)  
Select the measuring unit for the speaker distance. (22)  
Select the component connected to the digital coaxial  
terminal—1(DVR/DVD). (24)  
FL SPK DISTANCE (FRNT L DIST)*  
Register the distance from the left front speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
DIGITAL IN 2 (DIGITAL IN2)  
Select the component connected to the digital optical  
terminal—2(VIDEO). (24)  
FR SPK DISTANCE (FRNT R DIST)*  
Register the distance from the right front speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
DIGITAL IN 3 (DIGITAL IN3)  
Select the component connected to the digital optical  
terminal—3(TV). (24)  
C SPK DISTANCE (CENTER DIST)*  
Register the distance from the center speaker to your listening DVD VIDEO (DVD VIDEO)  
point. (22)  
Select the type of video terminal used for the DVD recorder or  
DVD player. (25)  
LS SPK DISTANCE (SURR L DIST)*  
Register the distance from the left surround speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
VCR VIDEO (VCR VIDEO)  
Select the type of video terminal used for the VCR. (25)  
RS SPK DISTANCE (SURR R DIST)*  
Register the distance from the right surround speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
SUPERIMPOSE (SUPERIMPOSE)  
Select to superimpose the menus on the TV screen. (25)  
DOWN MIX (DOWN MIX)  
SB SPK DISTANCE (S BACK DIST)*  
Register the distance from the surround back speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
Select to convert S-video signals into composite video signals.  
(25)  
Y/C SEPARATE (Y/C SEP.)  
EX/ES/PLIIx (EX/ES/PLIIx)  
Select to convert composite video signals into S-video signals.  
(25)  
Select the EX/ES/PLIIx reproduction mode. (22)  
* If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17, these settings are not required.  
Operation through on-screen display menus  
You can make adjustments to the basic settings easily by using the on-screen display menus.  
Menu operation buttons  
From the remote control:  
On the front panel:  
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control,  
set the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Button / JOG  
To do  
SETTING button show setting item previously selected.  
SET button  
move to the selected menu or return to the  
previous SETTING MENU.  
Button  
To do  
MULTI JOG  
• select a menu or an item.  
• change a setting.  
MENU button show “TOP MENU.”  
5 / buttons select a menu or an item.  
SET button  
move to the selected menu or return to the  
previous SETTING MENU.  
2 / 3 buttons change a setting.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menu configuration  
• Items on the menus shown below are all set to the initial values when shipping from the factory.  
• Some of the menus or some items on the menu cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted depending on the current settings and the  
connections. (For details, see the respective explanations in this section.)  
TOP MENU  
SETTING MENU (5)  
SETTING MENU (1)  
TOP MENU  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
SETTING MENU (1)  
SUBWOOFER  
5
SUBWOOFER  
FRONT SPK  
CENTER SPK  
SURR. SPK  
:
NO  
: LARGE  
: SMALL  
: SMALL  
FRONT SPEAKER  
SURR. BACK SPK : SMALL  
CENTER SPEAKER  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
SURROUND SPEAKER  
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
SETTING MENU (2)  
SETTING MENU (2)  
DISTANCE UNIT  
5
DISTANCE UNIT  
:meter  
FL SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
FR SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
C SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
LS SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
RS SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
SB SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
FL SPK DISTANCE  
FR SPK DISTANCE  
CENTER SPK DISTANCE  
LS SPK DISTANCE  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
RS SPK DISTANCE  
SB SPK DISTANCE  
SETTING MENU (3)  
SETTING MENU (3)  
5
EX/ES/PL x  
DUAL MONO  
EX/ES/PL x :  
DUAL MONO :  
SUBWFR OUT :  
CROSSOVER :  
AUTO  
MAIN  
150Hz  
0dB  
LFE ATT  
MIDNIGHT  
:
:
SUBWOOFER OUT  
CROSSOVER  
OFF  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
LFE ATT  
MIDNIGHT MODE  
SETTING MENU (4)  
SETTING MENU (4)  
DIGITAL IN 1  
DIGITAL IN 2  
DIGITAL IN 3  
DVD VIDEO INPUT  
VCR VIDEO INPUT  
5
DIGITAL IN 1: DVR/DVD  
DIGITAL IN 2:  
DIGITAL IN 3:  
DBS  
VCR  
S/C  
S/C  
DVD VIDEO  
VCR VIDEO  
:
:
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
SETTING MENU (5)  
SETTING MENU (5)  
SUPERIMPOSE  
DOWN MIX  
5
SUPERIMPOSE :  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
DOWN MIX  
:
Y/C SEPARATE:  
Y/C SEPARATE  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
SETTING MENU (1)  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu operating procedure  
When operating, the on-screen display appears on the TV screen regardless of the SUPERIMPOSE setting (see page 25).  
Before you start, remember...  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.  
In this section, the operation of the remote control is used for explaining.  
Ex.:When setting DIGITAL IN 1 terminal.  
Operations  
On the TV screen  
On the display  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
1 To show “TOP MENU,press MENU.  
x
ATT  
TOP MENU  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
“SETTING” appears.  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
“TOP MENU” appears.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
2 To select “SETTING MENU,press SET.  
x
ATT  
SETTING MENU (1)  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
5
SUBWOOFER  
FRONT SPK  
CENTER SPK  
SURR. SPK  
:
NO  
: LARGE  
: SMALL  
: SMALL  
The submenu previously  
selected appears.  
SURR. BACK SPK : SMALL  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
The setting item previously selected  
appears.  
3 To select the desired submenu, press  
5 or repeatedly.  
There are five screens from “SETTING MENU (1)”  
to “SETTING MENU (5).” To change the screen,  
simply pressing 5 or repeatedly.You can go to  
the next/previous screen.  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.  
Button indications on the screen  
The buttons for operating the menu are shown on the TV screen.You can operate the menu with these buttons.  
TOP MENU  
DIGITAL IN 1  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
23:OPERATE  
:BACK  
Usable buttons and their functions  
Usable buttons and their functions  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
x
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
4 Press SET.  
DIGITAL IN 1  
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3  
The current setting of the  
selected item appears.  
23:OPERATE  
:BACK  
The selected submenu appears.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
5 To select the appropriate setting, press  
2 or 3 repeatedly, then press SET.  
x
ATT  
DIGITAL IN 1  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3  
The on-screen display returns to the previous  
SETTING MENU. In this example, “SETTING MENU  
(4)” appears on the TV screen and “DIGITAL IN1”  
appears on the display.  
DVR/DVD  
TV  
DBS  
VCR  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG, then press  
SET.  
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set other items  
if necessary.  
NOTES  
To return to “TOP MENU,” press MENU on the remote control.  
To exit from menu operations, press MENU on the remote control when “TOP MENU” appears. On the front panel, press SETTING  
when a menu except “TOP MENU” appears.  
• The setting item previously selected can be shown on the TV screen by pressing SETTING on the front panel when the receiver is in  
normal operation mode.  
Setting the items  
When performing the basic settings viewing the indications on the display, the indications are slightly different from what is shown  
on the on-screen display.  
This is because of the limited number of characters shown on the display.  
Ex.: • “SUBWOOFER:YES” is shown as “SUBWFR:YES” on the display.  
• “MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF” is shown as “NIGHT: OFF” on the display.  
7 Setting the speaker size—FRONT SPEAKER,  
CENTER SPEAKER, SURROUND SPEAKER,  
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER  
Setting the speakers  
7 Setting subwoofer information—SUBWOOFER  
Each time the receiver turns on, the receiver detects the  
subwoofer connection and automatically changes the setting of  
the subwoofer.  
When you want to change the setting manually, select either one  
below.  
Register the sizes of all the connected speakers.  
LARGE  
SMALL  
NO  
Select when the cone speaker size is larger than  
12 cm.  
Select when the cone speaker size is smaller than  
12 cm.  
SUBWOOFER:YES  
Select when you have connected a subwoofer.  
Select when you have disconnected a speaker.  
(Not selectable for the front speakers.)  
S . WFR  
The subwoofer indicator (  
) lights up on the display.You  
can adjust the subwoofer output level (see page 29).  
SUBWOOFER: NO  
Initial setting: SMALL for all speakers*  
Select when you have disconnected a subwoofer. Selecting  
this changes the front speaker size to “LARGE” (see right  
column).  
* When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER: NO,the front  
speaker size is fixed to “LARGE” (and you cannot select  
“SMALL).  
NOTES  
NOTE  
• If you have selected “SMALLfor the front speaker size, you  
cannot select “LARGE” for other speakers.  
You need to change the setting each time you turn on the receiver  
if you want to change the subwoofer information set automatically.  
• When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:  
SMALL,” you cannot select “LARGE” for the surround back  
speaker.  
• When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:  
NO,” the surround back speaker is fixed to “NO.”  
• If you change one of the speaker sizes either from “NO” to  
“SMALLor “LARGE,or from “SMALLor “LARGE” to “NO,the  
distance manually set will be applied instead of those set by  
using Smart Surround Setup.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Setting the speaker distance  
Activating the EX/ES/PLIIx setting  
—EX/ES/PLIIx  
Depending on this setting, available Surround modes for digital  
multi-channel software vary—EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel)  
reproduction or 5.1-channel reproduction. Select an appropriate  
setting for your enjoyment.  
• For details about relation between EX/ES/PLIIx setting and  
available Surround mode, see page 38.  
To activate the Surround mode, see page 39.  
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of  
the important elements to obtain the best possible sound effect  
from the Surround/DSP modes.  
By referring to the speaker distance, the receiver automatically  
sets the delay time of the sound through each speaker so that  
sounds through all the speakers can reach you at the same time.  
• If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17,  
this setting is not required.  
7 Measuring unit—DISTANCE UNIT  
Select which measuring unit you use.  
EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO  
According to the incoming signal, an appropriate Surround  
mode is applied.  
DISTANCE UNIT: meter Select to set the distance in meters.  
DISTANCE UNIT: feet  
Select to set the distance in feet.  
• For Dolby Digital Surround EX and DTS-ES software, 6.1-  
channel reproduction is applied*.  
• For other multi-channel (more than 4 channel) encoded  
software, 5.1-channel reproduction is applied.  
Initial setting: DISTANCE UNIT: meter  
7 Speaker distance—  
EX/ES/PLIIx: ON  
FL SPK DISTANCE (for the left front speaker),  
FR SPK DISTANCE (for the right front speaker),  
CENTER SPK DISTANCE (for the center speaker),  
LS SPK DISTANCE (for the left surround speaker),  
RS SPK DISTANCE (for the right surround speaker),  
SB SPK DISTANCE (for the surround back speaker)  
Select to apply 6.1-channel reproduction to both 5.1-channel  
and 6.1-channel encoded software.  
EX/ES/PLIIx: PLIIx MOVIE  
Select to apply “PLIIx MOVIE” (6.1-channel) reproduction to  
both 5.1-channel and 6.1-channel encoded software.  
Adjustable range: 0.3 m to 9.0 m in 0.3 m intervals  
EX/ES/PLIIx: PLIIx MUSIC  
(1 ft to 30 ft in 1 ft intervals)  
Select to apply “PLIIx MUSIC” (6.1-channel) reproduction to  
both 5.1-channel and 6.1-channel encoded software.  
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10 ft) for all speakers  
EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF  
Select to cancel the EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel) reproduction.  
C
R
L
Initial setting: EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO  
3.3 m  
(11 ft)  
3.0 m  
(10 ft)  
2.7 m  
(9 ft)  
* For some Dolby Digital Surround EX software, Dolby Digital 5.1-  
channel reproduction (“DOLBY D”) may be applied even though  
you have selected “EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO.In this case, select  
“EX/ES/PLIIx: ON” to apply “DOLBY D EX.”  
2.4 m  
(8 ft)  
From the remote control  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
2.1 m  
(7 ft)  
LS  
RS  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Press EX/ES repeatedly to select an  
appropriate setting for your  
enjoyment.  
SB  
In this case, set the distance as follows:  
Left front speaker (L):  
Right front speaker (R):  
Center speaker (C):  
“FRONT L: 3.0m (10ft)”  
“FRONT R: 3.0m (10ft)”  
“CENTER: 3.0m (10ft)”  
Left surround speaker (LS): “SURROUND L: 2.7m (9ft)”  
Right surround speaker (RS): “SURROUND R: 2.7m (9ft)”  
Surround back speaker (SB): “SURROUND BACK: 2.4m (8ft)”  
NOTES  
• This function is not available in the following cases:  
– When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:  
NO” (see page 21).  
– When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source.  
• When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK  
SPK: NO” (see page 21), the Virtual Surround Back (see page  
38) is applied to EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel) reproduction.  
NOTES  
You cannot set the speaker distance for the speakers you have  
set to “NO.”  
• If you change one of these settings manually, the distance  
manually set will be applied instead of those set by using Smart  
Surround Setup.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the main or sub channel  
—DUAL MONO  
You can select the playback sound (channel) you want while  
playing digital software recorded (or broadcasted) in Dual Mono  
mode (see page 36), which includes two monaural channels  
separately.  
Setting bass sound  
7 Setting subwoofer output—SUBWOOFER OUT  
You can select the type of the signal which can be transmitted  
through the subwoofer. In other words, you can determine  
whether or not the bass elements of the front speaker channels  
are transmitted through the subwoofer regardless of the front  
speaker size setting (either “SMALLor “LARGE”).  
DUAL MONO: MAIN  
Select to play back the main channel (Ch 1).*  
Signal indicator “Llights up while playing back this channel.  
SUBWFR OUT: LFE  
Select to emit only the LFE signals (while playing Dolby  
Digital and DTS software) or the bass elements of the  
“SMALLfront speakers (while playing any source other than  
above).  
DUAL MONO: SUB  
Select to play back the sub-channel (Ch 2).*  
Signal indicator “R” lights up while playing back this channel.  
SUBWFR OUT: LFE+MAIN  
DUAL MONO: ALL  
Select to always emit the bass elements of the front speaker  
channels (MAIN). While playing Dolby Digital and DTS  
software, the bass elements and the LFE signals are both  
emitted.  
Select to play back both the main and sub-channels (Ch 1/Ch 2).*  
Signal indicators “Land “R” light up while playing back these  
channels.  
Initial setting: DUAL MONO: MAIN  
Initial setting: SUBWFR OUT: LFE  
* Dual Mono signals can be heard from the following speakers—L  
(left front speaker), R (right front speaker), and C (center  
speaker), with respect to the current Surround setting:  
NOTE  
When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER: NO” (see page  
21), this function is not available.  
With Surround Activated  
Without  
Surround  
Center speaker setting  
Dual Mono  
setting  
SMALL/LARGE  
NO  
7 Setting the crossover frequency—CROSSOVER  
L
R
L
C
Ch 1  
R
L
R
Small speakers cannot reproduce the bass sounds efficiently. If  
you use a small speaker in any position, this receiver  
automatically reallocates the bass sound elements assigned to  
the small speaker to the large speakers.  
MAIN  
SUB  
ALL  
Ch 1 Ch 1  
Ch 2 Ch 2  
Ch 1 Ch 2  
Ch 1  
Ch 2  
Ch1  
Ch 2  
Ch 2  
Ch 1+Ch 2  
Ch 1+Ch 2 Ch 1+Ch 2  
To use this function properly, set this crossover frequency level  
according to the size of the small speaker connected.  
• If you have selected “LARGE” for all speakers (see page 21),  
this function will not take effect (“CROSSOVER: OFF” appears).  
NOTE  
The Dual Mono format is not identical with bilingual broadcasting  
for TV programs. So this setting does not take effect while  
watching such bilingual programs.  
CROSSOVER: 80Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is about 12 cm.  
CROSSOVER: 100Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is about 10 cm.  
CROSSOVER: 120Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is about 8 cm.  
CROSSOVER: 150Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is about 6 cm.  
CROSSOVER: 200Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is less than 5 cm.  
Initial setting: CROSSOVER: 150Hz  
NOTE  
Crossover frequency is not valid for the HEADPHONE and 3D  
HEADPHONE modes.  
7 Setting the low frequency effect attenuator  
—LFE ATT  
If the bass sound is distorted while playing back software  
encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, set the LFE level to eliminate  
distortion.  
• This function takes effect only when the LFE signals come in.  
LFE ATT: 0dB  
Normally select this.  
LFE ATT: –10dB Select when the bass sound is distorted.  
Initial setting: LFE ATT: 0dB  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Midnight mode  
—MIDNIGHT MODE  
You can enjoy a powerful sound at night using the Midnight mode.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN)  
terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3  
When you use the digital input terminals, register what  
components are connected to which terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3  
(see page 11) so that the correct source name will appear when  
you select the digital source.  
Select one of the following components for each terminal:  
MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF  
Select when you want to enjoy surround with its full dynamic  
range. (No effect applied.)  
DVR/DVD For the DVD player (or DVD recorder).  
MIDNIGHT MODE: 1  
DBS  
VCR  
TV  
For the DBS tuner.  
For the VCR.  
For the TV.  
Select when you want to reduce the dynamic range a little.  
MIDNIGHT MODE: 2  
Select when you want to apply the compression effect fully  
(useful at night).  
Initial setting: DVR/DVD (for “DIGITAL IN 1”)  
DBS (for “DIGITAL IN 2”)  
Initial setting: MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF  
VCR (for “DIGITAL IN 3”)  
From the remote control  
NOTES  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
You cannot assign the same component for different terminals.  
The priority order for assignment is as follows:  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
“DIGITAL IN 1” > “DIGITAL IN 2” > “DIGITAL IN 3.”  
“DIGITAL IN 1” can be set to any component.  
Press SOUND, then press MIDNIGHT  
repeatedly to select either one of the  
above.  
Ex.: When “DIGITAL IN 1” is set to “TV.”  
DIGITAL IN 1:  
TV  
NOTE  
“DVR/DVD,” “DBS,” and “VCR” are selectable for “DIGITAL  
IN 2.”  
And when “DIGITAL IN 2” is set to “DVR/DVD.”  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
DIGITAL IN 1:  
DIGITAL IN 2:  
TV  
DVR/DVD  
“DBS” and “VCR” are selectable for “DIGITAL IN 3.”  
• Setting “DIGITAL IN 1” affects “DIGITAL IN 2” and “DIGITAL IN  
3” settings. When you have changed “DIGITAL IN 1,confirm the  
components assigned to “DIGITAL IN 2” and “DIGITAL IN 3.”  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the component video input  
mode—DVD VIDEO INPUT/VCR VIDEO  
INPUT  
When you use the component video inputs for connecting the  
DVD recorder (or DVD player) or VCR, register the type of video  
input jacks.  
Converting S-video signals into composite  
video signals—DOWN MIX  
You can select whether or not to convert S-video signals into  
composite video signals.  
DOWN MIX: ON Select to convert S-video signals into  
composite video signals.  
If you have not selected appropriate video input jacks, you cannot  
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK  
remote control system cannot operate properly (see page 40).  
DOWN MIX: OFF Select not to use this function.  
Initial setting: DOWN MIX: OFF  
For the DVD recorder or DVD player (DVD VIDEO):  
NOTES  
DVD VIDEO: S/C  
• This function is available when satisfying all the following  
requirements:  
Select when connecting the DVD recorder (or DVD player) to  
the composite video or S-video input jacks.  
– When a video component is connected to this receiver  
through at least one of the S-video input terminals.  
– When a video component or the TV is connected to this  
receiver through at least one of the composite video output  
jacks.  
DVD VIDEO: COMPONENT  
Select when connecting the DVD recorder (or DVD player) to  
the component video input jacks.  
– Either the DVD VIDEO INPUT or VCR VIDEO INPUT is set to  
“S/C” (see left column).  
Initial setting: DVD VIDEO: S/C  
• When using this function, set the input mode of the TV correctly.  
(Refer also to the manual supplied with the TV.)  
For the VCR (VCR VIDEO):  
VCR VIDEO: S/C  
Select when connecting the VCR to the composite video or S- Converting composite video signals into S-  
video input jacks.  
video signals—Y/C SEPARATE  
VCR VIDEO: COMPONENT  
You can select whether or not to convert composite video signals  
Select when connecting the VCR to the component video  
come from a video component into S-video signals.  
input jacks.  
Y/C SEPARATE: ON  
Select to convert composite video signals  
into S-video signals.  
Initial setting: VCR VIDEO: S/C  
Y/C SEPARATE: OFF Select not to use this function.  
Superimposing the menus  
—SUPERIMPOSE  
You can select whether or not to superimpose the on-screen  
display on the TV screen.  
Initial setting: Y/C SEPARATE: OFF  
NOTES  
• This function is available when satisfying all the following  
requirements:  
SUPERIMPOSE: ON  
– When a video component is connected to this receiver  
through at least one of the composite video input jacks.  
– When a video component or the TV is connected to this  
receiver through at least one of the S-video output terminals.  
– Either the DVD VIDEO INPUT or VCR VIDEO INPUT is set to  
“S/C” (see left column).  
Select to superimpose the on-screen display on the TV  
screen.  
SUPERIMPOSE: OFF  
Select to cancel superimposition. The on-screen display will  
be shown on the blue background screen.  
• When using this function, set the input mode of the TV correctly.  
(Refer also to the manual supplied with the TV.)  
Initial setting: SUPERIMPOSE: ON  
NOTES  
• Some on-screen displays appear on the TV screen regardless  
of this setting.  
• The on-screen display does not appear on the TV screen when  
connecting the TV through the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT  
jacks (see page 10).  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sound adjustments  
You can make sound adjustment to your preference after  
completing basic setting.  
Basic adjustment items  
You can adjust the following items. See pages in parentheses for details.  
You cannot select the items which is not available with the current setting.  
• The name of the item shown below is the on-screen display indication and the name in parentheses is the display indication.  
Items and to do  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL (SUBWFR LVL)  
BASS BOOST (BASS BOOST)  
Adjust the subwoofer output level. (29)  
Boost the bass level. (30)  
FRONT L LEVEL (FRONT L LVL)  
SUBWFR PHASE (SBWFR PHASE)  
Adjust the left front speaker output level. (29)  
Select the subwoofer sound phase. (30)  
FRONT R LEVEL (FRONT R LVL)  
INPUT ATT (INPUT ATT)  
Adjust the right front speaker output level. (29)  
Attenuate the input level of analog source. (30)  
CENTER LEVEL (CENTER LVL)  
EFFECT (EFFECT)  
Adjust the center speaker output level. (29)  
Adjust the effect level. (31)  
SURR. L LEVEL (SURR L LVL)  
PANORAMA (PANORAMA)  
Adjust the left surround speaker output level. (29)  
Add wraparound sound effect with side-wall image. (31)  
SURR. R LEVEL (SURR R LVL)  
CENTER GAIN (CENTER GAIN)  
Adjust the right surround speaker output level. (29)  
Adjust the sound localization of the center channel. (31)  
SURR. BACK LEVEL (S BACK LVL)  
CENTER TONE (CENTER TONE)  
Adjust the surround back speaker output level. (29)  
Make the center tone soft or sharp. (31)  
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz (D EQ 63Hz)*  
CNTR ALIGNMENT (CNTR ALIGN)  
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz (D EQ 250Hz)*  
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz (D EQ 1kHz)*  
Align the vertical localization of the center channel. (31)  
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz (D EQ 4kHz)*  
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz (D EQ 16kHz)*  
Adjust the equalization pattern of each band. (30)  
* If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17, these settings are not required.  
Operation through on-screen display menus  
You can make adjustments to the basic settings easily by using the on-screen display menus.  
Menu operation buttons  
On the front panel:  
From the remote control:  
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control,  
set the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Button / JOG  
To do  
ADJUST button show adjustment item previously selected.  
SET button  
move to the selected menu or return to the  
previous ADJUST MENU.  
Button  
To do  
MULTI JOG  
• select a menu or an item.  
• change a setting.  
MENU button show “TOP MENU.”  
5 / buttons select a menu or an item.  
SET button  
move to the selected menu or return to the  
previous ADJUST MENU.  
2 / 3 buttons change a setting.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menu configuration  
• Items on the menus shown below are all set to the initial values when shipping from the factory.  
• Some of the menus or some items on the menu cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted depending on the current settings and the  
connections. (For details, see the respective explanations in this section.)  
• The “ADJUST MENU (3)” screen cannot be shown depending on the current settings and the connections.  
ADJUST MENU (3)  
TOP MENU  
TOP MENU  
ADJUST MENU (1)  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
ADJUST MENU (1)  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL  
FRONT L LEVEL  
5
SUBWOOFER LEVEL :  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FRONT L LEVEL  
FRONT R LEVEL  
CENTER LEVEL  
SURR. L LEVEL  
SURR. R LEVEL  
:
:
:
:
:
FRONT R LEVEL  
CENTER LEVEL  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
SURR. BACK LEVEL :  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
SURROUND L LEVEL  
SURROUND R LEVEL  
SURROUND BACK LEVEL  
ADJUST MENU (2)  
ADJUST MENU (2)  
5
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz  
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz  
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz  
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz  
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz  
BASS BOOST  
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz :  
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz :  
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz :  
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz :  
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz :  
0
0
0
0
0
BASS BOOST  
: OFF  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
ADJUST MENU (3)  
ADJUST MENU (3)  
SUBWOOFER PHASE  
INPUT ATT  
EFFECT  
5
SUBWFR PHASE : NORMAL  
INPUT ATT  
EFFECT  
: NORMAL  
:
:
:
:
3
OFF  
0.3  
3
PANORAMA  
CENTER GAIN  
CENTER TONE  
CNTR ALIGNMENT:  
OFF  
PANORAMA  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
CENTER GAIN  
CENTER TONE  
CENTER ALIGNMENT  
ADJUST MENU (1)  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu operating procedure  
When operating, the on-screen display appears on the TV screen regardless of the SUPERIMPOSE setting (see page 25).  
Before you start, remember...  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.  
In this section, the operation of the remote control is used for explaining.  
Ex.:When adjusting subwoofer output level.  
Operations  
On the TV screen  
On the display  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
1 To show “TOP MENU,press MENU.  
Then press 5 or to select “ADJUST  
MENU.”  
x
ATT  
TOP MENU  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
“SETTING” appears.  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
“TOP MENU” appears.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
2 To select “ADJUST MENU,press SET.  
x
ATT  
ADJUST MENU (1)  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
5
SUBWOOFER LEVEL :  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FRONT L LEVEL  
FRONT R LEVEL  
CENTER LEVEL  
SURR. L LEVEL  
SURR. R LEVEL  
:
:
:
:
:
The submenu previously  
selected appears.  
SURR. BACK LEVEL :  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
The adjustment item previously selected  
appears.  
3 To select the desired submenu, press  
5 or repeatedly.  
There are three screens from “ADJUST MENU (1)”  
to “ADJUST MENU (3).” To change the screen,  
simply pressing 5 or repeatedly.You can go to  
the next/previous screen.  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
4 Press SET.  
x
ATT  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
SUBWOOFER  
:2  
0
3
The current setting of the  
selected item appears.  
23:OPERATE  
:BACK  
The selected submenu appears.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
5 To adjust the selected item, press 2 or  
3 repeatedly, then press SET.  
x
ATT  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
SUBWOOFER  
:2  
0
3
The on-screen display returns to the previous  
ADJUST MENU. In this example, “ADJUST MENU  
(1)” appears on the TV screen and “SUBWFR LVL”  
appears on the display.  
–10  
0
+10  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG, then press  
SET.  
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set other items  
if necessary.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
From the remote control:  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
To return to “TOP MENU,press MENU on the remote control.  
To exit from menu operations, press MENU on the remote  
control when “TOP MENU” appears. On the front panel, press  
ADJUST when a menu except “TOP MENU” appears.  
• The adjustment item previously selected can be shown on the  
TV screen by pressing ADJUST on the front panel when the  
receiver is in normal operation mode.  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
2
1, 3  
Button indications on the screen  
The buttons for operating the menu are shown on the TV  
screen.You can operate the menu with these buttons.  
1
Press TEST TONE to check the speakers’ output  
balance.  
TOP MENU  
• On the TV screen, “TEST TONE” appears. The  
indicator corresponding to the speaker appears while a  
test tone comes out of the speakers.  
EX.:  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
TEST TONE  
SW+1 L+5 C 0 R-3  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
LS+5  
RS+5  
Usable buttons and their functions  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL  
SB+5  
SUBWOOFER  
:2  
0
3
• On the display, TEST Lstarts flashing, and a test tone  
comes out of the speakers in the following order:  
23:OPERATE  
:BACK  
Usable buttons and their functions  
C
R
L
SW  
LS  
Adjusting the items  
RS  
When performing the basic settings viewing the indications  
on the display, the indications are slightly different from what  
is shown on the on-screen display.  
This is because of the limited number of characters shown  
on the display.  
SB  
2
Adjust the speaker output levels.  
To adjust the left front speaker level (L), press  
FRONT L +/–.  
Ex.: • “SUBWOOFER: +10” is shown as “SUBWFR +10” on  
the display.  
To adjust the right front speaker level (R), press  
FRONT R +/–.  
• “BASS BOOST: ON” is shown as “B BOOST ON” on  
the display.  
To adjust the center speaker level (C), press  
CENTER +/–.  
To adjust the left surround speaker level (LS), press  
SURR L +/–.  
Adjusting speaker output level  
• SUBWOOFER LEVEL (subwoofer output level),  
• FRONT L LEVEL (left front speaker output level),  
• FRONT R LEVEL (right front speaker output level),  
• CENTER LEVEL (center speaker output level),  
• SURROUND L LEVEL (left surround speaker output level),  
• SURROUND R LEVEL (right surround speaker output level),  
• SURROUND BACK LEVEL (surround back speaker output  
level)  
To adjust the right surround speaker level (RS), press  
SURR R +/–.  
To adjust the surround back speaker level (SB), press  
S.BACK +/–.  
To adjust the subwoofer level (SW), press SUBWFR +/–.  
3
Press TEST TONE again to stop the test tone.  
You can adjust the speaker output levels.  
Adjust all the speakers’ output levels so that you can listen to the  
sounds from all the speakers at the same level.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
NOTES  
You can adjust the speaker output levels without the test tone.  
• No test tone comes out of the speakers and no speaker  
indication appears on the TV screen corresponding to the  
speaker which is set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see  
page 21).  
Adjustable range: –10 (dB) to +10 (dB) (in 1 step intervals)  
Initial setting: 0 (dB) for all speakers  
• No test tone is available when the headphone is in use or  
“DVD MULTI” is selected.  
NOTES  
• If you have selected “NO” for a speaker (see page 21), the  
output level for the corresponding speaker is not adjustable.  
• While using the headphones, you can adjust only the left and  
right front speakers’ output level.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the equalization patterns  
Adjusting the bass sounds  
—DIGITAL EQ 63Hz/250Hz/1kHz/4kHz/16kHz  
You can adjust equalization patterns in five frequency bands  
(center frequency: 63 Hz, 250 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 16 kHz) for the  
front speakers.  
7 Reinforcing the bass—BASS BOOST  
You can boost the bass level—Bass Boost.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
BASS BOOST: ON Select to boost the bass level.  
The BASS indicator lights up on the display.  
Adjustable range: –8 (dB) to +8 (dB) (in 2 dB intervals)  
Initial setting: 0 (dB) for all bands  
BASS BOOST: OFF Select to deactivate the Bass Boost.  
• When adjustment is made, the EQ indicator lights up on the  
display.  
Initial setting: BASS BOOST: OFF  
NOTE  
If no adjustment is required, set all the frequency bands to  
“0 (dB).”  
This function affects only the sound coming out through the front  
speakers.  
• The EQ indicator goes off from the display.  
From the remote control:  
From the remote control:  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
Before you start, remember...  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is  
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
Press SOUND, then press BASS  
BOOST repeatedly.  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
• Each time you press BASS BOOST, the  
Bass Boost turns on and off alternately.  
1
2
Press SOUND.  
Press EQ FREQ repeatedly to  
select the band you want to adjust.  
NOTE  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
3
4
Press EQ LEVEL 9/( to adjust  
the equalization pattern of the  
selected band.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust  
other bands.  
2
3
NOTE  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
1
7 Selecting the subwoofer sound phase—  
SUBWOOFER PHASE  
You can change the subwoofer sound phase to your preference.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
PHASE: NORMAL  
Normally select this.  
PHASE: REVERSE Select this when you feel the bass sound is  
better with this mode rather than with  
“PHASE: NORMAL.”  
Initial setting: PHASE: NORMAL  
NOTE  
This function takes effect only when “SUBWOOFER” is set to  
“SUBWOOFER:YES” (see page 21).  
7 Attenuating the input signal—INPUT ATT  
When the input level of analog source is too high, the sound will  
be distorted. If this happens, you need to attenuate the input  
signal level to prevent the sound distortion.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
INPUT ATT: ON  
Select to attenuate the input signal level.  
The ATT indicator lights up on the display.  
INPUT ATT: NORMAL Select to deactivate attenuation.  
Initial setting: INPUT ATT: NORMAL  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Making the center tone soft or sharp  
Adjusting the sound parameters for the  
Surround/DSP modes  
You can adjust the Surround/DSP sound parameters to your  
preference.  
—CENTER TONE  
This setting is available when one of the Surround/DSP modes is  
in use. To activate Surround/DSP mode, see page 39.  
• This setting is common to all Surround modes, and is  
memorized separately for DSP modes.  
• For details about the Surround/DSP modes, see pages 34 to 39.  
You cannot adjust the center tone in the following cases:  
– When “CENTER SPEAKER” is set to “CENTER SPK: NO”  
(see page 21).  
– When Dual Mono software is played back.  
– While listening with the headphones.  
7 Adjusting the effect level for DSP modes  
—EFFECT  
This setting is available only when one of the DSP modes (except  
ALL CH ST) is in use. To activate DSP mode, see page 39.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
DSP mode.  
Adjustable range: 1 to 5 (in 1 step intervals)  
Initial setting: CENTER TONE: 3  
Adjustable range: 1 to 5 (in 1 step intervals)  
Initial setting: EFFECT: 3  
As the number increases, the dialogue becomes stronger.  
Normally, select “3.”  
• When the center tone is set to other than “CENTER TONE: 3,”  
the C.TONE indicator lights up on the display.  
As the number increases, the effect becomes stronger.  
Normally, select “3.”  
From the remote control:  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
From the remote control:  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Press SOUND, then press C.TONE  
repeatedly.  
Press SOUND, then press EFFECT  
repeatedly.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
7 Align the vertical localization of the center  
7 Adjusting the panorama control for Pro Logic II  
channel —CENTER ALIGNMENT  
Music—PANORAMA  
This setting is available when one of the Surround/DSP modes  
(except “PLII MUSIC,PLIIx MUSIC,Neo:6 MUSIC,and “ALL  
CH ST”) is in use. To activate Surround/DSP mode, see page 39.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
Surround/DSP mode.  
This setting is available only when Pro Logic II Music is in use. To  
activate Pro Logic II Music, see page 39.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized until you  
change the setting.  
You cannot adjust the center alignment in the following cases:  
– When “CENTER SPEAKER” is set to “CENTER SPK: NO”  
(see page 21).  
PANORAMA: ON  
Select to add “wraparound” sound effect with  
side-wall image.  
– When Dual Mono software is played back.  
– While listening with the headphones.  
PANORAMA: OFF Select to listen to originally recorded sound.  
Initial setting: PANORAMA: OFF  
C ALIGNMENT: ON Select when you cannot feel as if the actors  
or singers are speaking or singing on the  
screen.  
7 Adjusting the sound localization of the center  
C ALIGNMENT: OFF Select not to use this function.  
channel—CENTER GAIN  
Initial setting: C ALIGNMENT: OFF  
This setting is available only when Neo:6 Music is in use.  
• If you have set “CENTER SPEAKER” to “CENTER SPK: NO”  
(see page 21), the center gain is not adjustable.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized until you  
change the setting.  
Adjustable range: 0 to 1.0 (in 0.1 step intervals)  
Initial setting: CENTER GAIN: 0.3  
As the number increases, the center channel will be localized  
clearly.  
Normally, select “0.3.”  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuning in to stations manually  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Tuner operations  
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.  
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.  
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates  
between “FM” and “AM.”  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
Tuner operations are mainly done from the remote control.  
2 Press repeatedly or hold TUNING 9 or  
( TUNING until the station you want is tuned  
in.  
• Pressing (or holding) TUNING 9 increases the frequency.  
• Pressing (or holding) ( TUNING decreases the frequency.  
NOTES  
• When you hold and release TUNING 9 or ( TUNING, the  
frequency keeps changing until a station is tuned in.  
• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the  
TUNED indicator lights up on the display.  
• When an FM stereo program is received, the ST (stereo)  
indicator also lights up.  
When operating the  
receiver using the remote  
control, set the mode  
selector to “AUDIO/TV/  
VCR/DBS.”  
Using preset tuning  
Once a station is assigned a channel number, the station can be  
quickly tuned simply by selecting the number.You can preset up to  
30 FM and 15 AM stations.  
To store the preset stations  
Before you start, remember...  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is  
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
NOTE  
When you have selected “FM” or “AM” by using SOURCE  
SELECTOR on the front panel, the remote control may not  
work for tuner operations. To use the remote control for tuner  
operations, select “FM” or “AM” by using the source selecting  
button on the remote control.  
From the remote control ONLY:  
1 Tune in to the station you want to preset (see  
Tuning in to stations manually” above).  
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for this station,  
select the FM reception mode you want. See “Selecting the  
FM reception mode” on page 33.  
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing  
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other  
countries use 10 kHz spacing. 9 kHz interval spacing is the initial  
setting.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
ATT  
HP  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
MHz  
kHz  
• Be sure the receiver is turned off, but is plugged into an AC  
outlet when setting the AM tuner interval.  
2 Press MEMORY.  
The channel number position starts flashing on the display for  
about 5 seconds.  
On the front panel ONLY:  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
To select the 10 kHz interval:  
Hold down ADJUST and press  
STANDBY/ON.  
“10k STEP” appears on the display.  
To change back to the 9 kHz interval:  
Hold down SETTING and press  
“9k STEP” appears on the display.  
STANDBY/ON.  
NOTE  
When you change the AM tuner interval spacing, stored preset  
stations are erased. In this case, restore stations.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to  
select a channel number while the channel  
number position is flashing.  
On the front panel:  
2 1, 3  
• For channel number 5, press 5.  
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.  
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
Before you start, remember...  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is  
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
1 Turn SOURCE SELECTOR to select “FM” or  
“AM.”  
4 Press MEMORY again while the selected  
channel number is flashing on the display.  
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.  
The selected channel number stops flashing.  
The station is assigned to the selected channel number.  
2 PressTUNER PRESET.  
“P” appears on the display and MULTI JOG now works for  
selecting preset channels.  
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the  
stations you want.  
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select a preset channel  
To erase a stored preset station  
number while “P” appears on the display.  
Storing a new station on a used channel number erases the  
previously stored one.  
To increase the preset channel numbers, turn MULTI JOG  
clockwise.  
To decreases the preset channel numbers, turn MULTI JOG  
counterclockwise.  
To tune in a preset station  
From the remote control:  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.  
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in and  
the numeric buttons now work for tuner operations.  
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates  
between “FM” and “AM.”  
Selecting the FM reception mode  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive or noisy, you can  
change the FM reception mode while receiving an FM broadcast.  
You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station  
(see page 32).  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
2 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to  
From the remote control ONLY:  
select a preset channel number.  
While listening to an FM station, press FM MODE.  
• Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode  
alternates between “AUTO MUTING” and “MONO.”  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
AUTO MUTING  
Normally select this.  
When a program is broadcast in stereo,  
you will hear stereo sound; when in  
monaural, you will hear monaural sound.  
This mode is also useful to suppress  
static noise between stations. The AUTO  
MUTING indicator lights up on the display.  
• For channel number 5, press 5.  
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.  
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.  
MONO  
Select this to improve the reception (but  
stereo effect will be lost).  
In this mode, you will hear noise while  
tuning in to the stations. The AUTO  
MUTING indicator goes off from the  
display. (The ST indicator also goes off.)  
Initial setting: AUTO MUTING  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introducing the Surround modes  
Dolby Digital*  
Dolby Digital is a digital signal compression method, developed by  
Dolby Laboratories, and enables multi-channel encoding and  
decoding.  
Creating realistic  
sound fields  
• When Dolby Digital signal is detected through the digital input,  
the DOLBY D indicator lights up on the display.  
Dolby Digital 5.1CH  
Dolby Digital 5.1CH (DOLBY D) encoding method records and  
digitally compresses the left front channel, right front channel,  
center channel, left surround channel, right surround channel, and  
LFE channel signals (total 6 channels, but the LFE channel is  
counted as 0.1 channel. Therefore, called 5.1 channel).  
Dolby Digital enables stereo surround sounds, and sets the cutoff  
frequency of the surround treble at 20 kHz, compared to 7 kHz for  
Dolby Pro Logic. As such, the sound movement and “being-there”  
feeling are enhanced much more than Dolby Pro Logic.  
Reproducing theater ambience  
In a movie theater, many speakers are located on the walls to  
reproduce impressive multi-channel sound, reaching you from all  
directions.  
With these many speakers, sound localization and sound  
movement can be expressed.  
Surround/DSP modes built in this receiver can create almost the  
same Surround sound as you can feel in a real movie theater.  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX (DOLBY D EX) is a digital surround encoding  
format that adds the third surround channels, called “surround  
back.”  
Compared to the conventional Dolby Digital 5.1CH, these newly  
added surround back channels can reproduce more detailed  
movements behind you while viewing the video software. In  
addition, surround sound localization will become more stable.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dolby Surround  
DTS**  
DTS is another digital signal compression method, developed by  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc., and enables multi-channel  
encoding and decoding (1ch up to 6.1ch).  
• When DTS signal is detected through the digital input, the DTS  
indicator lights up on the display.  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Pro Logic II is a multi-channel playback format to convert  
2-channel software into 5-channel (plus subwoofer). The matrix-  
based conversion method used for Dolby Pro Logic II makes no  
limitation for the cutoff frequency of the surround treble and  
enables stereo surround sound.  
• This receiver provides two types of Dolby Pro Logic II modes—  
Pro Logic II Movie (PLII MOVIE) and Pro Logic II Music (PLII  
MUSIC).  
DTS Digital Surround  
DTS Digital Surround (DTS) is another discrete 5.1 channel  
digital audio format available on CD, LD, and DVD software.  
Compared to Dolby Digital, the DTS Digital Surround format has a  
lower audio compression rate which enables it to add breadth and  
depth to the sounds reproduced. As such, DTS Digital Surround  
features natural, solid, and clear sound.  
When Dolby Pro Logic II is activated, the  
up on the display.  
indicator lights  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
Suitable for playing any Dolby Surround encoded  
software.You can enjoy a sound field very close  
to the one created with discrete 5.1-channel  
sounds.  
DTS Extended Surround (DTS-ES)  
Suitable for playing any 2-channel stereo  
DTS-ES is another multi-channel digital encoding format.  
It greatly improves the 360-degree surround impression and  
space expression by adding the third surround channel—surround  
back channel.  
software.You can enjoy wide and deep sounds.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
DTS-ES includes two signal formats with different surround signal  
recording methods—DTS-ES Discrete 6.1ch (ES DISCRETE)  
and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1ch (ES MATRIX).  
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1ch has been designed to encode (and  
decode) a 6.1-channel signal discretely to avoid interference with  
each channel.  
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1ch has been designed to add an extra  
surround channel to DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel. By using a  
matrix encoding/decoding method, an additional “surround back”  
channel signal is encoded (and decoded) in both the left and right  
surround channel signals.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a newly introduced multi-channel playback  
format to convert not only multi-channel software but 2-channel  
software into 6.1 channel (or 7.1 channel) that developed from  
Dolby Pro Logic II. The matrix-based conversion method used for  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx makes no limitation for the cutoff frequency of  
the surround treble.  
• This receiver provides two types of Dolby Pro Logic IIx modes—  
Pro Logic IIx Movie (PLIIx MOVIE) and Pro Logic IIx Music  
(PLIIx MUSIC).  
When Dolby Pro Logic IIx is activated, the  
lights up on the display.  
indicator  
** “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks  
PLIIx MOVIE Suitable for playing any Dolby Surround encoded  
software.You can enjoy a sound field with a  
natural wraparound effect.  
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
PLIIx MUSIC Suitable for playing any 2-channel stereo  
software.You can enjoy wide and deep 6.1-  
channel sounds.  
To enjoy software encoded with Dolby Digital, connect the  
source component using the digital terminal on the rear of this  
receiver. (See page 11.)  
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When using Surround mode, the sounds come out of the  
activated speakers which the Surround mode requires.  
DTS 96/24  
In recent years, there has been increasing interest in higher  
sampling rates both for recording and for reproducing at home.  
Higher sampling rates allow wider frequency range and greater bit  
depths provide extended dynamic range.  
DTS 96/24 is a multi-channel digital signal format (fs 96 kHz/24  
bits) introduced by Digital Theater Systems, Inc. to deliver “better-  
than-CD sound quality” into the home.  
• When DTS 96/24 signal is detected, the DTS and 96/24  
indicators light up.You can enjoy its 5.1-channel sound with full-  
quality.  
• If either the surround speakers or center speaker is set to  
“NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21), the corresponding  
channel signals are allocated to and emitted through the front  
speakers.  
• If both the surround speakers and center speaker are set to  
“NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-  
PHONIC processing (which has been developed to create the  
surround effect through the front speakers only) is used. The 3D  
indicator lights up on the display.  
3D HEADPHONE mode  
DTS Neo:6  
If you connect a pair of headphones while one of the Surround  
modes is in use, the 3D HEADPHONE mode is activated  
without respect to the type of software played back.  
“3DHEADPHONE” appears on the display and the DSP, 3D,  
and HP indicators light up.  
DTS Neo:6 is another conversion method to create 6-channel  
(plus subwoofer) from analog/digital 2-channel software by using  
the high precision digital matrix decoder used for DTS-ES Matrix  
6.1ch.  
• This receiver provides the following DTS Neo:6 modes—Neo:6  
Cinema (NEO:6CINEMA) and Neo:6 Music (NEO:6 MUSIC).  
When one of them is activated, the NEO:6 indicator lights up on  
the display.  
About other digital signals  
Linear PCM  
NEO:6CINEMA Suitable for playing movies.You can get the  
same atmosphere with 2-channel software as  
with 6.1-channel software. It is also effective for  
playing software encoded with conventional  
surround formats.  
Uncompressed digital audio data used for DVDs, CDs, and  
Video CDs.  
DVDs support 2 channels with sampling rates of 48/96 kHz, at  
quantization of 16/20/24 bits. On the other hand, CDs and  
Video CDs are limited to 2 channels with 44.1 kHz at 16 bits.  
• When Linear PCM signal is detected, the LPCM indicator  
lights up.  
NEO:6 MUSIC Suitable for playing music software. The front  
channel signals bypass the decoder (resulting in  
no loss of sound quality) and the surround  
signals transmitted through the other speakers  
expand the sound field naturally.  
Dual Mono  
Dual Mono can be easily understood when you think of the  
bilingual broadcast for TV programs (however, the Dual Mono  
format is not identical with those analog formats).  
This format is now adopted in Dolby Digital, DTS, and so on. It  
allows two independent channels (called main channel and  
sub-channel) to be recorded separately.  
You can select either channel you want to listen to (see  
page 23).  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When using the DAP mode, the sounds come out of all the  
connected and activated speakers.  
Introducing the DSP modes  
If the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker  
setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC processing  
(which has been developed to create the surround effect  
through the front speakers only) is used.  
The sound heard in a concert hall, club, etc. consists of direct  
sound and indirect sound—early reflections and reflections from  
behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly without any  
reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are delayed by the  
distances of the ceiling and walls. These direct sounds and  
indirect sounds are the most important elements of the acoustic  
surround effects.  
The 3D indicator lights up on the display.  
MONO FILM  
The DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes can create these  
important elements, and give you a real “being there” feeling.  
In order to reproduce a more acoustic sound field in your listening  
room while viewing monaural sound video software (analog and  
2-channel digital signals including Dual Mono signal), you can use  
this mode.  
The surround effect will be added, and the sound localization of  
actor’s words will be improved.  
Reflections from behind  
Early reflections  
This mode cannot be used for multi-channel digital signals.  
When “MONO FILM” is used, sounds come out of all the  
connected (and activated) speakers.  
If the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker  
setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC processing  
(which has been developed to create the surround effect  
through the front speakers only) is used.  
The 3D indicator lights up on the display.  
• If incoming signals change from 2-channel digital signal to  
another digital signal type, “MONO FILM” is canceled and an  
appropriate Surround mode is activated.  
Direct sounds  
The DSP modes include the following modes:  
• Digital Acoustic Processor (DAP) modes—HALL1, HALL2, LIVE  
CLUB, DANCE CLUB, PAVILION, THEATER1, THEATER2  
• MONO FILM—Used for all types of 2-channel signals (including  
Dual Mono signal)  
All Channel Stereo mode (ALL CH ST)  
This mode can reproduce a larger stereo sound field using all the  
connected (and activated) speakers.  
• All Channel Stereo mode (ALL CH ST)  
This mode cannot be used if the surround speakers are set  
to “NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21).  
When one of the DSP modes is activated, the DSP indicator lights  
up on the display.  
Digital Acoustic Processor (DAP) modes  
You can use the following DAP modes in order to reproduce a  
more acoustic sound field in your listening room.  
HALL1  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large  
shoebox-shaped hall designed primarily for  
classical concerts. (Its seating capacity is about  
2000.)  
Sound reproduced from  
normal stereo  
Sound reproduced from All  
Channel Stereo mode  
HALL2  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large  
vineyard-shaped hall designed primarily for  
classical concerts. (Its seating capacity is about  
2000.)  
3D HEADPHONE mode  
LIVE CLUB  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a live music club  
with a low ceiling.  
If you connect a pair of headphones while one of the DSP  
modes is in use, the 3D HEADPHONE mode is activated  
without respect to the type of software played back.  
“3DHEADPHONE” appears on the display and the DSP, 3D,  
and HP indicators light up.  
DANCE CLUB Reproduces the spatial feeling of a rocking dance  
club.  
PAVILION  
THEATER1  
THEATER2  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of an exhibition  
hall with a high ceiling.  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large theater  
where the seating capacity is about 600.  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a small theater  
where the seating capacity is about 300.  
NOTE  
When “THEATER1” or “THEATER2” is activated while playing  
back 2-channel analog or digital source, the built-in Dolby Pro  
Logic II decoder is activated and the  
indicator lights up.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Surround/DSP modes  
Available Surround/DSP modes vary depending on the speaker settings and the incoming signals. See the table below.  
• The numbers inside the parentheses following the incoming signal type indicate the number of the front channels and that of the  
surround channels. For example, (3/2) indicates that the signals are encoded with three front signals (left/right/center) and two (stereo)  
surround signals.  
• For EX/ES/PLIIx setting, see page 22.  
The name of the mode shown below is the display indication.  
EX/ES/PLIIx setting  
Incoming Signal Type  
AUTO  
ON  
PLIIx MOVIE  
PLIIx MUSIC  
OFF  
Dolby Digital Surround EX  
DOLBY D EX*2*5  
DOLBY D EX*2  
DOLBY D EX*2*3  
D + PLIIx MU*2  
DOLBY D  
Dolby Digital (3/2, 2/2)  
Dolby Digital (3/1, 2/1, 3/0, 1/0)  
Dolby Digital (Dual Mono)  
DTS-ES Discrete*1  
DOLBY D  
DOLBY D EX*2  
DOLBY D EX*2*3  
DOLBY D  
D + PLIIx MU*2  
DOLBY D  
DUAL MONO  
ES DISCRETE*2 ES DISCRETE*2  
DTS +  
DTS +  
DTS +  
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2  
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2  
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2  
DTS  
DTS  
DTS  
DTS-ES Matrix*1  
ES MATRIX*2  
DTS  
ES MATRIX*2  
DTS (3/2, 2/2)*1  
DTS + NEO:6*2  
DTS (3/1, 2/1, 3/0, 1/0)  
DTS (Dual Mono)  
DTS  
DUAL MONO  
Dolby Digital (2/0)  
DTS (2/0)  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
NEO:6CINEMA  
NEO:6 MUSIC  
PLIIx MOVIE*4/PLIIx MUSIC*4/NEO:6CINEMA/NEO:6 MUSIC  
Lenear PCM  
Analog  
DVD MULTI  
None  
*1 DTS 96/24 processing is not applied when the EX/ES/PLIIx setting is activated. If you want to apply the processing, set the EX/ES/  
PLIIx setting to “EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF” (see page 22).  
*2 When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK SPK: NO” (see page 21), Virtual Surround Back is activated for the  
modes.  
*3 When using PLIIx Movie to reproduce Dolby Digital or DTS software, this receiver applies Dolby Digital EX (DOLBY D EX) or DTS plus  
Dolby Digital EX (DTS +  
EX) processing (6.1-channel reproduction) to the software.  
*4 When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK SPK: NO” (see page 21), “PLIIx MOVIE” is changed to “PLII MOVIE”  
and “PLIIx MUSIC” is changed to “PLII MUSIC.”  
*5 For some Dolby Digital Surround EX software, Dolby Digital 5.1-channel reproduction (“DOLBY D”) may be applied. In this case, select  
“EX/ES/PLIIx: ON” to apply “DOLBY D EX.”  
About the DSP modes  
• The following DSP modes are available regardless of incoming signal type:  
HALL1, HALL2, LIVE CLUB, DANCE CLUB, PAVILION, THEATER1, THEATER2  
• When an incoming signal is a multi-channel (more than 2-channel) digital signal, “MONO FILM” is not available.  
You cannot select “ALL CH ST” when the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21).  
Virtual Surround Back  
This function creates the great surround effect from the behind as if you have connected the surround back speaker. The VIRTUAL  
SB (Surround Back) indicator lights up on the display.  
If you have connected (and activated) the surround speakers, you can use Virtual Surround Back without connecting the surround  
back speaker.  
Virtual Surround Back is activated when “EX/ES/PLIIx” is set to other than “EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF” and when playing back the software  
including the following signals:  
– Dolby Digital Surround EX  
– DTS-ES  
– Dolby Digital or DTS with more than 4-channels  
Virtual Surround Back is activated when one of the Surround modes is selected.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On the front panel:  
2
Activating the Surround/DSP modes  
Available Surround/DSP modes vary depending on the incoming  
1, 3  
signals. For details, see page 38.  
Activating one of the Surround/DSP modes automatically  
recalls the memorized settings and adjustments.  
Before you start, remember...  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is  
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
• To adjust the speaker output level, see page 29.  
• To adjust the effect level for the DSP mode (except All  
Channel Stereo mode,) see page 31.  
1 Select and play any source other than “DVD  
MULTI.”  
• To add “wraparound” sound effect to “PLII MUSIC”  
(PANORAMA control,) see page 31.  
• Make sure you have selected the input mode (analog or  
digital) correctly.  
• To adjust the sound localization of the center channel  
for “NEO:6 MUSIC” (center gain,) see page 31.  
2 Press SURROUND.  
To adjust the vertical localization of the center channel  
for Surround/DSP modes (except “PLII MUSIC,PLIIx  
MUSIC,Neo6: MUSIC,and “ALL CH ST”) (center  
alignment,) see page 31.  
MULTI JOG now works for selecting Surround/DSP modes.  
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select the Surround/DSP  
mode you want.  
Ex.: When “DOLBY D” is selected for Dolby Digital multi-  
channel software:  
NOTES  
You cannot use any Surround/DSP modes when selecting “DVD  
MULTI” as the playback source.  
• The on-screen display appears on the TV screen to show the  
Surround/DSP mode name for 5 seconds when you select the  
Surround/DSP mode.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
AUTO SURR  
HALL1  
Surround modes*  
HALL2  
To cancel the function, set “SUPERIMPOSE” to  
“SUPERIMPOSE: OFF” (see page 25).  
LIVE CLUB  
PAVILION  
THEATER2  
ALL CH ST  
(Back to the beginning)  
DANCE CLUB  
THEATER1  
MONO FILM  
SURR OFF  
From the remote control:  
1
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control, set the  
mode selector to  
To cancel Surround/DSP modes  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Turn MULTI JOG so that “SURR OFF” appears on the display.  
NOTE  
The initial setting is “AUTO SURR.”  
* Available Surround modes vary depending on the incoming  
signals. For details, see “Using the Surround/DSP modes” on  
page 38.  
2
1 Select and play any source other than “DVD  
When you select “AUTO SURR” (Auto Surround)  
You can enjoy the Surround mode easily.  
MULTI.”  
• For details about the Surround modes, see pages 34 to 36.  
• When “AUTO SURR” is activated, the AUTO SR indicator lights  
up on the display.  
• Make sure you have selected the input mode (analog or  
digital) correctly.  
2 Press SURROUND repeatedly to select the  
How does “AUTO SURR” work?  
Surround/DSP mode you want.  
• If a multi-channel signal comes in, an appropriate Surround  
mode will be selected automatically.  
Ex.: When “DOLBY D” is selected for Dolby Digital multi-  
channel software:  
• If a Dolby Digital 2-channel or DTS 2-channel signal with  
surround signal comes in, “PLII MOVIE” will be selected.  
• If a Dolby Digital 2-channel or DTS 2-channel signal without  
surround signal, or a Linear PCM signal comes in, “SURR  
OFF (stereo)” will be selected.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
AUTO SURR  
HALL1  
Surround modes*  
HALL2  
NOTES  
LIVE CLUB  
PAVILION  
THEATER2  
ALL CH ST  
(Back to the beginning)  
DANCE CLUB  
THEATER1  
MONO FILM  
SURR OFF  
• “AUTO SURR” does not take effect in the following cases:  
– While playing an analog source.  
– While selecting one of the fixed digital decode modes—  
“DOLBY D” or “DTS” (see page 13).  
• While listening with the headphones, the 3D HEADPHONE  
mode (see pages 36 and 37) is activated without respect to the  
type of software played back.  
To cancel Surround/DSP modes  
• When “AUTO SURR” is selected, sound may not come out at  
the beginning of playback. If it occurs, select a Surround mode  
manually.  
Press SURROUND repeatedly so that “SURR OFF” appears on  
the display.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections 2: Video cable connection  
This receiver is equipped with three types of the video terminals—  
composite video, S-video, and component video, and the signals  
coming into this receiver through one type of video terminals can  
output only through the terminal of the same type. So you need to  
connect the video components to this receiver using one of the  
following three ways.  
• When using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, set  
the video input for the DVD player and the VCR correctly (see  
“Selecting the component video input mode—DVD VIDEO  
INPUT/VCR VIDEO INPUT” on page 25); otherwise, the correct  
input for this receiver will not be selected on the TV.  
AV COMPU LINK  
remote control  
system  
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to  
operate JVC’s video components (TV, DVD player*, and VCR)  
through this receiver.  
Case 1*:  
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver  
through the S-video terminals, connect this receiver to the  
TV’s video input 1 terminal using S-video cables.  
This receiver is equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which has  
added a function to operate JVC’s video components through the  
component video jacks. To use this remote control system, you  
need to connect the video components you want to operate,  
following the diagrams below and the procedures on page 41.  
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your video components.  
S-video cable  
S-video cable  
Source  
equipment  
RX-F31S  
TV  
* “DVD player” on pages 40 and 41 can be replaced with “DVD  
recorder.”  
To video input 1  
Connections 1: AV COMPU LINK connection  
Case 2*:  
TV  
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver  
through the composite video jacks, connect this receiver  
to the TV’s video input 2 terminal (composite video input)  
using composite video cables.  
AV  
AV  
COMPU LINK-III  
COMPU LINK EX  
Composite video cable  
Composite video cable  
Monaural mini-plugs  
(not supplied)  
Source  
equipment  
RX-F31S  
TV  
To video input 2  
(Composite)  
AV  
COMPU  
LINK-III  
Case 3:  
220V  
110V  
127V  
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver  
through the component video jacks, connect this receiver  
to the TV’s video input 2 terminals (component video  
input) using component video cables.  
230 -  
240V  
Component video cable  
Component video cable  
Monaural  
mini-plugs  
(not supplied)  
AV  
COMPU LINK  
Source  
equipment  
RX-F31S  
TV  
To video input 2  
(Component)  
DVD player  
AV  
COMPU LINK  
* When using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, set  
“DOWN MIX” and “Y/C SEPARATE” to “OFF”; otherwise, this  
system does not work correctly. For details about each setting,  
see page 25.  
VCR  
IMPORTANT:  
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot control the  
DBS tuner connected to the DBS IN jacks.  
NOTES  
• When connecting the receiver and aTV with the AV COMPU LINK  
EX terminal by using a component video cable, you cannot use  
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode (see page 41).  
• When connecting only the VCR and DVD player to this receiver,  
connect it directly to the receiver using cable with the monaural  
mini-plugs.  
You can connect only the TV with AV COMPU LINK EX or AV  
COMPU LINK-III terminal to the AV COMPU LINK-III terminal.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One-touch DVD play  
Connecting procedure  
Simply by starting playback on the DVD player, you can enjoy the  
DVD playback without setting other switches manually.  
• When the DVD player is connected through the analog input  
jacks on this receiver (and analog input is selected), the  
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to  
“DVR/DVD” or “DVD MULTI.”  
1 If you have already plugged your VCR, DVD  
player,TV, and this receiver into the AC  
outlets, unplug their AC power cords first.  
• When the DVD player is connected through the digital input  
terminal on this receiver (and digital input is selected), the  
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to  
“DVR/DVD DGT.”  
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the  
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.  
2 Connect your VCR, DVD player,TV, and this  
receiver as follows, using the cables with the  
monaural mini-plugs (not supplied).  
• See “Connections 1” on the previous page.  
3 Connect the audio input/output jacks on the  
VCR, DVD player,TV, and this receiver using  
the audio cables.  
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode  
• When you select “TV” (or “TV DIGITAL) as the source to play on  
the receiver, the TV automatically changes the input mode to  
the TV tuner so that you can watch TV.  
• When you select “DVR/DVD” (or “DVR/DVD DGT”), “DVD  
MULTI,VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL), or “DBS” (or “DBS DIGITAL)  
as the source to play on the receiver, the TV automatically  
changes the input mode to the appropriate position (either video  
input 1 or video input 2) so that you can view the playback  
picture.  
• See pages 7 to 10.  
4 Connect the video input/output jacks on the  
VCR, DVD player,TV, and this receiver using  
the S-video cables, composite video cables,  
or component video cables.  
• See “Connections 2” on the previous page.  
5 Plug the AC power cords of the connected  
components and this receiver into the AC  
outlets.  
NOTE  
This function does not work when you connect this receiver and  
the TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal using a component  
video cable. In this case, reconnect the TV referring to Case 1 or  
Case 2 on page 40.  
6 When turning on the TV for the first time after  
the AV COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV  
volume to the minimum using the TV volume  
control on the TV.  
Automatic power on/off  
The TV, DVD player, and VCR turn on and off along with the  
receiver.  
7 Turn on other connected components first,  
then turn on this receiver.  
When you turn on the receiver;  
• If the previously selected source is “TV” (or “TV DIGITAL) or  
“DBS” (or “DBS DIGITAL), only the TV will turn on automatically.  
• If the previously selected source is “DVR/DVD” (or “DVR/DVD  
DGT”) or “DVD MULTI,the TV and DVD player will turn on  
automatically.  
• If the previously selected source is “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL),  
the TV and VCR will turn on automatically.  
When you turn off the receiver, the TV, DVD player, and VCR will  
turn off.  
• When turning on the VCR, use the remote control supplied  
with this receiver (press VCR  
).  
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use  
the five basic functions listed below.  
Remote control of the TV, DVD player, and VCR using this  
remote control  
See pages 42 and 43 for details.  
NOTE  
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each  
component.  
If you turn off the receiver while recording on the VCR, the VCR  
will not turn off, but continue recording.  
One-touch video play  
Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the  
VCR, you can enjoy the video playback without setting other  
switches manually. The receiver automatically turns on and  
changes the source to “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL).  
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the  
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.  
When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab, press the  
play (3) button on the VCR or on the remote control. So, you can  
get the same result.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 VCR  
Operating other  
JVC products  
Set the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
You can use the supplied remote control to operate not only  
this receiver but also other JVC products.  
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.  
Some JVC VCRs can accept two types of the control signals—  
remote codes “A” and “B.”  
– When operating a VCR whose remote control code is set to  
“A,set the manufacturer’s code to “01.”  
– When operating a VCR whose remote control code is set to  
“B,set the manufacturer’s code to “02.”  
The initial setting is “01.” For details about the setting, see  
“Changing the transmittable signals for operating a VCR” on  
page 45.  
To operate other products, aim the remote control directly at the  
remote sensor on the target product.  
You can always perform the following operation:  
VCR Turn on or off the VCR.  
:
7 TV  
After pressing VCR, you can perform the following operations on  
the VCR.  
CHANNEL +/–:  
Change the channel numbers on the VCR.  
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.  
Start playback.  
1 – 9, 0:  
3:  
Set the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
7:  
Stop playback.  
8:  
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.  
Fast-wind a tape.  
¡:  
1:  
Rewind a tape.  
REC PAUSE:  
Enter recording pause. To start recording,  
press this button then 3.  
7 DVD recorder or DVD player  
To operate the DVD  
recorder, set the mode  
selector to “DVR.”  
You can always perform the following operations:  
To operate the DVD player,  
set the mode selector to  
“DVD.”  
TV  
:
Turn on or off the TV.  
TV VOL +/–:  
TV/VIDEO:  
Adjust the volume on the TV.  
Change the input mode (either video input  
or TV tuner) on the TV.  
After pressing TV, you can perform the following operations on the  
TV.  
CHANNEL +/–:  
1 – 9, 0, 100+:  
Change the channel numbers.  
Select the channel numbers.  
TV RETURN (10): Function as the TV RETURN button.  
(Switches between the previous channel  
and the current channel.)  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After setting the mode selector correctly, you can perform the  
following operations on the DVD recorder or DVD player.  
For various playback:  
(one touch replay):  
See the instructions supplied with the DVD recorder or DVD  
player for details.  
Move the playback position back 10 seconds  
before the current position.  
RETURN:  
CANCEL:  
Return to the main menu during menu  
operation.  
7 Changing the remote control code for DVD  
recorder  
Cancel the programmed track, etc.  
Some JVC DVD recorders can accept four types of the control  
signals.You can assign one of the four codes to the remote  
control supplied with this receiver for operating your DVD  
recorder. For details, refer to the manual supplied with the  
DVD recorder.  
Only for DVD recorder operations:  
CHANNEL +/–: Change the channel numbers.  
Initial setting: 03  
DVD/HDD:  
Select the DVD recorder or HDD deck. (Only for  
a DVD recorder incorporated with HDD deck.)  
1 Set the mode selector to “DVR.”  
(skip):  
Move the playback position ahead 30 seconds  
after the current position.  
2 Press and hold DVR/DVD  
3 Press DVR/DVD.  
.
1 – 9, 0:  
Select a channel number (while stopped) or a  
chapter/title number, track number (while playing  
back). Press ENTER to enter the number.  
4 Enter the remote control code you want using  
buttons 1 – 4, and 0.  
REC MODE:  
REC PAUSE:  
Select the recording mode.  
EX.: To enter the code “2”, press 0, then 2.  
Enter recording pause. To start recording,  
press 3.  
Code for DVR  
Number to enter  
1
2
3
4
01  
02  
03  
04  
DISPLAY:  
Change the display information.  
Only for DVD player operations:  
5 Release DVR/DVD  
.
fs/Rate*:  
Show the sampling frequency.  
Now, the remote control code has been changed.  
TITLE/GROUP: Make the numeric buttons work for selecting the  
title/group number.  
You can always perform the following operation:  
ZOOM:  
Zoom in and out.  
DVR/DVD  
3:  
:
Turn on or off the DVD recorder or DVD player.  
Start playback.  
1 – 10, 0, +10: Select a chapter/title number, track number,  
menu item, etc.  
DVD/CARD:  
Select the disc or memory card to play. (Only for  
a DVD player incorporated with memory card  
slots.)  
7:  
Stop playback.  
8:  
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.  
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter.  
¢:  
4:  
DIMMER:  
THUMBNAIL:  
SLIDE:  
Change the display brightness.  
Return to the beginning of the current (or  
previous) chapter.  
Show the thumbnail screen for JPEG discs.  
Start the slide show playback for JPEG discs.  
¡:  
1:  
Fast-forward playback.  
Fast-reverse playback.  
3D/S.EFFECT: Apply the 3D effect.  
PAGE: Show browsable still pictures on DVD Audio  
discs.  
TOP MENU/MENU:  
Display the menu recorded on discs.  
* Press and hold when using these buttons.  
ON SCREEN:  
5//3/2:  
ENTER:  
Shows the on-screen bar.  
Select an item on the menu screen.  
Enter the selected item, channel number,  
chapter/title number, or track number (if  
required).  
If these buttons do not function normally, use the remote  
control supplied with your DVD recorder or DVD player.  
Refer also to the manuals supplied with the DVD recorder  
or DVD player for details.  
You can also use the following buttons to operate JVC DVD  
recorder and/or DVD player if it supports the corresponding  
function:  
For various settings:  
AUDIO:  
SUBTITLE:  
SET UP:  
VFP:  
Select the audio language/channel.  
Select the subtitle language.  
Display the Preference display.  
Show the picture adjustment screen.  
PROGRESSIVE*: Change the scanning mode.  
ANGLE: Select the view angle.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manufacturers’ codes for TV  
Manufacturer  
Codes  
Operating other  
manufacturers’  
products  
JVC  
Akai  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
Bell+Howell  
Centurion  
Coronad  
Daewoo  
Emerson  
Fisher  
06, 07, 08  
09, 10, 11, 12, 13  
14  
GE•Pana  
GE•RCA  
Gold Star  
Hitachi  
15, 16  
17  
18, 19  
20, 21  
22, 23  
24  
25  
25  
By changing the transmittable signals, you can use the  
supplied remote control to operate other manufacturers’  
products.  
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.  
To operate those components with the remote control, first you  
need to set the manufacturers’ codes each for the TV, VCR, and  
DBS.  
• After replacing batteries of the remote control, set the  
manufacturers’ codes again.  
KTV  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Mitsubishi  
Panasonic  
Philips  
26, 27  
24  
Pioneer  
Proscan  
Quasar  
Radioshack  
RCA  
28  
29  
30  
31  
Changing the transmittable signals for operating  
a TV  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
02, 17, 32, 33, 34, 35  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Sears  
36, 37  
14  
38  
1 Press and hold TV  
2 Press TV.  
.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons  
Sharp  
Sony  
39  
40  
1 – 9, and 0.  
Symphonic  
Toshiba  
Zenith  
41, 42  
38  
43, 44  
See “Manufacturers’ codes for TV” on the right.  
4 Release TV  
.
Now, you can perform the following operations on the TV.  
Initial setting: 01  
TV  
:
Turn on or off the TV.  
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without  
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot  
operate the equipment.  
TV VOL +/–:  
TV/VIDEO:  
Adjust the volume on the TV.  
Change the input mode (either TV or  
VIDEO).  
After pressing TV, you can perform the following operations on  
the TV.  
CHANNEL +/–:  
Change the channel numbers.  
Select the channel numbers.  
1 – 9, 0, 100+ (+10):  
See the instructions supplied with the TV for details.  
5 Try to operate your TV by pressing TV  
.
When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct  
code.  
If more than one code is listed for your brand of TV, try each  
one until the correct one is entered.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manufacturers’ codes for VCR  
Changing the transmittable signals for operating  
a VCR  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Codes  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
01, 02, 03, 04  
1 Press and hold VCR  
2 Press VCR.  
.
Aiwa  
Akai  
Bell+Howell  
Daewoo  
Emerson  
Fisher  
05  
06, 07, 08  
09  
10  
11, 12, 13, 14, 15  
16, 17, 18, 19  
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons  
1 – 9, and 0.  
See “Manufacturers’ codes for VCR” on the right.  
G.E.  
20, 21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
20, 26  
4 Release VCR  
.
Go Video  
Gold Star  
Go-Video A  
Go-Video B  
Hitachi  
Now, you can perform the following operation on the VCR.  
VCR Turn on or off the VCR.  
:
Magnavox  
Mitsubishi  
NEC  
27, 28, 29  
30, 31, 32, 33  
34, 35  
After pressing VCR, you can perform the following operations  
on the VCR.  
Panasonic  
Philips  
RCA  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Scott  
Sharp  
Shintom  
Sony  
Symphonic  
Teknica  
Toshiba  
Zenith  
36, 37  
27  
38  
39, 40, 41  
16, 17, 18, 19  
42  
43, 44  
45  
46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51  
52  
53, 54  
55  
56  
CHANNEL +/–:  
Change the channel numbers on the  
VCR.  
1 – 9, 0:  
3:  
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.  
Start playback.  
7:  
Stop playback.  
8:  
Pause playback.  
¡:  
1:  
Fast-wind a tape.  
Rewind a tape.  
See the instructions supplied with the VCR for details.  
5 Try to operate your VCR by pressing VCR  
.
Initial setting: 01  
When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct  
code.  
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without  
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot  
operate the equipment.  
If more than one code is listed for your brand of VCR, try each  
one until the correct one is entered.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the transmittable signals for operating  
Changing the transmittable signals for operating  
a DVD player  
a DBS tuner  
Set the mode selector to “DVD.”  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
1 Press and hold DVR/DVD  
2 Press DVR/DVD.  
.
1 Press and hold DBS  
2 Press DBS.  
.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons  
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons  
1 – 9, and 0.  
1 – 9, and 0.  
See “Manufacturers’ codes for DVD player” below.  
See “Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner” below.  
4 Release DVR/DVD  
.
4 Release DBS  
.
Now, you can perform the following operation on the DVD  
player.  
Now, you can perform the following operation on the DBS  
tuner.  
DVR/DVD  
:
Turn on or off the DVD player.  
DBS  
:
Turn on or off the DBS tuner.  
3:  
Start playback.  
After pressing DBS, you can perform the following operations  
on the DBS tuner.  
1:  
Return to the beginning of the current  
chapter (or fast-forward for some models).  
¡:  
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter  
(or fast-reverse for some models).  
CHANNEL +/–:  
1 – 9, 0:  
Change the channel numbers on the  
DBS tuner.  
7:  
Stop playback.  
Select the channel numbers on the  
DBS tuner.  
8:  
Pause playback.  
MENU:  
Display the menu recorded on DVD  
VIDEO discs.  
See the instructions supplied with the DBS tuner for details.  
5//3/2:  
ENTER:  
1 – 9, 0:  
Select an item on the menu screen.  
Enter the selected item.  
5 Try to operate your DBS tuner by pressing  
DBS  
.
When your DBS tuner turns on or off, you have entered the  
correct code.  
Select the chapter number.  
See the instructions supplied with the DVD player for details.  
If more than one code is listed for your brand of DBS tuner,  
try each one until the correct one is entered.  
5 Try to operate your DVD player by pressing  
DVR/DVD  
.
Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner  
When your DVD player turns on or off, you have entered the  
correct code.  
Manufacturer  
Codes  
Echostar  
G.I.  
40  
01, 41  
02  
03, 04, 05, 06  
42  
43  
07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13,  
14, 15  
16, 17, 18  
19  
20, 21, 22  
23, 24, 44  
25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30  
31, 32  
45  
If more than one code is listed for your brand of DVD player,  
try each one until the correct one is entered.  
Gemini  
Hamlin  
Hitachi  
Hughes  
Jerrold  
Manufacturers’ codes for DVD player  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Hitachi  
Codes  
01  
12  
Macom  
Magnavox  
Oak  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Primestar  
RCA  
S. Atlanta  
Samsung  
Sony  
Kenwood  
Mitsubishi  
Onkyo  
Panasonic  
Philips  
05, 08  
10  
15, 16  
04  
07  
Pioneer  
Samsung  
Sony  
03  
14  
02  
46  
33, 34, 35  
36  
Toshiba  
Yamaha  
06  
09  
47  
Tocom  
Toshiba  
Zenith  
37  
48  
38, 39  
Initial setting: 01  
NOTE  
You cannot use this remote control to operate other  
manufacturers’ DVD recorder.  
Initial setting: 01  
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without  
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot  
operate the equipment.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If  
there are any problems you cannot solve, contact your JVC’s  
service center.  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
The power cord is not plugged in.  
SOLUTION  
The power does not come on.  
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.  
The receiver turns off (enters standby  
mode).  
Speakers are overloaded because of high  
volume.  
1. Stop the playback source.  
2. Turn on the receiver again, then turn the  
volume down.  
Speakers are overloaded because of a  
short circuit at the speaker terminals.  
Check the speaker wiring. If speaker wiring  
is not short-circuited, contact your dealer.  
The receiver is overloaded because of a  
high voltage.  
Consult your dealer after unplugging the  
power cord.  
“OVER HEAT” flashes on the display,  
then the receiver turns off.  
The receiver is overloaded because of high Turn on the receiver again. If the receiver  
volume or long time usage.  
turns off soon, consult your dealer after  
unplugging the power cord.  
No sound from speakers.  
Speaker signal cables are not connected.  
Check speaker wiring, then reconnect if  
necessary (see page 6) after unplugging  
the power cord.  
Connections are incorrect.  
Check the audio connections (see pages 7  
to 11) after unplugging the power cord.  
An incorrect source is selected.  
Muting is activated.  
Select the correct source.  
Press MUTING to cancel the mute (see  
page 15).  
An incorrect input mode (analog or digital)  
is selected.  
Select the correct input mode (analog or  
digital).  
TV Direct is activated.  
Deactivate TV Direct (see page 14).  
Sound from one speaker only.  
Speaker signal cables are not connected  
properly.  
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if  
necessary (see page 6) after unplugging  
the power cord.  
Bass sound is reinforced too much  
when listening in stereo.  
Appropriate bass level is not selected.  
The sounds may be intermittently distorted  
Adjust audio position level (see page 14).  
Sounds are intermittently distorted or  
the noise is heard by the outside noise or the noise may be heard by the outside  
This is not a malfunction. But if this  
continues, turn on the receiver again.  
such as a lightning discharge.  
noise such as a lightning discharge but the  
sound will be restored automatically.  
No picture is displayed on the monitor. Connections are incorrect.  
Input mode is incorrect.  
Check the video connections (see pages 7  
to 10) after unplugging the power code.  
Check the component video input mode  
(see page 25).  
Remote control does not operate as  
you intend.  
The remote control is not ready for your  
intended operation.  
Set the mode selector correctly, then press  
the corresponding source selecting button  
or SOUND before operation  
Remote control does not work.  
There is an obstruction hiding the remote  
sensor on the receiver.  
Remove the obstruction.  
Batteries are weak.  
Replace batteries.  
The mode selector is set to the incorrect  
position.  
Set the mode selector to the proper  
position.  
Buttons cannot be used.  
TV Direct is activated.  
Deactivate TV Direct (see page 14).  
Continuous hiss or buzzing during FM Incoming signal is too weak.  
reception.  
Connect an outdoor FM antenna or contact  
your dealer.  
The station is too far away.  
Select another station.  
The wrong antenna is being used.  
Check with your dealer to be sure you have  
the correct antenna.  
Antennas are not connected properly.  
Check the connections.  
Occasional cracking noise during FM  
reception.  
Ignition noise from automobiles.  
Move the antenna farther from automobile  
traffic.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video  
Video Input Sensitivity/Impedance:  
Specifications  
Composite video: DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS:  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
S-video: DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS:  
Y (luminance):  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
C (chrominance, burst):  
Component: DVR/DVD, VCR:  
Y (luminance):  
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
PB, PR:  
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Video Output Level/Impedance:  
Designs and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Composite video: DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
S-video: DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:  
Y (luminance):  
C (chrominance, burst):  
Component: MONITOR OUT:  
Y (luminance):  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Amplifier  
Output Power  
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
At stereo operation:  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Negative  
Front channels:  
100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven  
into 6 at 1 kHz with no more than 10%  
total harmonic distortion.  
PB, PR:  
Synchronization:  
At surround operation:  
Front channels:  
100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven  
into 6 at 1 kHz with no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
FM tuner (IHF)  
Tuning Range:  
Usable Sensitivity:  
Monaural:  
87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz  
Center channel:  
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 6 at  
1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total  
harmonic distortion.  
12.8 dBf (1.2 µV/75 )  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
Monaural:  
Surround channels: 100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven  
into 6 at 1 kHz, with no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
16.0 dBf (1.7 µV/75 )  
37.5 dBf (20.5 µV/75 )  
Stereo:  
Stereo Separation at OUT(REC): 35 dB at 1 kHz  
Surround back channel:  
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 6 at  
1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total  
harmonic distortion.  
AM tuner  
Tuning Range:  
* Measured on AC 110 V, 127 V, 220 V, and 240 V.  
531 kHz to 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)  
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)  
Audio  
General  
Audio Input Sensitivity/Impedance:  
Power Requirements:  
AC 110 V/127 V/220 V/230 V – 240 V  
adjustable with the voltage selector,  
50 Hz/60 Hz  
,
DVR/DVD (DVD MULTI), VCR, DBS, TV:  
330 mV/47 kΩ  
Audio Input (DIGITAL IN)*:  
Power Consumption:  
120 W (at operation)  
Coaxial: DIGITAL IN 1(DVR/DVD):  
5 W (in standby mode)  
0.5 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Optical: DIGITAL IN 2(DBS), 3(VCR):  
–21 dBm to –15 dBm  
Dimensions (W x H x D): 435 mm x 70 mm x 317.2 mm  
Mass: 6.3 kg  
(660 nm 30 nm)  
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS (with  
sampling frequency—32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz).  
Audio Output Level:  
DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:  
330 mV  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (’66 IHF/DIN): 80 dB/62 dB  
Frequency Response (8 ):  
Bass Boost:  
20 Hz to 20 kHz ( 1 dB)  
+4 dB 1 dB at 100 Hz  
Equalization (at DSP operation):  
Center frequency:  
Control range:  
63 Hz, 250 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 16 kHz  
8 dB  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A.,  
Canada, and U.K.)  
AM LOOP  
SUBWOOFER CENTER  
SURR-R  
SURR-L  
1(DVR/DVD) 2(DBS)  
3(VCR) DIGITAL OUT  
VOLTAGE  
ANTENNA  
CAUTION:SPEAKER  
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16  
SELECTOR  
110V  
Y
PB  
PR  
220V  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND  
PCM/  
STREAM  
BACK  
VCR  
RIGHT LEFT  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
FM 75  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
IN  
AM EXT  
DIGITAL IN  
DVD MULTI IN  
COAXIAL  
AUDIO  
230 -  
240V  
L
127V  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
R
AV  
VCR  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
SUB-  
VCR  
DVR  
OUT (REC)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COMPU  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO  
DVR  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
DBS  
IN  
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
WOOFER  
OUT (REC)  
(PLAY)  
(PLAY)  
OUT  
LINK-III  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
110V  
220V  
230 -  
240V  
127V  
CAUTION for mains (AC) line  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your  
mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the  
position of the voltage selector switch provided on  
the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset  
the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a  
damage or risk of fire/electric shock.  
EN  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0505RYMMDWJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER  
RX-F31S  
INSTRUCTIONS  
LVT1306-012A  
[A]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings, Cautions, and Others  
Caution––  
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely.  
The STANDBY/ON button in any position does not  
STANDBY/ON button!  
disconnect the mains line. The power can be remote controlled.  
CAUTION  
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:  
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.  
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.  
CAUTION  
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.  
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper  
or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)  
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted  
candles, on the apparatus.  
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be  
considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of  
these batteries must be followed strictly.  
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or  
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids such as  
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.  
Caution: Proper Ventilation  
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage.  
Locate the apparatus as follows:  
Front:  
Sides:  
Back:  
No obstructions open spacing.  
No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides.  
No obstructions in 15 cm from the back.  
No obstructions, place on the level surface.  
Bottom:  
In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated.  
Spacing 15 cm or more  
RX-F31S  
Front  
Wall or  
obstructions  
Stand height 15 cm or more  
Floor  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Parts identification ................................................ 2  
Getting started ...................................................... 4  
Before Installation .................................................................. 4  
Checking the supplied accessories ....................................... 4  
Putting batteries in the remote control ................................... 4  
Setting the voltage selector ................................................... 4  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ................................... 5  
Connecting the speakers ....................................................... 6  
Connecting video components .............................................. 7  
Connecting the power cord .................................................. 11  
Basic operations ................................................. 12  
1 Turn on the power ............................................................. 12  
2 Select the source to play .................................................. 12  
3 Adjust the volume ............................................................. 13  
Selecting the digital decode mode....................................... 13  
Adjusting the subwoofer audio position ............................... 14  
Activating TV Direct ............................................................. 14  
Turning off the sounds temporarily ...................................... 15  
Changing the display brightness.......................................... 15  
Turning off the power with the Sleep Timer ......................... 15  
Basic settings...................................................... 16  
Setting the speaker information automatically  
—Smart Surround Setup ............................................... 16  
Basic setting items ............................................................... 18  
Operation through on-screen display menus ....................... 18  
Menu operation buttons................................................... 18  
Setup menu configuration ............................................... 19  
Menu operating procedure................................................... 20  
Setting the items .................................................................. 21  
Setting the speakers ....................................................... 21  
Activating the EX/ES/PLIIx setting—EX/ES/PLIIx ........... 22  
Selecting the main or sub channel—DUAL MONO ......... 23  
Setting bass sound.......................................................... 23  
Using the Midnight mode—MIDNIGHT MODE ............... 24  
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminals  
—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3 ................................................... 24  
Selecting the component video input mode  
—DVD VIDEO INPUT/VCR VIDEO INPUT ............... 25  
Superimposing the menus—SUPERIMPOSE ................ 25  
Converting S-video signals into composite video signals  
—DOWN MIX............................................................ 25  
Converting composite video signals into S-video signals  
—Y/C SEPARATE ..................................................... 25  
Sound adjustments ............................................. 26  
Basic adjustment items........................................................ 26  
Operation through on-screen display menus ....................... 26  
Menu operation buttons................................................... 26  
Setup menu configuration ............................................... 27  
Menu operating procedure................................................... 28  
Adjusting the items .............................................................. 29  
Adjusting speaker output level ........................................ 29  
Adjusting the equalization patterns  
—DIGITAL EQ 63Hz/250Hz/1kHz/4kHz/16kHz ........ 30  
Adjusting the bass sounds .............................................. 30  
Adjusting the sound parameters for the  
Surround/DSP modes ............................................... 31  
Tuner operations ................................................. 32  
Tuning in to stations manually.............................................. 32  
Using preset tuning .............................................................. 32  
Selecting the FM reception mode ........................................ 33  
Creating realistic sound fields........................... 34  
Reproducing theater ambience ........................................... 34  
Introducing the Surround modes ......................................... 34  
Introducing the DSP modes................................................. 37  
Using the Surround/DSP modes ......................................... 38  
Activating the Surround/DSP modes ................................... 39  
AV COMPU LINK remote control system .......... 40  
Operating other JVC products ........................... 42  
Operating other manufacturers’ products ........ 44  
Troubleshooting .................................................. 47  
Specifications...................................................... 48  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control  
See pages in parentheses for details.  
Parts identification  
1
2
TV DIRECT button (14)  
Source selecting buttons (12, 14, 32, 33)  
DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, DVD MULTI, FM/AM  
Operating buttons for tuner (32, 33)  
3
4
( TUNING, FM MODE, TUNING 9, MEMORY  
On-screen display operation buttons (18, 26)  
Cursor buttons (3, 2, 5, ),  
SET  
5
6
7
8
9
SMART SURROUND SETUP button (16)  
EX/ES button (22)  
SOUND button (13, 14, 22, 24, 30, 31)  
SURROUND button (39)  
Adjusting buttons for speaker and subwoofer output levels (29)  
FRONT L +/–, FRONT R +/–, CENTER +/–, SUBWFR +/–,  
SURR L +/–, SURR R +/–, S.BACK +/–  
AUDIO button (12, 14)  
MUTING button (15)  
VOLUME +/– button (13)  
Mode selector (12, 14, 16, 18, 22, 24, 26, 29 – 32, 39)  
DVR, DVD, AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS  
MENU button (18, 26)  
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER  
-
REMOTE CONTROL RM SRXF31U  
1
2
p
q
w
e
p
r
t
• Numeric buttons (33)  
q
w
• Adjusting buttons (13, 14, 24, 30, 31)  
DECODE, EQ FREQ, BASS BOOST, C.TONE,  
EQ LEVEL 9, MIDNIGHT, EFFECT, EQ LEVEL (,  
A.POSITION  
e
y
u
i
o
DIMMER button (15)  
ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT button (12)  
TEST TONE button (17, 29)  
3
SLEEP button (15)  
r
SET  
The buttons which are not indicated here can be used for  
operating other JVC products or other manufacturers’ products.  
For details, see pages 42 to 46.  
4
5
• When operating this receiver, set the mode selector (e)  
to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
• When operating a JVC DVD recorder, set the mode  
selector (e) to “DVR.”  
t
• When operating a JVC DVD player, set the mode selector  
(e) to “DVD.”  
6
y
u
7
8
9
i
o
To open the cover of the  
remote control, push here  
then slide downward.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See pages in parentheses for details.  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
SOURCE  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
RX-F31  
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER  
/
MULTI JOG  
DVR MULTI  
DVR  
/
DVD  
VCR  
DBS  
TV  
FM / AM  
SET / TUNER PRESET  
STANDBY  
PHONES  
/
ON  
TV DIRECT  
SETTING  
ADJUST  
SURROUND  
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
1
2
STANDBY/ON button and standby lamp (12, 14, 32)  
Source lamps  
7
SETTING button (18, 32)  
ADJUST button (26, 32)  
SURROUND button (39)  
Remote sensor (4)  
Display window (see below)  
• SET button (17, 18, 26)  
8
9
p
q
w
DVD MULTI, DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, FM/AM  
• SOURCE SELECTOR (12, 14, 33)  
• MULTI JOG (18, 26, 33, 39)  
MASTER VOLUME control (13)  
PHONES jack (13)  
3
4
5
6
• TUNER PRESET button (33)  
TV DIRECT button (14)  
Display window  
1
2
3
4 5  
6
7
9
0
-
8
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
PL  
x
LPCM  
L
C
R
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
$
~
! @ #  
%
^
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
EQ indicator (30)  
C.TONE indicator (31)  
VIRTUAL SB indicator (38)  
and indicator (35)  
AUDIO P. (position) indicator (14)  
Neo:6 indicator (36)  
BASS indicator (30)  
Tuner operation indicators (32)  
TUNED, ST (stereo)  
-
=
ATT (attenuator) indicator (30)  
Digital signal format indicators (13, 34 – 36)  
LPCM (Linear PCM), DOLBY D (Dolby Digital), DTS, 96/24  
Signal and speaker indicators (15)  
DSP indicator (36, 37)  
AUTO SR (surround) indicator (39)  
3D indicator (36, 37)  
~
!
@
#
$
%
Main display  
Frequency unit indicators  
MHz (for FM station), kHz (for AM station)  
HP (headphones) indicator (13, 36, 37)  
9
0
AUTO MUTING indicator (33)  
SLEEP indicator (15)  
^
Rear panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
AM LOOP  
SUBWOOFER CENTER  
SURR-R  
SURR-L  
1(DVR/DVD) 2(DBS)  
3(VCR) DIGITAL OUT  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
ANTENNA  
CAUTION:SPEAKER  
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16  
Y
PB  
PR  
110V  
220V  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND  
PCM/  
STREAM  
BACK  
RIGHT LEFT  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
FM 75  
VCR  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL IN  
DVD MULTI IN  
AM EXT  
COAXIAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
230 -  
240V  
L
127V  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
R
AV  
VCR  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
SUB-  
VCR  
DVR  
OUT (REC)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COMPU  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO  
DVR  
OUT  
IN  
DBS  
IN  
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
WOOFER  
OUT (REC)  
(PLAY)  
(REC)  
(PLAY)  
OUT  
LINK-III  
7
8
9
p q  
w
1
2
3
Power cord (11)  
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (4)  
DVD MULTI IN jacks (8)  
SUBWOOFER, CENTER, SURR-R, SURR-L  
ANTENNA terminals (5)  
DIGITAL IN terminals (11)  
• Coaxial: 1(DVR/DVD)  
• Optical: 2(DBS), 3(VCR)  
DIGITAL OUT terminal (11)  
COMPONENT (Y, PB, PR) jacks (7 – 10)  
VCR IN, DVR/DVD IN, MONITOR OUT  
8
VIDEO terminals (7 – 10)  
VIDEO (composite video) jacks, S-VIDEO terminals  
• Input: DVR/DVD IN (PLAY), VCR IN (PLAY), DBS IN  
• Output: DVR OUT (REC), VCR OUT (REC), MONITOR OUT  
AUDIO jacks (7 – 10)  
• Input: DVR/DVD IN (PLAY), VCR IN (PLAY), DBS IN, TV IN  
• Output: DVR OUT (REC), VCR OUT (REC), MONITOR OUT  
SUBWOOFER OUT jack (6)  
AV COMPU LINK-III terminals (40)  
SPEAKERS terminals (6)  
FRONT, CENTER, SURROUND, SURROUND BACK  
4
5
9
p
q
w
6
7
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Putting batteries in the remote control  
Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first.  
Getting started  
1
2
3
1 Press and slide the battery cover on the back  
Before Installation  
of the remote control.  
2 Insert batteries.  
General precautions  
• Be sure your hands are dry.  
Turn the power off to all components.  
• Read the manuals supplied with the components you are going  
to connect.  
Make sure to match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).  
3 Replace the cover.  
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases,  
replace the batteries. Use two R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F) type dry-cell  
batteries.  
Locations  
• Install the receiver in a location that is level and protected from  
moisture and dust.  
• Supplied butteries are for initial setup. Replace for continued  
use.  
• The temperature around the receiver must be between –5˚C  
and 35˚C.  
CAUTION:  
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor  
ventilation could cause overheating and damage the receiver.  
• Leave sufficient distance between the receiver and the TV.  
Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells:  
• Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity:  
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).  
• Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may  
differ in voltage.  
• Always replace both batteries at the same time.  
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.  
Handling the receiver  
• Do not insert any metal object into the receiver.  
• Do not disassemble the receiver or remove screws, covers, or  
cabinet.  
• Do not expose the receiver to rain or moisture.  
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When  
unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage  
the cord.  
• When you are away on travel or otherwise for an extended  
period or time, remove the plug from the wall outlet. A small  
amount of power is always consumed while the power cord is  
connected to the wall outlet.  
When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at  
the remote sensor on the front panel.  
Remote sensor  
The receiver has a built-in cooling fan which operates  
while the receiver is turned on. Be sure to leave enough  
ventilation to obtain sufficient cooling effect.  
CAUTION:  
To operate the receiver, set  
the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all  
connections are completed.  
Checking the supplied accessories  
Check to be sure you have all of the following supplied  
accessories. If anything is missing, contact your dealer  
immediately.  
Setting the voltage selector  
Before connections, always do the following first if necessary.  
Select the correct voltage in VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear  
of the receiver by using a screw driver.  
• Remote control (× 1)  
• Batteries (× 2)  
• AM loop antenna (× 1)  
• FM antenna (× 1)  
• Check to be sure if the voltage mark is set to the voltage for  
your area where this unit plugs in.  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
• Digital coaxial cable (× 1)  
110V  
220V  
230 -  
240V  
127V  
Voltage mark  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas  
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.  
AM loop antenna  
(supplied)  
Snap the tabs on the loop  
into the slots of the base to  
assemble the AM loop  
antenna.  
If FM reception is poor, connect an  
outdoor FM antenna (not supplied).  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
FM 75  
If AM reception is poor, connect  
AM EXT  
COAXIAL  
an outdoor single vinyl-covered  
wire (not supplied).  
FM antenna (supplied)  
220V  
110V  
127V  
ANTENNA  
230 -  
240V  
NOTES  
AM antenna connection  
• If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl,  
remove the vinyl while twisting it as shown on the  
right.  
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch  
any other terminals, connecting cords and power  
cord. This could cause poor reception.  
Connect the AM loop antenna supplied to the AM LOOP  
terminals.  
Connect the white cord to the AM EXT terminal, and connect the  
black cord to the H terminal.  
Turn the loop until you have the best reception.  
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered  
wire (not supplied) to the AM EXT terminal. Keep the AM loop  
antenna connected.  
FM antenna connection  
Connect the FM antenna supplied to the FM 75 COAXIAL  
terminal as a temporary measure.  
Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally.  
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor FM antenna (not  
supplied). Before attaching a 75 coaxial cable with a  
connector (IEC or DIN 45325) , disconnect the supplied FM  
antenna.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the speakers  
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.  
Speaker Layout Diagram  
C
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
SW  
RS  
L
R
Center speaker (C)  
CAUTION:SPEAKER  
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16  
LS  
SB  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND  
BACK  
RIGHT LEFT  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
SPEAKERS  
Powered  
subwoofer  
(SW)  
AV  
COMPU  
LINK-III  
SUB-  
WOOFER  
OUT  
Right front speaker  
(R)  
Left front speaker  
(L)  
Surround back  
speaker (SB)  
Right surround  
speaker (RS)  
Left surround  
speaker (LS)  
Connecting the speakers  
Connecting the powered subwoofer  
By connecting a subwoofer, you can enhance the bass or  
reproduce the original LFE signals recorded in digital software.  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
Connect the input jack of a powered subwoofer to the  
SUBWOOFER OUT jack on the rear panel, using a cord  
with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).  
2
3
1
1
2
• Refer also to the manual supplied with your subwoofer.  
After connecting all the speakers and/or a subwoofer, set the  
speaker setting information properly to obtain the best possible  
surround effect. For details, see pages 16, 17, and 21 to 23.  
1 Twist and remove the insulation at the end of each  
NOTE  
speaker cord.  
You can place a subwoofer wherever you like since bass sound is  
non-directional. Normally place it in front of you.  
2 Press and hold the clamp of the speaker terminal  
(1), then insert the speaker cord (2).  
• For each speaker, connect the (+) and (–) terminals on the  
rear panel to the (+) and (–) terminals marked on the  
speakers.  
3 Release the finger from the clamp.  
CAUTIONS:  
• Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the  
speaker terminals (6 – 16 ).  
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to one speaker  
terminal.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting video components  
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.  
This receiver is equipped with the following video terminals—  
composite video, S-video, and component video terminals.  
• If your video components have S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or  
component video (Y, PB, PR) jacks, connect them using an S-  
video cable (not supplied) or component video cable (not  
supplied). By using these terminals, you can get a better picture  
quality in the order:  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their  
manuals.  
DO NOT use a TV through a VCR or a TV with a built-in  
VCR; otherwise, the picture may be distorted.  
Component > S-video > Composite  
IMPORTANT:  
CAUTION:  
Component video signals are transmitted only through component  
video output jacks. Therefore, if a recording video component and  
a playing video component are connected to the receiver through  
the video terminals of different type, you cannot record the picture.  
In addition, if the TV and a playing video component are  
connected to the receiver through the video terminals of different  
type, you cannot view the playback picture on the TV.  
On the other hand, S-video signals and composite video signals  
can be converted into each other and transmitted through the  
corresponding output jack. For details about the settings of the  
conversion, see page 25.  
If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic  
equalizer between the source components and this receiver, the  
sound output through this receiver may be distorted.  
If your video components have AV COMPU LINK terminal  
See also page 40 for detailed information about the connection  
and the AV COMPU LINK remote control system.  
7 Connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player with its stereo output jacks (DVR/DVD):  
Red  
White  
Stereo audio cable  
(not supplied)  
AUDIO  
White  
Red  
DVR  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
OUT (REC)  
DVD recorder or  
DVD player  
Å
ı
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Ç Î  
Composite video cable  
(not supplied)  
‰ Ï  
Ì
Y
PB  
PR  
VIDEO  
VCR  
IN  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
S-VIDEO  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
DVR  
OUT (REC)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
MONITOR  
OUT  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
COMPONENT  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Component video cable (not supplied)  
Å To left/right audio channel output  
NOTES  
ı Only for DVD recorder: To left/right audio channel  
input  
Ç Only for DVD recorder: To composite video input  
Î To composite video output  
To S-video output  
Ï Only for DVD recorder: To S-video input  
Ì To component video output  
• When connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player to the  
component video input jacks, make the component video input  
setting (DVD VIDEO INPUT) correctly. If you do not, you cannot  
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK  
remote control system cannot operate properly. For details, see  
page 25.  
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical  
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for  
a DVD recorder and DVD player is set to use the digital coaxial  
terminal (DIGITAL IN 1 (DVR/DVD)). For details of digital  
connection, see page 11.  
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player with its analog discrete output jacks (DVD MULTI IN):  
This connection is the best connection method for enjoying DVD Audio sounds. When a DVD Audio disc is played back, the original high-  
quality sounds can be reproduced only using this connection.  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.  
Monaural audio cable  
(not supplied)  
Red  
White  
Stereo audio cable  
(not supplied)  
Red  
AUDIO  
White  
White  
Stereo audio cable  
(not supplied)  
SUBWOOFER CENTER  
SURR-R  
SURR-L  
DVR  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
Red  
OUT (REC)  
DVD MULTI IN  
Å ı Ç Π‰  
220V  
110V  
230 -  
240V  
127V  
Ï
DVD recorder or  
DVD player  
Ì Ó È Ô  
Y
PB  
PR  
VIDEO  
Composite video  
VCR  
IN  
cable (not supplied)  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
S-VIDEO  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
DVR  
OUT (REC)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COMPONENT  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Component video cable (not supplied)  
Å To left/right front channel audio output  
NOTE  
ı Only for DVD recorder: To left/right front channel  
audio input  
Ç To left/right surround channel audio output  
Î To center channel audio output  
To subwoofer output  
When connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player to the  
component video input jacks, make the component video input  
setting (DVD VIDEO INPUT) correctly. If you do not, you cannot  
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK  
remote control system cannot operate properly. For details, see  
page 25.  
Ï Only for DVD recorder: To composite video input  
Ì To composite video output  
Ó To S-video output  
È Only for DVD recorder: To S-video input  
Ô To component video output  
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.  
About “DVD MULTI”  
When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source (see page 12), you can enjoy analog discrete output sound (5.1-channel reproduction)  
from the connected component.  
You may need to select analog discrete output mode on the component.  
NOTES  
• When using the headphones, you can listen to the front channel sounds (left and right) only. 3D HEADPHONE mode (see pages 36  
and 37) is not available.  
• When TV Direct is activated while “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, the source changes to the last selected source—  
“DVR/DVD,” “VCR,” and “DBS” (see page 14).  
• Surround/DSP modes (see pages 34 to 39) are not available for “DVD MULTI.”  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Connecting a VCR  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
Red  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.  
White  
Stereo audio cable (not supplied)  
White  
Red  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
VCR  
DBS  
IN  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
(PLAY)  
Å
ı
VCR  
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Ç
‰ Ï Ì  
Y
PB  
PR  
Î
Composite video  
VCR  
IN  
cable (not supplied)  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
VCR  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
COMPONENT  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Component video cable (not supplied)  
Å To left/right audio channel output  
NOTES  
ı To left/right audio channel input  
Ç To composite video input  
Î To composite video output  
To S-video output  
• When connecting a VCR to the component video input jacks,  
make the component video input setting (VCR VIDEO INPUT)  
correctly. If you do not, you cannot view the playback picture on  
the TV or the AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot  
operate properly. For details, see page 25.  
Ï To S-video input  
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical  
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for  
a video component other than DVD recorder and DVD player is  
set to use the digital optical terminal (DIGITAL IN 3 (VCR)). For  
details of digital connection, see page 11.  
Ì To component video output  
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.  
7 Connecting a DBS tuner  
White  
Stereo audio cable (not supplied)  
VCR  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
TV  
IN  
Red  
Å
DBS tuner  
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Ç
ı
Composite video cable (not supplied)  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
VCR  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Å To left/right audio channel output  
ı To composite video output  
Ç To S-video output  
NOTE  
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical  
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for a  
TV is set to use the digital optical terminal (DIGITAL IN 2 (DBS)).  
For details of digital connection, see page 11.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Connecting a TV  
Connect the TV to the appropriate MONITOR OUT jacks to view the playback picture from any other connected video components.  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.  
Red  
White  
L
Stereo audio cable  
White  
Red  
(not supplied)  
Å ı  
R
SUB-  
WOOFER  
OUT  
TV  
DBS  
IN  
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Ç
Î ‰  
Y
PB  
PR  
VCR  
Composite video cable  
(not supplied)  
IN  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
DBS  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
S-video cable (not supplied)  
COMPONENT  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Component video cable (not supplied)  
Å To left/right audio channel input  
NOTES  
ı To left/right audio channel output  
Ç To composite video input  
Î To S-video input  
To component video input  
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.  
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical  
cable. For details of digital connection, see page 11.  
When connecting a TV through the COMPONENT MONITOR  
OUT jacks, the on-screen display does not appear on the TV  
screen (see page 25).  
IMPORTANT:  
Audio signals come out through the MONITOR OUT (L/R) jacks  
ONLY when TV Direct is in use (see page 14).  
Connect these jacks to the audio input jacks corresponding to the  
video connection; otherwise, no sound comes out of the TV  
speaker when TV Direct is in use.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Digital output terminal  
You can connect any digital components which have an optical  
digital input terminal.  
Digital connection  
This receiver is equipped with three DIGITAL IN terminals—one  
digital coaxial terminal and two digital optical terminals—and one  
DIGITAL OUT terminal.  
To reproduce the digital sound, use the digital connection in  
addition to the analog connection methods described on pages 7  
to 10.  
220V  
110V  
127V  
230 -  
240V  
Digital coaxial cable (supplied: 1 cable)  
Digital optical cable (not supplied)  
DIGITAL OUT  
PCM/  
STREAM  
Turn off all components before making connections.  
Connecting digital recording equipment to the  
DIGITAL OUT terminal enables you to perform  
digital-to-digital recording.  
• When you connect other components, refer also to their  
manuals.  
7 Digital input terminals  
220V  
110V  
127V  
NOTE  
230 -  
240V  
The digital signal format transmitted through the DIGITAL OUT  
terminal is the same as that of the input signal. For example,  
when the DTS signals are input, the DTS signals are transmitted.  
When the component has a digital coaxial output  
terminal, connect it to the 1(DVR/DVD) terminal,  
using a digital coaxial cable (supplied).  
Connecting the power cord  
When all the audio/video connections have been made, connect  
the AC power plug to the wall outlet. Make sure that the plugs are  
inserted firmly. The standby lamp lights in red.  
CAUTIONS:  
1(DVR/DVD)  
DIGITAL IN  
2(DBS)  
3(VCR)  
• Do not plug in before setting the VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch  
on the rear of the receiver and all connection procedures are  
complete.  
• Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.  
• Do not alter, twist or pull the power cord, or put anything heavy  
on it, which may cause fire, electric shock, or other accidents.  
• If the cord is damaged, consult a dealer and have the power  
cord replaced with a new one.  
When the component has a digital optical output  
terminal, connect it to the 2(DBS) or 3(VCR)  
terminal, using a digital optical cable (not supplied).  
NOTES  
• Keep the power cord away from the connecting cables and the  
antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen  
interference.  
Before connecting a digital  
optical cable, unplug the  
protective plug.  
• The preset settings such as preset channels and sound  
adjustment may be erased in a few days in the following cases:  
– When you unplug the power cord.  
– When a power failure occurs.  
NOTES  
• When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have  
been set for use with the following components:  
– 1(DVR/DVD): For DVD recorder or DVD player  
– 2(DBS):  
– 3(VCR):  
For DBS tuner  
For VCR  
If you connect other components, change the digital input  
(DIGITAL IN) terminal setting correctly. See “Setting the digital  
input (DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3” on page 24.  
• Select the digital input mode. See “Selecting the analog or  
digital input mode” on page 12.  
• When you want to operate the connected component (except  
DBS tuner) using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system  
(see pages 40 and 41), connect them also as described on  
pages 7 to 10.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Select the source to play  
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until the source name  
you want appears on the display.  
Basic operations  
On the front panel:  
The source lamp corresponding to the selected source lights in  
red.  
• As you turn SOURCE SELECTOR, the source changes as  
follows:  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
The on-screen display appears on the TV screen for 5 seconds  
(except “turning off the sounds temporarily”) to show the  
indication in the following cases:  
– When you select the source (see right column).  
– When you adjust the volume (see page 13).  
– When you turn off the sounds temporarily (see page 15).  
– When you select the Surround/DSP modes (see page 39).  
To cancel the function, set “SUPERIMPOSE” to “SUPERIMPOSE:  
OFF” (see page 25).  
DVD MULTI  
DVR/DVD (DGT)  
DBS (DIGITAL)  
VCR (DIGITAL)  
TV (DIGITAL)  
(Back to the beginning)  
FM  
AM  
DVD MULTI:  
Select for the DVD player using the analog  
discrete output mode (5.1-channel  
reproduction).  
1
2
3
DVR/DVD (DGT) : Select for the DVD recorder or DVD player.  
*
VCR (DIGITAL) : Select for the VCR.  
*
DBS (DIGITAL) : Select for the DBS tuner.  
*
Source lamps  
TV (DIGITAL) :  
Select for the TV.  
*
FM:  
AM:  
Select for an FM broadcast.  
Select for an AM broadcast.  
1
2
From the remote control:  
Press one of the source selecting buttons.  
• For the tuner, press FM/AM. Each time you press FM/AM, the  
band alternates between “FM” and “AM.”  
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control, set  
the mode selector to  
3
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
* Selecting the analog or digital input mode  
For a component you have connected using both the analog  
connection and the digital connection methods (see pages 7 to 11),  
you need to select the correct input mode.  
You can select the digital input only for sources which you have  
selected digital input terminals for. (See “Setting the digital input  
(DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3” on page 24.)  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Press ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT to select the  
analog or digital input mode.  
1 Turn on the power  
AUDIO on the  
• Each time you press the button, the input mode alternates  
between the analog input (“ANALOG”) and the digital input  
(“DGTL AUTO”).  
Press  
STANDBY/ON (or  
This setting is memorized for each source.  
remote control).  
The standby lamp goes off and the source lamp of the current  
source lights in red.  
DGTL AUTO:  
Select for the digital input mode. The receiver  
automatically detects the incoming signal  
format, then the digital signal format indicator  
(LPCM, DOLBY D, DTS, or DTS 96/24) for  
the detected signal lights up.  
Current source name appears.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
ANALOG:  
Select for the analog input mode.  
Initial setting: DGTL AUTO  
To turn off the power (into standby)  
NOTE  
Press  
again.  
STANDBY/ON (or  
AUDIO on the remote control)  
When you select “DVD MULTI,FM,or “AM” as the source, the  
analog and digital input mode is not available.  
The standby lamp lights in red.  
NOTE  
A small amount of power is consumed in standby mode. To turn  
the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Adjust the volume  
Selecting the digital decode mode  
If the following symptoms occur while playing Dolby Digital or DTS  
software with “DGTL AUTO” selected (see page 12), follow the  
procedure below:  
• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.  
• Noise comes out while searching for or skipping chapters or  
tracks.  
To increase the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME  
control clockwise (or press VOLUME + on the  
remote control).  
To decrease the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME  
control counterclockwise (or press VOLUME – on  
the remote control).  
• When you adjust the volume, the volume level indication  
appears on the display for a while.  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Press SOUND, then press DECODE to select  
“DOLBY D” or “DTS.”  
• Each time you press DECODE, the digital decode mode  
changes as follows:  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
CAUTION:  
Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any  
sources. If the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of  
sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin  
your speakers.  
DGTL AUTO  
DOLBY D  
(Back to the beginning)  
DTS  
To play back software encoded with Dolby Digital, select  
“DOLBY D.”  
To play back software encoded with DTS, select “DTS.”  
NOTE  
The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0”  
(minimum) to “50” (maximum).  
NOTES  
• When you turn off the power or select another source,  
“DOLBY D” or “DTS” is canceled and the digital decode mode is  
automatically reset to “DGTL AUTO.”  
• After pressing SOUND, the numeric buttons work for sound  
adjustments. To use the numeric buttons to operate your target  
source, press the corresponding source selecting button before  
operation; otherwise, the remote control may not work as you  
intend.  
Listening with headphones  
You can enjoy not only stereo software but also multi-channel  
software through the headphones. (Sounds are down-mixed to the  
front channels while playing multi-channel software.)  
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the  
front panel to activate the HEADPHONE mode.  
The HP (headphone) indicator lights up on the display.  
You can also enjoy the Surround/DSP mode through the  
headphones—3D HEADPHONE mode. For details, see pages  
36 and 37.  
• Disconnecting a pair of headphones from the PHONES jack  
cancels the HEADPHONE (or 3D HEADPHONE) mode and  
activates the speakers.  
The following digital signal format indicators on the display  
indicate what type of signal comes into the receiver.  
LPCM:  
Lights up when Linear PCM signal comes in.  
DOLBY D: • Lights up when Dolby Digital signal comes in.  
• Flashes when “DOLBY D” is selected for any  
software other than Dolby Digital.  
CAUTION:  
DTS:  
• Lights up when conventional DTS signal comes  
in.  
• Flashes when “DTS” is selected for any  
software other than DTS.  
Be sure to turn down the volume:  
• Before connecting or putting on headphones, as high volume  
can damage both the headphones and your hearing.  
• Before removing headphones, as high volume may output from  
the speakers.  
DTS 96/24: Lights up when DTS 96/24 signal comes in.  
NOTE  
When “DGTL AUTO” cannot recognize the incoming signal, no  
digital signal format indicator lights up on the display.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Activating TV Direct  
TV Direct enables you to use this receiver as an AV selector  
while the receiver is turned off.  
When TV Direct is activated, the pictures and sounds go from the  
video components such as DVD player to the TV through this  
receiver. Thus, you can use the video components and the TV as  
if they were connected directly.  
• This function takes effect for the following sources—DVR/DVD,  
VCR, and DBS.  
To activate (or deactivate) TV Direct, follow the procedure below:  
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control, set  
the mode selector to  
1 Press TV DIRECT.  
All the indications disappear, then the source lamp of the  
current source lights in green.  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
2 Turn on the video component and TV.  
3 Select the target video component.  
On the front panel:  
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until one of the  
source lamps—DVR/DVD, VCR, or DBS—lights  
in green.  
From the remote control:  
Press one of the source selecting buttons—  
DVR/DVD, VCR, or DBS.  
The source lamp corresponding to the selected source lights  
in green.  
Adjusting the subwoofer audio  
position  
If the subwoofer sound is much reinforced for stereo sound  
compared to the sound reproduced with multi-channel, set the  
subwoofer audio position. The subwoofer output level is  
automatically decreased by the selected value when you are  
listening in stereo.  
To cancel TV Direct and turn off the receiver, press  
STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or  
control).  
AUDIO on the remote  
The receiver is turned off and the standby lamp lights up.  
The AUDIO P. indicator lights up when this function is activated.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
To cancel TV Direct and turn on the receiver, press TV DIRECT  
again.  
The receiver is turned on and the source lamp currently selected  
lights in red.  
From the remote control ONLY:  
NOTES  
Press SOUND, then press A.POSITION repeatedly.  
• When TV Direct is activated, you cannot enjoy any of the sound  
effects the receiver produces, and cannot use the speakers  
connected to the receiver.  
• When TV Direct is activated while “DVD MULTI,FM,or “AM” is  
selected as the source, the source changes to the last selected  
source—“DVR/DVD,VCR,or “DBS.”  
• Each time you press A.POSITION, the subwoofer audio position  
level changes as follows:  
AUDIO P. indicator  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
–2  
–4  
–6  
OFF (canceled)  
The smaller the number becomes, the more the level decreases  
automatically when listening in stereo.  
• If no adjustment is required, select “OFF” (initial setting).  
NOTES  
• The minimum subwoofer output level is –10 dB.  
Ex.: When setting the subwoofer output level to “–8 (dB)” and  
the subwoofer audio position to “–4 (dB),the subwoofer  
output level when listening in stereo will be –10 dB.  
To adjust the subwoofer output level, see page 29.  
• This function is not available when the Surround/DSP mode is  
activated or “DVD MULTI” is selected.  
• After pressing SOUND, the numeric buttons work for sound  
adjustments. To use the numeric buttons to operate your target  
source, press the corresponding source selecting button before  
operation; otherwise, the remote control may not work as you  
intend.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To cancel the Sleep Timer:  
Press SLEEP repeatedly so that “SLEEP OFF” appears on the  
display. (The SLEEP indicator goes off.)  
• The Sleep Timer is also canceled when:  
You turn off the receiver, or  
Turning off the sounds temporarily  
From the remote control ONLY:  
– TV Direct is activated.  
Press MUTING to turn off the sound through all  
connected speakers and headphones.  
“MUTING” appears on the display and the volume turns off.  
Basic adjustment of auto memory  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
This receiver memorizes sound settings for each source:  
• when you turn off the power, and  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
• when you change the source.  
To restore the sound, press MUTING again.  
When you change the source, the memorized settings for the  
newly selected source are automatically recalled.  
The following can be stored for each source:  
• Analog/digital input mode (see page 12)  
• Subwoofer audio position (see page 14)  
• Midnight mode (see page 24)  
• Speaker output level (see page 29)  
• Digital equalization pattern (see page 30)  
• Bass boost (see page 30)  
• Pressing VOLUME +/– (or turning MASTER VOLUME control  
on the front panel) also restores the sound.  
Changing the display brightness  
You can dim the display—Dimmer.  
• Subwoofer phase (see page 30)  
• Input attenuator mode (see page 30)  
• Surround/DSP mode selection (see page 39)  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Press DIMMER repeatedly.  
• Each time you press the button, the display brightness changes  
as follows:  
NOTE  
If the source is “FM” or “AM,” you can assign a different setting  
for each band.  
DIMMER 1:  
Dims the display slightly.  
Dims the blue illumination slightly.  
Dims the display more than DIMMER 1.  
Dims the blue illumination slightly (more than  
DIMMER 1).  
DIMMER 2:  
Signal and speaker indicators on the display  
Signal indicators  
Speaker indicators  
DIMMER 3:  
Turns off the display and blue illumination.  
(Temporarily canceled when you operate the  
receiver.*)  
L
C
R
L
C
R
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P.  
DIMMER OFF: Cancels the Dimmer (normal display).  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO :
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
x
S.WFRLFE  
OLBY D  
DTS
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
* Except when activating or deactivating TV Direct.  
LS SB RS  
The signal indicators light up as follows:  
Turning off the power with the Sleep  
Timer  
L:  
When digital input is selected: Lights up when the  
left channel signal comes in.  
When analog input is selected: Always lights up.  
When digital input is selected: Lights up when the  
right channel signal comes in.  
When analog input is selected: Always lights up.  
Lights up when the center channel signal comes in.  
You can fall asleep while listening to music—Sleep Timer.  
R:  
C:  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Press SLEEP repeatedly.  
• Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes in 10  
minute intervals. The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display.  
LS*: Lights up when the left surround channel signal comes  
in.  
RS*: Lights up when the right surround channel signal comes  
SLEEP indicator  
in.  
SB: Lights up when the surround back channel signal  
comes in.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
LFE: Lights up when the LFE channel signal comes in.  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
* When monaural surround signal comes in, only “S” lights up.  
10  
20  
30  
40  
90  
50  
80  
60  
NOTE  
When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, all the signal  
indicators except “SB” light up.  
OFF (canceled)  
70  
When the shut-off time comes:  
The receiver turns off automatically.  
The speaker indicators light up as follows:  
S . WFR  
• The subwoofer indicator (  
) lights up when  
“SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER:YES.” For details,  
see page 21.  
• The other speaker indicators light up only when the  
corresponding speaker is set to “SMALLor “LARGE,and  
also when required for the current playback.  
To check or change the remaining time until the shut-off  
time:  
Press SLEEP once.  
The remaining time (in minutes) until the shut-off time appears.  
To change the shut-off time, press SLEEP repeatedly.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Basic settings  
When operating the receiver using the remote control,  
set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
To obtain the best possible sound effect from Surround/DSP  
modes (see pages 34 to 39), you need to set up the speaker and  
subwoofer information after all the connections are completed.  
From pages 16 to 25, how to set speakers and other basic items  
of the receiver are explained.  
1
Take your position where you listen to the  
sound.  
• Make sure speaker cables are connected firmly.  
Setting the speaker information  
automatically—Smart Surround Setup  
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of  
the important elements to obtain the best possible sound effect  
from the Surround/DSP modes.  
By using Smart Surround Setup, the following are automatically  
calculated by one simple action—clapping hands.  
• Speaker distance (compared to that of the closest speaker)  
• Speaker output level (except the subwoofer)  
NOTES  
2 Press and hold SMART SURROUND SETUP  
• Before starting Smart Surround Setup, set the speaker  
information correctly (SMALL, LARGE, or NO) according to your  
speakers except the subwoofer (see page 21).  
• The speakers which are set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see  
page 21) are not indicated clearly on the TV screen.  
• When the setting is made by Smart Surround Setup, the  
speaker distance and output level you have set before will be  
inactive.  
until “SETTING UP” flashes.  
*1  
*2  
*3  
SMART SURROUND SETUP  
L
C
R
You can see the setting process on the TV screen and the  
display during Smart Surround Setup. If you have turned off the  
display, cancel the Dimmer (see page 15); otherwise, you  
cannot see the information on the display.  
SETTING UP  
SB  
LS  
RS  
*6  
*4  
• Smart Surround Setup will not be done correctly if you or other  
object blocks the sound.  
• When you change your speakers, do the following procedure  
again.  
*5  
*1  
*2  
*3  
*4  
*5  
*6  
L: Left front speaker  
C: Center speaker  
R: Right front speaker  
RS: Right surround speaker  
SB: Surround back speaker  
LS: Left surround speaker  
In this section, the on-screen display on the TV screen is used  
for explaining.  
• The on-screen display does not appear on the TV screen  
when connecting the TV through the COMPONENT  
MONITOR OUT jacks (see page 10).  
3 When “CLAPYOUR HANDS.appears, clap  
your hands over your head once while the  
indications still remain.  
• On the display, SETTING UP” stops flashing.  
The receiver starts detecting the level of the sound coming  
through each speaker (except the subwoofer).  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When your clapping sound is detected successfully  
When your clapping sound is not detected correctly  
• On the TV screen, “SUCCESSFUL,RESULT,” and the setting  
“SETTING UP” appears again after one of the following  
values appear. The setting values are shown for about 12  
messages. In this case, repeat step 3.  
seconds.  
Ex.:  
SILENT:  
• The receiver detects sound from only the left  
and right front speakers.  
• The receiver detects no sound from the front  
speakers and detects sound from at least one of  
the other speakers.  
*7  
SMART SURROUND SETUP  
L+2  
C 0 R+2  
STD+0.3m  
SILENT-ALL: The receiver cannot detect any sound from any  
+0.3m  
speaker for about 10 seconds.  
AGAIN:  
• The receiver cannot detect sound from the left  
or right front speaker.  
• The receiver fails to calculate the speakers'  
output level and difference of each speaker's  
position in distance.  
LS+6 SUCCESSFUL RS+6  
+1.2m  
RESULT  
+1.2m  
*8  
*9  
SB+4  
+0.6m  
In the following cases, set the speakers manually.  
• On the display, SUCCESSFULappears, then the setting  
values are shown as follows for about 12 seconds:  
Ex.:  
• When “SILENT” appears twice in succession  
The setting is partially made. (The distance of the speakers  
from which sound has not been detected is set to “+9.0m  
(+30ft).)  
*7  
The receiver exits from Smart Surround Setup.  
• When “MANUALappears  
The receiver fails to detect the sound three times. The receiver  
exits from Smart Surround Setup.  
*8  
*9  
To cancel Smart Surround Setup, press SMART SURROUND  
SETUP while “SETTING UP” flashes.  
• No other operations can be accepted after “SETTING UP” stops  
flashing. Complete the Smart Surround Setup.  
R
LS  
L
RS  
C
SB  
To check the current setting made by Smart Surround Setup,  
press SMART SURROUND SETUP while the receiver is in  
normal operation mode.  
*7  
Standard channel (the closest speaker).  
This speaker position now works as the reference  
position (“0m/ft”) and other speakers’ distance is  
shown by the difference with this reference speaker  
position.  
The setting values appear. On the display, the setting values are  
shown one after another.  
• The current setting is not indicated but “MANUALappears if you  
change the following settings after using Smart Surround Setup:  
– If you change speaker distance manually.  
*8  
*9  
Difference of each speaker position in distance (in  
meters or feet).  
Each speaker’s output level (–6 to +6).  
– If you change one of the speaker sizes either from “NO” to  
“SMALLor “LARGE,or from “SMALLor “LARGE” to “NO.”  
To check the current setting, see each setting item of the  
speaker distance (see page 22) and the speaker output level  
(see page 29).  
When finishing displaying the setting values  
• If you have not used Smart Surround Setup, “NO S.S.S.”  
appears.  
On the TV screen, “COMPLETED” appears, then “TEST TONE”  
and “END” appear. On the display, TEST? END?” appears.  
To adjust the speakers’ output levels manually, press TEST  
TONE (see page 29).  
To erase the on-screen display, press SET or any button except  
TEST TONE.  
• The receiver returns to normal operation mode automatically if  
no operations are done for about 10 seconds.  
Ex.:  
NOTES  
• The speaker distance and output level manually set will be  
applied instead of those set by using Smart Surround Setup in  
the following cases:  
– When you change one of the speaker distance (see page 22).  
– When you change one of the speaker size either from “NO” to  
“SMALLor “LARGE,or from “SMALLor “LARGE” to “NO”  
(see page 21).  
• When you want to adjust the speaker distance and output level  
manually, see pages 22 and 29.  
• When the headphone is in use or “DVD MULTI” is selected as  
the source, the receiver returns to normal operation mode  
without showing “TEST TONE.”  
SMART SURROUND SETUP  
L+2  
+0.3m  
C 0 R+2  
STD+0.3m  
LS+6  
+1.2m  
TEST TONE RS+6  
END  
+1.2m  
SB+4  
+0.9m  
• Do not clap your hands so hard that it may hurt your hands.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic setting items  
You can adjust the following items. See pages in parentheses for details.  
You cannot select the items which is not available with the current setting.  
• The name of the item shown below is the on-screen display indication and the name in parentheses is the display indication.  
Items and to do  
SUBWOOFER (SUBWOOFER)  
DUAL MONO (DUAL MONO)  
Register your subwoofer. (21)  
Select the Dual Mono sound channel. (23)  
FRONT SPK (FRONT SPK)  
SUBWFR OUT (SUBWFR OUT)  
Register your front speaker size. (21)  
Select sounds emitted from the subwoofer. (23)  
CENTER SPK (CENTER SPK)  
CROSSOVER (CROSSOVER)  
Register your center speaker size. (21)  
Select the cutoff frequency to the subwoofer. (23)  
SURR. SPK (SURRND SPK)  
LFE ATT (LFE ATT)  
Register your surround speaker size. (21)  
Attenuate the bass (LFE) sounds. (23)  
SURR. BACK SPK (S BACK SPK)  
MIDNIGHT (MIDNIGHT)  
Register your surround back speaker size. (21)  
Reproduce a powerful sound at night. (24)  
DISTANCE UNIT (DIST UNIT)  
DIGITAL IN 1 (DIGITAL IN1)  
Select the measuring unit for the speaker distance. (22)  
Select the component connected to the digital coaxial  
terminal—1(DVR/DVD). (24)  
FL SPK DISTANCE (FRNT L DIST)*  
Register the distance from the left front speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
DIGITAL IN 2 (DIGITAL IN2)  
Select the component connected to the digital optical  
terminal—2(DBS). (24)  
FR SPK DISTANCE (FRNT R DIST)*  
Register the distance from the right front speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
DIGITAL IN 3 (DIGITAL IN3)  
Select the component connected to the digital optical  
terminal—3(VCR). (24)  
C SPK DISTANCE (CENTER DIST)*  
Register the distance from the center speaker to your listening DVD VIDEO (DVD VIDEO)  
point. (22)  
Select the type of video terminal used for the DVD recorder or  
DVD player. (25)  
LS SPK DISTANCE (SURR L DIST)*  
Register the distance from the left surround speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
VCR VIDEO (VCR VIDEO)  
Select the type of video terminal used for the VCR. (25)  
RS SPK DISTANCE (SURR R DIST)*  
Register the distance from the right surround speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
SUPERIMPOSE (SUPERIMPOSE)  
Select to superimpose the menus on the TV screen. (25)  
DOWN MIX (DOWN MIX)  
SB SPK DISTANCE (S BACK DIST)*  
Register the distance from the surround back speaker to your  
listening point. (22)  
Select to convert S-video signals into composite video signals.  
(25)  
Y/C SEPARATE (Y/C SEP.)  
EX/ES/PLIIx (EX/ES/PLIIx)  
Select to convert composite video signals into S-video signals.  
(25)  
Select the EX/ES/PLIIx reproduction mode. (22)  
* If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17, these settings are not required.  
Operation through on-screen display menus  
You can make adjustments to the basic settings easily by using the on-screen display menus.  
Menu operation buttons  
From the remote control:  
On the front panel:  
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control,  
set the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Button / JOG  
To do  
SETTING button show setting item previously selected.  
SET button  
move to the selected menu or return to the  
previous SETTING MENU.  
Button  
To do  
MULTI JOG  
• select a menu or an item.  
• change a setting.  
MENU button show “TOP MENU.”  
5 / buttons select a menu or an item.  
SET button  
move to the selected menu or return to the  
previous SETTING MENU.  
2 / 3 buttons change a setting.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menu configuration  
• Items on the menus shown below are all set to the initial values when shipping from the factory.  
• Some of the menus or some items on the menu cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted depending on the current settings and the  
connections. (For details, see the respective explanations in this section.)  
TOP MENU  
SETTING MENU (5)  
SETTING MENU (1)  
TOP MENU  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
SETTING MENU (1)  
SUBWOOFER  
5
SUBWOOFER  
FRONT SPK  
CENTER SPK  
SURR. SPK  
:
NO  
: LARGE  
: SMALL  
: SMALL  
FRONT SPEAKER  
SURR. BACK SPK : SMALL  
CENTER SPEAKER  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
SURROUND SPEAKER  
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
SETTING MENU (2)  
SETTING MENU (2)  
DISTANCE UNIT  
5
DISTANCE UNIT  
:meter  
FL SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
FR SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
C SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
LS SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
RS SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
SB SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m  
FL SPK DISTANCE  
FR SPK DISTANCE  
CENTER SPK DISTANCE  
LS SPK DISTANCE  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
RS SPK DISTANCE  
SB SPK DISTANCE  
SETTING MENU (3)  
SETTING MENU (3)  
5
EX/ES/PL x  
DUAL MONO  
EX/ES/PL x :  
DUAL MONO :  
SUBWFR OUT :  
CROSSOVER :  
AUTO  
MAIN  
150Hz  
0dB  
LFE ATT  
MIDNIGHT  
:
:
SUBWOOFER OUT  
CROSSOVER  
OFF  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
LFE ATT  
MIDNIGHT MODE  
SETTING MENU (4)  
SETTING MENU (4)  
DIGITAL IN 1  
DIGITAL IN 2  
DIGITAL IN 3  
DVD VIDEO INPUT  
VCR VIDEO INPUT  
5
DIGITAL IN 1: DVR/DVD  
DIGITAL IN 2:  
DIGITAL IN 3:  
DBS  
VCR  
S/C  
S/C  
DVD VIDEO  
VCR VIDEO  
:
:
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
SETTING MENU (5)  
SETTING MENU (5)  
SUPERIMPOSE  
DOWN MIX  
5
SUPERIMPOSE :  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
DOWN MIX  
:
Y/C SEPARATE:  
Y/C SEPARATE  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
SETTING MENU (1)  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu operating procedure  
When operating, the on-screen display appears on the TV screen regardless of the SUPERIMPOSE setting (see page 25).  
Before you start, remember...  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.  
In this section, the operation of the remote control is used for explaining.  
Ex.:When setting DIGITAL IN 1 terminal.  
Operations  
On the TV screen  
On the display  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
1 To show “TOP MENU,press MENU.  
x
ATT  
TOP MENU  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
“SETTING” appears.  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
“TOP MENU” appears.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
2 To select “SETTING MENU,press SET.  
x
ATT  
SETTING MENU (1)  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
5
SUBWOOFER  
FRONT SPK  
CENTER SPK  
SURR. SPK  
:
NO  
: LARGE  
: SMALL  
: SMALL  
The submenu previously  
selected appears.  
SURR. BACK SPK : SMALL  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
The setting item previously selected  
appears.  
3 To select the desired submenu, press  
5 or repeatedly.  
There are five screens from “SETTING MENU (1)”  
to “SETTING MENU (5).” To change the screen,  
simply pressing 5 or repeatedly.You can go to  
the next/previous screen.  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.  
Button indications on the screen  
The buttons for operating the menu are shown on the TV screen.You can operate the menu with these buttons.  
TOP MENU  
DIGITAL IN 1  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
23:OPERATE  
:BACK  
Usable buttons and their functions  
Usable buttons and their functions  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
x
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
4 Press SET.  
DIGITAL IN 1  
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3  
The current setting of the  
selected item appears.  
23:OPERATE  
:BACK  
The selected submenu appears.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
5 To select the appropriate setting, press  
2 or 3 repeatedly, then press SET.  
x
ATT  
DIGITAL IN 1  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3  
The on-screen display returns to the previous  
SETTING MENU. In this example, “SETTING MENU  
(4)” appears on the TV screen and “DIGITAL IN1”  
appears on the display.  
DVR/DVD  
TV  
DBS  
VCR  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG, then press  
SET.  
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set other items  
if necessary.  
NOTES  
To return to “TOP MENU,” press MENU on the remote control.  
To exit from menu operations, press MENU on the remote control when “TOP MENU” appears. On the front panel, press SETTING  
when a menu except “TOP MENU” appears.  
• The setting item previously selected can be shown on the TV screen by pressing SETTING on the front panel when the receiver is in  
normal operation mode.  
Setting the items  
When performing the basic settings viewing the indications on the display, the indications are slightly different from what is shown  
on the on-screen display.  
This is because of the limited number of characters shown on the display.  
Ex.: • “SUBWOOFER:YES” is shown as “SUBWFR:YES” on the display.  
• “MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF” is shown as “NIGHT: OFF” on the display.  
7 Setting the speaker size—FRONT SPEAKER,  
CENTER SPEAKER, SURROUND SPEAKER,  
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER  
Setting the speakers  
7 Setting subwoofer information—SUBWOOFER  
Each time the receiver turns on, the receiver detects the  
subwoofer connection and automatically changes the setting of  
the subwoofer.  
When you want to change the setting manually, select either one  
below.  
Register the sizes of all the connected speakers.  
LARGE  
SMALL  
NO  
Select when the cone speaker size is larger than  
12 cm.  
Select when the cone speaker size is smaller than  
12 cm.  
SUBWOOFER:YES  
Select when you have connected a subwoofer.  
Select when you have disconnected a speaker.  
(Not selectable for the front speakers.)  
S . WFR  
The subwoofer indicator (  
) lights up on the display.You  
can adjust the subwoofer output level (see page 29).  
SUBWOOFER: NO  
Initial setting: SMALL for all speakers*  
Select when you have disconnected a subwoofer. Selecting  
this changes the front speaker size to “LARGE” (see right  
column).  
* When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER: NO,the front  
speaker size is fixed to “LARGE” (and you cannot select  
“SMALL).  
NOTES  
NOTE  
• If you have selected “SMALLfor the front speaker size, you  
cannot select “LARGE” for other speakers.  
You need to change the setting each time you turn on the receiver  
if you want to change the subwoofer information set automatically.  
• When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:  
SMALL,” you cannot select “LARGE” for the surround back  
speaker.  
• When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:  
NO,” the surround back speaker is fixed to “NO.”  
• If you change one of the speaker sizes either from “NO” to  
“SMALLor “LARGE,or from “SMALLor “LARGE” to “NO,the  
distance manually set will be applied instead of those set by  
using Smart Surround Setup.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Setting the speaker distance  
Activating the EX/ES/PLIIx setting  
—EX/ES/PLIIx  
Depending on this setting, available Surround modes for digital  
multi-channel software vary—EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel)  
reproduction or 5.1-channel reproduction. Select an appropriate  
setting for your enjoyment.  
• For details about relation between EX/ES/PLIIx setting and  
available Surround mode, see page 38.  
To activate the Surround mode, see page 39.  
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of  
the important elements to obtain the best possible sound effect  
from the Surround/DSP modes.  
By referring to the speaker distance, the receiver automatically  
sets the delay time of the sound through each speaker so that  
sounds through all the speakers can reach you at the same time.  
• If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17,  
this setting is not required.  
7 Measuring unit—DISTANCE UNIT  
Select which measuring unit you use.  
EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO  
According to the incoming signal, an appropriate Surround  
mode is applied.  
DISTANCE UNIT: meter Select to set the distance in meters.  
DISTANCE UNIT: feet  
Select to set the distance in feet.  
• For Dolby Digital Surround EX and DTS-ES software, 6.1-  
channel reproduction is applied*.  
• For other multi-channel (more than 4 channel) encoded  
software, 5.1-channel reproduction is applied.  
Initial setting: DISTANCE UNIT: meter  
7 Speaker distance—  
EX/ES/PLIIx: ON  
FL SPK DISTANCE (for the left front speaker),  
FR SPK DISTANCE (for the right front speaker),  
CENTER SPK DISTANCE (for the center speaker),  
LS SPK DISTANCE (for the left surround speaker),  
RS SPK DISTANCE (for the right surround speaker),  
SB SPK DISTANCE (for the surround back speaker)  
Select to apply 6.1-channel reproduction to both 5.1-channel  
and 6.1-channel encoded software.  
EX/ES/PLIIx: PLIIx MOVIE  
Select to apply “PLIIx MOVIE” (6.1-channel) reproduction to  
both 5.1-channel and 6.1-channel encoded software.  
Adjustable range: 0.3 m to 9.0 m in 0.3 m intervals  
EX/ES/PLIIx: PLIIx MUSIC  
(1 ft to 30 ft in 1 ft intervals)  
Select to apply “PLIIx MUSIC” (6.1-channel) reproduction to  
both 5.1-channel and 6.1-channel encoded software.  
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10 ft) for all speakers  
EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF  
Select to cancel the EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel) reproduction.  
C
R
L
Initial setting: EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO  
3.3 m  
(11 ft)  
3.0 m  
(10 ft)  
2.7 m  
(9 ft)  
* For some Dolby Digital Surround EX software, Dolby Digital 5.1-  
channel reproduction (“DOLBY D”) may be applied even though  
you have selected “EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO.In this case, select  
“EX/ES/PLIIx: ON” to apply “DOLBY D EX.”  
2.4 m  
(8 ft)  
From the remote control  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
2.1 m  
(7 ft)  
LS  
RS  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Press EX/ES repeatedly to select an  
appropriate setting for your  
enjoyment.  
SB  
In this case, set the distance as follows:  
Left front speaker (L):  
Right front speaker (R):  
Center speaker (C):  
“FRONT L: 3.0m (10ft)”  
“FRONT R: 3.0m (10ft)”  
“CENTER: 3.0m (10ft)”  
Left surround speaker (LS): “SURROUND L: 2.7m (9ft)”  
Right surround speaker (RS): “SURROUND R: 2.7m (9ft)”  
Surround back speaker (SB): “SURROUND BACK: 2.4m (8ft)”  
NOTES  
NOTES  
• This function is not available in the following cases:  
– When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:  
NO” (see page 21).  
You cannot set the speaker distance for the speakers you have  
set to “NO.”  
– When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source.  
• When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK  
SPK: NO” (see page 21), the Virtual Surround Back (see page  
38) is applied to EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel) reproduction.  
• If you change one of these settings manually, the distance  
manually set will be applied instead of those set by using Smart  
Surround Setup.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the main or sub channel  
—DUAL MONO  
You can select the playback sound (channel) you want while  
playing digital software recorded (or broadcasted) in Dual Mono  
mode (see page 36), which includes two monaural channels  
separately.  
Setting bass sound  
7 Setting subwoofer output—SUBWOOFER OUT  
You can select the type of the signal which can be transmitted  
through the subwoofer. In other words, you can determine  
whether or not the bass elements of the front speaker channels  
are transmitted through the subwoofer regardless of the front  
speaker size setting (either “SMALLor “LARGE”).  
DUAL MONO: MAIN  
Select to play back the main channel (Ch 1).*  
Signal indicator “Llights up while playing back this channel.  
SUBWFR OUT: LFE  
Select to emit only the LFE signals (while playing Dolby  
Digital and DTS software) or the bass elements of the  
“SMALLfront speakers (while playing any source other than  
above).  
DUAL MONO: SUB  
Select to play back the sub-channel (Ch 2).*  
Signal indicator “R” lights up while playing back this channel.  
SUBWFR OUT: LFE+MAIN  
DUAL MONO: ALL  
Select to always emit the bass elements of the front speaker  
channels (MAIN). While playing Dolby Digital and DTS  
software, the bass elements and the LFE signals are both  
emitted.  
Select to play back both the main and sub-channels (Ch 1/Ch 2).*  
Signal indicators “Land “R” light up while playing back these  
channels.  
Initial setting: DUAL MONO: MAIN  
Initial setting: SUBWFR OUT: LFE  
* Dual Mono signals can be heard from the following speakers—L  
(left front speaker), R (right front speaker), and C (center  
speaker), with respect to the current Surround setting:  
NOTE  
When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER: NO” (see page  
21), this function is not available.  
With Surround Activated  
Without  
Surround  
Center speaker setting  
Dual Mono  
setting  
SMALL/LARGE  
NO  
7 Setting the crossover frequency—CROSSOVER  
L
R
L
C
Ch 1  
R
L
R
Small speakers cannot reproduce the bass sounds efficiently. If  
you use a small speaker in any position, this receiver  
automatically reallocates the bass sound elements assigned to  
the small speaker to the large speakers.  
MAIN  
SUB  
ALL  
Ch 1 Ch 1  
Ch 2 Ch 2  
Ch 1 Ch 2  
Ch 1  
Ch 2  
Ch1  
Ch 2  
Ch 2  
Ch 1+Ch 2  
Ch 1+Ch 2 Ch 1+Ch 2  
To use this function properly, set this crossover frequency level  
according to the size of the small speaker connected.  
• If you have selected “LARGE” for all speakers (see page 21),  
this function will not take effect (“CROSSOVER: OFF” appears).  
NOTE  
The Dual Mono format is not identical with bilingual broadcasting  
for TV programs. So this setting does not take effect while  
watching such bilingual programs.  
CROSSOVER: 80Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is about 12 cm.  
CROSSOVER: 100Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is about 10 cm.  
CROSSOVER: 120Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is about 8 cm.  
CROSSOVER: 150Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is about 6 cm.  
CROSSOVER: 200Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in  
the speaker is less than 5 cm.  
Initial setting: CROSSOVER: 150Hz  
NOTE  
Crossover frequency is not valid for the HEADPHONE and 3D  
HEADPHONE modes.  
7 Setting the low frequency effect attenuator  
—LFE ATT  
If the bass sound is distorted while playing back software  
encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, set the LFE level to eliminate  
distortion.  
• This function takes effect only when the LFE signals come in.  
LFE ATT: 0dB  
Normally select this.  
LFE ATT: –10dB Select when the bass sound is distorted.  
Initial setting: LFE ATT: 0dB  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Midnight mode  
—MIDNIGHT MODE  
You can enjoy a powerful sound at night using the Midnight mode.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN)  
terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3  
When you use the digital input terminals, register what  
components are connected to which terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3  
(see page 11) so that the correct source name will appear when  
you select the digital source.  
Select one of the following components for each terminal:  
MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF  
Select when you want to enjoy surround with its full dynamic  
range. (No effect applied.)  
DVR/DVD For the DVD player (or DVD recorder).  
MIDNIGHT MODE: 1  
DBS  
VCR  
TV  
For the DBS tuner.  
For the VCR.  
For the TV.  
Select when you want to reduce the dynamic range a little.  
MIDNIGHT MODE: 2  
Select when you want to apply the compression effect fully  
(useful at night).  
Initial setting: DVR/DVD (for “DIGITAL IN 1”)  
DBS (for “DIGITAL IN 2”)  
Initial setting: MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF  
VCR (for “DIGITAL IN 3”)  
From the remote control  
NOTES  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
You cannot assign the same component for different terminals.  
The priority order for assignment is as follows:  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
“DIGITAL IN 1” > “DIGITAL IN 2” > “DIGITAL IN 3.”  
“DIGITAL IN 1” can be set to any component.  
Press SOUND, then press MIDNIGHT  
repeatedly to select either one of the  
above.  
Ex.: When “DIGITAL IN 1” is set to “TV.”  
DIGITAL IN 1:  
TV  
NOTE  
“DVR/DVD,” “DBS,” and “VCR” are selectable for “DIGITAL  
IN 2.”  
And when “DIGITAL IN 2” is set to “DVR/DVD.”  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
DIGITAL IN 1:  
DIGITAL IN 2:  
TV  
DVR/DVD  
“DBS” and “VCR” are selectable for “DIGITAL IN 3.”  
• Setting “DIGITAL IN 1” affects “DIGITAL IN 2” and “DIGITAL IN  
3” settings. When you have changed “DIGITAL IN 1,confirm the  
components assigned to “DIGITAL IN 2” and “DIGITAL IN 3.”  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the component video input  
mode—DVD VIDEO INPUT/VCR VIDEO  
INPUT  
When you use the component video inputs for connecting the  
DVD recorder (or DVD player) or VCR, register the type of video  
input jacks.  
Converting S-video signals into composite  
video signals—DOWN MIX  
You can select whether or not to convert S-video signals into  
composite video signals.  
DOWN MIX: ON Select to convert S-video signals into  
composite video signals.  
If you have not selected appropriate video input jacks, you cannot  
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK  
remote control system cannot operate properly (see page 40).  
DOWN MIX: OFF Select not to use this function.  
Initial setting: DOWN MIX: OFF  
For the DVD recorder or DVD player (DVD VIDEO):  
NOTES  
DVD VIDEO: S/C  
• This function is available when satisfying all the following  
requirements:  
Select when connecting the DVD recorder (or DVD player) to  
the composite video or S-video input jacks.  
– When a video component is connected to this receiver  
through at least one of the S-video input terminals.  
– When a video component or the TV is connected to this  
receiver through at least one of the composite video output  
jacks.  
DVD VIDEO: COMPONENT  
Select when connecting the DVD recorder (or DVD player) to  
the component video input jacks.  
– Either the DVD VIDEO INPUT or VCR VIDEO INPUT is set to  
“S/C” (see left column).  
Initial setting: DVD VIDEO: S/C  
• When using this function, set the input mode of the TV correctly.  
(Refer also to the manual supplied with the TV.)  
For the VCR (VCR VIDEO):  
VCR VIDEO: S/C  
Select when connecting the VCR to the composite video or S- Converting composite video signals into S-  
video input jacks.  
video signals—Y/C SEPARATE  
VCR VIDEO: COMPONENT  
You can select whether or not to convert composite video signals  
Select when connecting the VCR to the component video  
come from a video component into S-video signals.  
input jacks.  
Y/C SEPARATE: ON  
Select to convert composite video signals  
into S-video signals.  
Initial setting: VCR VIDEO: S/C  
Y/C SEPARATE: OFF Select not to use this function.  
Superimposing the menus  
—SUPERIMPOSE  
You can select whether or not to superimpose the on-screen  
display on the TV screen.  
Initial setting: Y/C SEPARATE: OFF  
NOTES  
• This function is available when satisfying all the following  
requirements:  
SUPERIMPOSE: ON  
– When a video component is connected to this receiver  
through at least one of the composite video input jacks.  
– When a video component or the TV is connected to this  
receiver through at least one of the S-video output terminals.  
– Either the DVD VIDEO INPUT or VCR VIDEO INPUT is set to  
“S/C” (see left column).  
Select to superimpose the on-screen display on the TV  
screen.  
SUPERIMPOSE: OFF  
Select to cancel superimposition. The on-screen display will  
be shown on the blue background screen.  
• When using this function, set the input mode of the TV correctly.  
(Refer also to the manual supplied with the TV.)  
Initial setting: SUPERIMPOSE: ON  
NOTES  
• Some on-screen displays appear on the TV screen regardless  
of this setting.  
• The on-screen display does not appear on the TV screen when  
connecting the TV through the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT  
jacks (see page 10).  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sound adjustments  
You can make sound adjustment to your preference after  
completing basic setting.  
Basic adjustment items  
You can adjust the following items. See pages in parentheses for details.  
You cannot select the items which is not available with the current setting.  
• The name of the item shown below is the on-screen display indication and the name in parentheses is the display indication.  
Items and to do  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL (SUBWFR LVL)  
BASS BOOST (BASS BOOST)  
Adjust the subwoofer output level. (29)  
Boost the bass level. (30)  
FRONT L LEVEL (FRONT L LVL)  
SUBWFR PHASE (SBWFR PHASE)  
Adjust the left front speaker output level. (29)  
Select the subwoofer sound phase. (30)  
FRONT R LEVEL (FRONT R LVL)  
INPUT ATT (INPUT ATT)  
Adjust the right front speaker output level. (29)  
Attenuate the input level of analog source. (30)  
CENTER LEVEL (CENTER LVL)  
EFFECT (EFFECT)  
Adjust the center speaker output level. (29)  
Adjust the effect level. (31)  
SURR. L LEVEL (SURR L LVL)  
PANORAMA (PANORAMA)  
Adjust the left surround speaker output level. (29)  
Add wraparound sound effect with side-wall image. (31)  
SURR. R LEVEL (SURR R LVL)  
CENTER GAIN (CENTER GAIN)  
Adjust the right surround speaker output level. (29)  
Adjust the sound localization of the center channel. (31)  
SURR. BACK LEVEL (S BACK LVL)  
CENTER TONE (CENTER TONE)  
Adjust the surround back speaker output level. (29)  
Make the center tone soft or sharp. (31)  
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz (D EQ 63Hz)*  
CNTR ALIGNMENT (CNTR ALIGN)  
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz (D EQ 250Hz)*  
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz (D EQ 1kHz)*  
Align the vertical localization of the center channel. (31)  
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz (D EQ 4kHz)*  
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz (D EQ 16kHz)*  
Adjust the equalization pattern of each band. (30)  
* If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17, these settings are not required.  
Operation through on-screen display menus  
You can make adjustments to the basic settings easily by using the on-screen display menus.  
Menu operation buttons  
On the front panel:  
From the remote control:  
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control,  
set the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Button / JOG  
To do  
ADJUST button show adjustment item previously selected.  
SET button  
move to the selected menu or return to the  
previous ADJUST MENU.  
Button  
To do  
MULTI JOG  
• select a menu or an item.  
• change a setting.  
MENU button show “TOP MENU.”  
5 / buttons select a menu or an item.  
SET button  
move to the selected menu or return to the  
previous ADJUST MENU.  
2 / 3 buttons change a setting.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menu configuration  
• Items on the menus shown below are all set to the initial values when shipping from the factory.  
• Some of the menus or some items on the menu cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted depending on the current settings and the  
connections. (For details, see the respective explanations in this section.)  
• The “ADJUST MENU (3)” screen cannot be shown depending on the current settings and the connections.  
ADJUST MENU (3)  
TOP MENU  
TOP MENU  
ADJUST MENU (1)  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
ADJUST MENU (1)  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL  
FRONT L LEVEL  
5
SUBWOOFER LEVEL :  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FRONT L LEVEL  
FRONT R LEVEL  
CENTER LEVEL  
SURR. L LEVEL  
SURR. R LEVEL  
:
:
:
:
:
FRONT R LEVEL  
CENTER LEVEL  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
SURR. BACK LEVEL :  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
SURROUND L LEVEL  
SURROUND R LEVEL  
SURROUND BACK LEVEL  
ADJUST MENU (2)  
ADJUST MENU (2)  
5
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz  
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz  
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz  
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz  
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz  
BASS BOOST  
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz :  
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz :  
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz :  
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz :  
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz :  
0
0
0
0
0
BASS BOOST  
: OFF  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
ADJUST MENU (3)  
ADJUST MENU (3)  
SUBWOOFER PHASE  
INPUT ATT  
EFFECT  
5
SUBWFR PHASE : NORMAL  
INPUT ATT  
EFFECT  
: NORMAL  
:
:
:
:
3
OFF  
0.3  
3
PANORAMA  
CENTER GAIN  
CENTER TONE  
CNTR ALIGNMENT:  
OFF  
PANORAMA  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
CENTER GAIN  
CENTER TONE  
CENTER ALIGNMENT  
ADJUST MENU (1)  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu operating procedure  
When operating, the on-screen display appears on the TV screen regardless of the SUPERIMPOSE setting (see page 25).  
Before you start, remember...  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.  
In this section, the operation of the remote control is used for explaining.  
Ex.:When adjusting subwoofer output level.  
Operations  
On the TV screen  
On the display  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
1 To show “TOP MENU,press MENU.  
Then press 5 or to select “ADJUST  
MENU.”  
x
ATT  
TOP MENU  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
“SETTING” appears.  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
“TOP MENU” appears.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
2 To select “ADJUST MENU,press SET.  
x
ATT  
ADJUST MENU (1)  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
5
SUBWOOFER LEVEL :  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FRONT L LEVEL  
FRONT R LEVEL  
CENTER LEVEL  
SURR. L LEVEL  
SURR. R LEVEL  
:
:
:
:
:
The submenu previously  
selected appears.  
SURR. BACK LEVEL :  
:ENTER  
:TOP MENU  
The adjustment item previously selected  
appears.  
3 To select the desired submenu, press  
5 or repeatedly.  
There are three screens from “ADJUST MENU (1)”  
to “ADJUST MENU (3).” To change the screen,  
simply pressing 5 or repeatedly.You can go to  
the next/previous screen.  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
4 Press SET.  
x
ATT  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
SUBWOOFER  
:2  
0
3
The current setting of the  
selected item appears.  
23:OPERATE  
:BACK  
The selected submenu appears.  
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
5 To adjust the selected item, press 2 or  
3 repeatedly, then press SET.  
x
ATT  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
SUBWOOFER  
:2  
0
3
The on-screen display returns to the previous  
ADJUST MENU. In this example, “ADJUST MENU  
(1)” appears on the TV screen and “SUBWFR LVL”  
appears on the display.  
–10  
0
+10  
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG, then press  
SET.  
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set other items  
if necessary.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
From the remote control:  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
To return to “TOP MENU,press MENU on the remote control.  
To exit from menu operations, press MENU on the remote  
control when “TOP MENU” appears. On the front panel, press  
ADJUST when a menu except “TOP MENU” appears.  
• The adjustment item previously selected can be shown on the  
TV screen by pressing ADJUST on the front panel when the  
receiver is in normal operation mode.  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
2
1, 3  
Button indications on the screen  
The buttons for operating the menu are shown on the TV  
screen.You can operate the menu with these buttons.  
1
Press TEST TONE to check the speakers’ output  
balance.  
TOP MENU  
• On the TV screen, “TEST TONE” appears. The  
indicator corresponding to the speaker appears while a  
test tone comes out of the speakers.  
EX.:  
5
SETTING MENU  
ADJUST MENU  
TEST TONE  
SW+1 L+5 C 0 R-3  
:ENTER  
:EXIT  
LS+5  
RS+5  
Usable buttons and their functions  
SUBWOOFER LEVEL  
SB+5  
SUBWOOFER  
:2  
0
3
• On the display, TEST Lstarts flashing, and a test tone  
comes out of the speakers in the following order:  
23:OPERATE  
:BACK  
Usable buttons and their functions  
C
R
L
SW  
LS  
Adjusting the items  
RS  
When performing the basic settings viewing the indications  
on the display, the indications are slightly different from what  
is shown on the on-screen display.  
This is because of the limited number of characters shown  
on the display.  
SB  
2
Adjust the speaker output levels.  
To adjust the left front speaker level (L), press  
FRONT L +/–.  
Ex.: • “SUBWOOFER: +10” is shown as “SUBWFR +10” on  
the display.  
To adjust the right front speaker level (R), press  
FRONT R +/–.  
• “BASS BOOST: ON” is shown as “B BOOST ON” on  
the display.  
To adjust the center speaker level (C), press  
CENTER +/–.  
To adjust the left surround speaker level (LS), press  
SURR L +/–.  
Adjusting speaker output level  
• SUBWOOFER LEVEL (subwoofer output level),  
• FRONT L LEVEL (left front speaker output level),  
• FRONT R LEVEL (right front speaker output level),  
• CENTER LEVEL (center speaker output level),  
• SURROUND L LEVEL (left surround speaker output level),  
• SURROUND R LEVEL (right surround speaker output level),  
• SURROUND BACK LEVEL (surround back speaker output  
level)  
To adjust the right surround speaker level (RS), press  
SURR R +/–.  
To adjust the surround back speaker level (SB), press  
S.BACK +/–.  
To adjust the subwoofer level (SW), press SUBWFR +/–.  
3
Press TEST TONE again to stop the test tone.  
You can adjust the speaker output levels.  
Adjust all the speakers’ output levels so that you can listen to the  
sounds from all the speakers at the same level.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
NOTES  
You can adjust the speaker output levels without the test tone.  
• No test tone comes out of the speakers and no speaker  
indication appears on the TV screen corresponding to the  
speaker which is set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see  
page 21).  
Adjustable range: –10 (dB) to +10 (dB) (in 1 step intervals)  
Initial setting: 0 (dB) for all speakers  
• No test tone is available when the headphone is in use or  
“DVD MULTI” is selected.  
NOTES  
• If you have selected “NO” for a speaker (see page 21), the  
output level for the corresponding speaker is not adjustable.  
• While using the headphones, you can adjust only the left and  
right front speakers’ output level.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the equalization patterns  
Adjusting the bass sounds  
—DIGITAL EQ 63Hz/250Hz/1kHz/4kHz/16kHz  
You can adjust equalization patterns in five frequency bands  
(center frequency: 63 Hz, 250 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 16 kHz) for the  
front speakers.  
7 Reinforcing the bass—BASS BOOST  
You can boost the bass level—Bass Boost.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
BASS BOOST: ON Select to boost the bass level.  
The BASS indicator lights up on the display.  
Adjustable range: –8 (dB) to +8 (dB) (in 2 dB intervals)  
Initial setting: 0 (dB) for all bands  
BASS BOOST: OFF Select to deactivate the Bass Boost.  
• When adjustment is made, the EQ indicator lights up on the  
display.  
Initial setting: BASS BOOST: OFF  
NOTE  
If no adjustment is required, set all the frequency bands to  
“0 (dB).”  
This function affects only the sound coming out through the front  
speakers.  
• The EQ indicator goes off from the display.  
From the remote control:  
From the remote control:  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
Before you start, remember...  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is  
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
Press SOUND, then press BASS  
BOOST repeatedly.  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
• Each time you press BASS BOOST, the  
Bass Boost turns on and off alternately.  
1
2
Press SOUND.  
Press EQ FREQ repeatedly to  
select the band you want to adjust.  
NOTE  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
3
4
Press EQ LEVEL 9/( to adjust  
the equalization pattern of the  
selected band.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust  
other bands.  
2
3
NOTE  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
1
7 Selecting the subwoofer sound phase—  
SUBWOOFER PHASE  
You can change the subwoofer sound phase to your preference.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
PHASE: NORMAL  
Normally select this.  
PHASE: REVERSE Select this when you feel the bass sound is  
better with this mode rather than with  
“PHASE: NORMAL.”  
Initial setting: PHASE: NORMAL  
NOTE  
This function takes effect only when “SUBWOOFER” is set to  
“SUBWOOFER:YES” (see page 21).  
7 Attenuating the input signal—INPUT ATT  
When the input level of analog source is too high, the sound will  
be distorted. If this happens, you need to attenuate the input  
signal level to prevent the sound distortion.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
source.  
INPUT ATT: ON  
Select to attenuate the input signal level.  
The ATT indicator lights up on the display.  
INPUT ATT: NORMAL Select to deactivate attenuation.  
Initial setting: INPUT ATT: NORMAL  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Making the center tone soft or sharp  
Adjusting the sound parameters for the  
Surround/DSP modes  
You can adjust the Surround/DSP sound parameters to your  
preference.  
—CENTER TONE  
This setting is available when one of the Surround/DSP modes is  
in use. To activate Surround/DSP mode, see page 39.  
• This setting is common to all Surround modes, and is  
memorized separately for DSP modes.  
• For details about the Surround/DSP modes, see pages 34 to 39.  
You cannot adjust the center tone in the following cases:  
– When “CENTER SPEAKER” is set to “CENTER SPK: NO”  
(see page 21).  
– When Dual Mono software is played back.  
– While listening with the headphones.  
7 Adjusting the effect level for DSP modes  
—EFFECT  
This setting is available only when one of the DSP modes (except  
ALL CH ST) is in use. To activate DSP mode, see page 39.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
DSP mode.  
Adjustable range: 1 to 5 (in 1 step intervals)  
Initial setting: CENTER TONE: 3  
Adjustable range: 1 to 5 (in 1 step intervals)  
Initial setting: EFFECT: 3  
As the number increases, the dialogue becomes stronger.  
Normally, select “3.”  
• When the center tone is set to other than “CENTER TONE: 3,”  
the C.TONE indicator lights up on the display.  
As the number increases, the effect becomes stronger.  
Normally, select “3.”  
From the remote control:  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
From the remote control:  
You can also make adjustments the following way from the  
remote control.  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Press SOUND, then press C.TONE  
repeatedly.  
Press SOUND, then press EFFECT  
repeatedly.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
After pressing SOUND, the numeric  
buttons work for sound adjustments. To  
use the numeric buttons to operate your  
target source, press the corresponding  
source selecting button before operation;  
otherwise, the remote control may not  
work as you intend.  
7 Align the vertical localization of the center  
7 Adjusting the panorama control for Pro Logic II  
channel —CENTER ALIGNMENT  
Music—PANORAMA  
This setting is available when one of the Surround/DSP modes  
(except “PLII MUSIC,PLIIx MUSIC,Neo:6 MUSIC,and “ALL  
CH ST”) is in use. To activate Surround/DSP mode, see page 39.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each  
Surround/DSP mode.  
This setting is available only when Pro Logic II Music is in use. To  
activate Pro Logic II Music, see page 39.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized until you  
change the setting.  
You cannot adjust the center alignment in the following cases:  
– When “CENTER SPEAKER” is set to “CENTER SPK: NO”  
(see page 21).  
PANORAMA: ON  
Select to add “wraparound” sound effect with  
side-wall image.  
– When Dual Mono software is played back.  
– While listening with the headphones.  
PANORAMA: OFF Select to listen to originally recorded sound.  
Initial setting: PANORAMA: OFF  
C ALIGNMENT: ON Select when you cannot feel as if the actors  
or singers are speaking or singing on the  
screen.  
7 Adjusting the sound localization of the center  
C ALIGNMENT: OFF Select not to use this function.  
channel—CENTER GAIN  
Initial setting: C ALIGNMENT: OFF  
This setting is available only when Neo:6 Music is in use.  
• If you have set “CENTER SPEAKER” to “CENTER SPK: NO”  
(see page 21), the center gain is not adjustable.  
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized until you  
change the setting.  
Adjustable range: 0 to 1.0 (in 0.1 step intervals)  
Initial setting: CENTER GAIN: 0.3  
As the number increases, the center channel will be localized  
clearly.  
Normally, select “0.3.”  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tuning in to stations manually  
From the remote control ONLY:  
Tuner operations  
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.  
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.  
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates  
between “FM” and “AM.”  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
Tuner operations are mainly done from the remote control.  
2 Press repeatedly or hold TUNING 9 or  
( TUNING until the station you want is tuned  
in.  
• Pressing (or holding) TUNING 9 increases the frequency.  
• Pressing (or holding) ( TUNING decreases the frequency.  
NOTES  
• When you hold and release TUNING 9 or ( TUNING, the  
frequency keeps changing until a station is tuned in.  
• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the  
TUNED indicator lights up on the display.  
• When an FM stereo program is received, the ST (stereo)  
indicator also lights up.  
When operating the  
receiver using the remote  
control, set the mode  
selector to “AUDIO/TV/  
VCR/DBS.”  
Using preset tuning  
Once a station is assigned a channel number, the station can be  
quickly tuned simply by selecting the number.You can preset up to  
30 FM and 15 AM stations.  
To store the preset stations  
Before you start, remember...  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is  
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
From the remote control ONLY:  
1 Tune in to the station you want to preset (see  
Tuning in to stations manually” above).  
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for this station,  
select the FM reception mode you want. See “Selecting the  
FM reception mode” on page 33.  
NOTE  
When you have selected “FM” or “AM” by using SOURCE  
SELECTOR on the front panel, the remote control may not  
work for tuner operations. To use the remote control for tuner  
operations, select “FM” or “AM” by using the source selecting  
button on the remote control.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
2 Press MEMORY.  
The channel number position starts flashing on the display for  
about 5 seconds.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to  
select a channel number while the channel  
number position is flashing.  
On the front panel:  
2 1, 3  
• For channel number 5, press 5.  
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.  
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
Before you start, remember...  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is  
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
1 Turn SOURCE SELECTOR to select “FM” or  
“AM.”  
4 Press MEMORY again while the selected  
channel number is flashing on the display.  
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.  
The selected channel number stops flashing.  
The station is assigned to the selected channel number.  
2 PressTUNER PRESET.  
“P” appears on the display and MULTI JOG now works for  
selecting preset channels.  
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the  
stations you want.  
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select a preset channel  
To erase a stored preset station  
number while “P” appears on the display.  
Storing a new station on a used channel number erases the  
previously stored one.  
To increase the preset channel numbers, turn MULTI JOG  
clockwise.  
To decreases the preset channel numbers, turn MULTI JOG  
counterclockwise.  
To tune in a preset station  
From the remote control:  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.  
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in and  
the numeric buttons now work for tuner operations.  
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates  
between “FM” and “AM.”  
Selecting the FM reception mode  
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive or noisy, you can  
change the FM reception mode while receiving an FM broadcast.  
You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station  
(see page 32).  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
2 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to  
From the remote control ONLY:  
select a preset channel number.  
While listening to an FM station, press FM MODE.  
• Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode  
alternates between “AUTO MUTING” and “MONO.”  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
ATT  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
AUTO MUTING  
Normally select this.  
When a program is broadcast in stereo,  
you will hear stereo sound; when in  
monaural, you will hear monaural sound.  
This mode is also useful to suppress  
static noise between stations. The AUTO  
MUTING indicator lights up on the display.  
• For channel number 5, press 5.  
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.  
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.  
MONO  
Select this to improve the reception (but  
stereo effect will be lost).  
In this mode, you will hear noise while  
tuning in to the stations. The AUTO  
MUTING indicator goes off from the  
display. (The ST indicator also goes off.)  
Initial setting: AUTO MUTING  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introducing the Surround modes  
Dolby Digital*  
Dolby Digital is a digital signal compression method, developed by  
Dolby Laboratories, and enables multi-channel encoding and  
decoding.  
Creating realistic  
sound fields  
• When Dolby Digital signal is detected through the digital input,  
the DOLBY D indicator lights up on the display.  
Dolby Digital 5.1CH  
Dolby Digital 5.1CH (DOLBY D) encoding method records and  
digitally compresses the left front channel, right front channel,  
center channel, left surround channel, right surround channel, and  
LFE channel signals (total 6 channels, but the LFE channel is  
counted as 0.1 channel. Therefore, called 5.1 channel).  
Dolby Digital enables stereo surround sounds, and sets the cutoff  
frequency of the surround treble at 20 kHz, compared to 7 kHz for  
Dolby Pro Logic. As such, the sound movement and “being-there”  
feeling are enhanced much more than Dolby Pro Logic.  
Reproducing theater ambience  
In a movie theater, many speakers are located on the walls to  
reproduce impressive multi-channel sound, reaching you from all  
directions.  
With these many speakers, sound localization and sound  
movement can be expressed.  
Surround/DSP modes built in this receiver can create almost the  
same Surround sound as you can feel in a real movie theater.  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX (DOLBY D EX) is a digital surround encoding  
format that adds the third surround channels, called “surround  
back.”  
Compared to the conventional Dolby Digital 5.1CH, these newly  
added surround back channels can reproduce more detailed  
movements behind you while viewing the video software. In  
addition, surround sound localization will become more stable.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dolby Surround  
DTS**  
DTS is another digital signal compression method, developed by  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc., and enables multi-channel  
encoding and decoding (1ch up to 6.1ch).  
• When DTS signal is detected through the digital input, the DTS  
indicator lights up on the display.  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Pro Logic II is a multi-channel playback format to convert  
2-channel software into 5-channel (plus subwoofer). The matrix-  
based conversion method used for Dolby Pro Logic II makes no  
limitation for the cutoff frequency of the surround treble and  
enables stereo surround sound.  
• This receiver provides two types of Dolby Pro Logic II modes—  
Pro Logic II Movie (PLII MOVIE) and Pro Logic II Music (PLII  
MUSIC).  
DTS Digital Surround  
DTS Digital Surround (DTS) is another discrete 5.1 channel  
digital audio format available on CD, LD, and DVD software.  
Compared to Dolby Digital, the DTS Digital Surround format has a  
lower audio compression rate which enables it to add breadth and  
depth to the sounds reproduced. As such, DTS Digital Surround  
features natural, solid, and clear sound.  
When Dolby Pro Logic II is activated, the  
up on the display.  
indicator lights  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
Suitable for playing any Dolby Surround encoded  
software.You can enjoy a sound field very close  
to the one created with discrete 5.1-channel  
sounds.  
DTS Extended Surround (DTS-ES)  
Suitable for playing any 2-channel stereo  
DTS-ES is another multi-channel digital encoding format.  
It greatly improves the 360-degree surround impression and  
space expression by adding the third surround channel—surround  
back channel.  
software.You can enjoy wide and deep sounds.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
DTS-ES includes two signal formats with different surround signal  
recording methods—DTS-ES Discrete 6.1ch (ES DISCRETE)  
and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1ch (ES MATRIX).  
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1ch has been designed to encode (and  
decode) a 6.1-channel signal discretely to avoid interference with  
each channel.  
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1ch has been designed to add an extra  
surround channel to DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel. By using a  
matrix encoding/decoding method, an additional “surround back”  
channel signal is encoded (and decoded) in both the left and right  
surround channel signals.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a newly introduced multi-channel playback  
format to convert not only multi-channel software but 2-channel  
software into 6.1 channel (or 7.1 channel) that developed from  
Dolby Pro Logic II. The matrix-based conversion method used for  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx makes no limitation for the cutoff frequency of  
the surround treble.  
• This receiver provides two types of Dolby Pro Logic IIx modes—  
Pro Logic IIx Movie (PLIIx MOVIE) and Pro Logic IIx Music  
(PLIIx MUSIC).  
When Dolby Pro Logic IIx is activated, the  
lights up on the display.  
indicator  
** “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks  
PLIIx MOVIE Suitable for playing any Dolby Surround encoded  
software.You can enjoy a sound field with a  
natural wraparound effect.  
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
PLIIx MUSIC Suitable for playing any 2-channel stereo  
software.You can enjoy wide and deep 6.1-  
channel sounds.  
To enjoy software encoded with Dolby Digital, connect the  
source component using the digital terminal on the rear of this  
receiver. (See page 11.)  
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When using Surround mode, the sounds come out of the  
activated speakers which the Surround mode requires.  
DTS 96/24  
In recent years, there has been increasing interest in higher  
sampling rates both for recording and for reproducing at home.  
Higher sampling rates allow wider frequency range and greater bit  
depths provide extended dynamic range.  
DTS 96/24 is a multi-channel digital signal format (fs 96 kHz/24  
bits) introduced by Digital Theater Systems, Inc. to deliver “better-  
than-CD sound quality” into the home.  
• When DTS 96/24 signal is detected, the DTS and 96/24  
indicators light up.You can enjoy its 5.1-channel sound with full-  
quality.  
• If either the surround speakers or center speaker is set to  
“NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21), the corresponding  
channel signals are allocated to and emitted through the front  
speakers.  
• If both the surround speakers and center speaker are set to  
“NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-  
PHONIC processing (which has been developed to create the  
surround effect through the front speakers only) is used. The 3D  
indicator lights up on the display.  
3D HEADPHONE mode  
DTS Neo:6  
If you connect a pair of headphones while one of the Surround  
modes is in use, the 3D HEADPHONE mode is activated  
without respect to the type of software played back.  
“3DHEADPHONE” appears on the display and the DSP, 3D,  
and HP indicators light up.  
DTS Neo:6 is another conversion method to create 6-channel  
(plus subwoofer) from analog/digital 2-channel software by using  
the high precision digital matrix decoder used for DTS-ES Matrix  
6.1ch.  
• This receiver provides the following DTS Neo:6 modes—Neo:6  
Cinema (NEO:6CINEMA) and Neo:6 Music (NEO:6 MUSIC).  
When one of them is activated, the NEO:6 indicator lights up on  
the display.  
About other digital signals  
Linear PCM  
NEO:6CINEMA Suitable for playing movies.You can get the  
same atmosphere with 2-channel software as  
with 6.1-channel software. It is also effective for  
playing software encoded with conventional  
surround formats.  
Uncompressed digital audio data used for DVDs, CDs, and  
Video CDs.  
DVDs support 2 channels with sampling rates of 48/96 kHz, at  
quantization of 16/20/24 bits. On the other hand, CDs and  
Video CDs are limited to 2 channels with 44.1 kHz at 16 bits.  
• When Linear PCM signal is detected, the LPCM indicator  
lights up.  
NEO:6 MUSIC Suitable for playing music software. The front  
channel signals bypass the decoder (resulting in  
no loss of sound quality) and the surround  
signals transmitted through the other speakers  
expand the sound field naturally.  
Dual Mono  
Dual Mono can be easily understood when you think of the  
bilingual broadcast for TV programs (however, the Dual Mono  
format is not identical with those analog formats).  
This format is now adopted in Dolby Digital, DTS, and so on. It  
allows two independent channels (called main channel and  
sub-channel) to be recorded separately.  
You can select either channel you want to listen to (see  
page 23).  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When using the DAP mode, the sounds come out of all the  
connected and activated speakers.  
Introducing the DSP modes  
If the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker  
setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC processing  
(which has been developed to create the surround effect  
through the front speakers only) is used.  
The sound heard in a concert hall, club, etc. consists of direct  
sound and indirect sound—early reflections and reflections from  
behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly without any  
reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are delayed by the  
distances of the ceiling and walls. These direct sounds and  
indirect sounds are the most important elements of the acoustic  
surround effects.  
The 3D indicator lights up on the display.  
MONO FILM  
The DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes can create these  
important elements, and give you a real “being there” feeling.  
In order to reproduce a more acoustic sound field in your listening  
room while viewing monaural sound video software (analog and  
2-channel digital signals including Dual Mono signal), you can use  
this mode.  
The surround effect will be added, and the sound localization of  
actor’s words will be improved.  
Reflections from behind  
Early reflections  
This mode cannot be used for multi-channel digital signals.  
When “MONO FILM” is used, sounds come out of all the  
connected (and activated) speakers.  
If the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker  
setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC processing  
(which has been developed to create the surround effect  
through the front speakers only) is used.  
The 3D indicator lights up on the display.  
• If incoming signals change from 2-channel digital signal to  
another digital signal type, “MONO FILM” is canceled and an  
appropriate Surround mode is activated.  
Direct sounds  
The DSP modes include the following modes:  
• Digital Acoustic Processor (DAP) modes—HALL1, HALL2, LIVE  
CLUB, DANCE CLUB, PAVILION, THEATER1, THEATER2  
• MONO FILM—Used for all types of 2-channel signals (including  
Dual Mono signal)  
All Channel Stereo mode (ALL CH ST)  
This mode can reproduce a larger stereo sound field using all the  
connected (and activated) speakers.  
• All Channel Stereo mode (ALL CH ST)  
This mode cannot be used if the surround speakers are set  
to “NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21).  
When one of the DSP modes is activated, the DSP indicator lights  
up on the display.  
Digital Acoustic Processor (DAP) modes  
You can use the following DAP modes in order to reproduce a  
more acoustic sound field in your listening room.  
HALL1  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large  
shoebox-shaped hall designed primarily for  
classical concerts. (Its seating capacity is about  
2000.)  
Sound reproduced from  
normal stereo  
Sound reproduced from All  
Channel Stereo mode  
HALL2  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large  
vineyard-shaped hall designed primarily for  
classical concerts. (Its seating capacity is about  
2000.)  
3D HEADPHONE mode  
LIVE CLUB  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a live music club  
with a low ceiling.  
If you connect a pair of headphones while one of the DSP  
modes is in use, the 3D HEADPHONE mode is activated  
without respect to the type of software played back.  
“3DHEADPHONE” appears on the display and the DSP, 3D,  
and HP indicators light up.  
DANCE CLUB Reproduces the spatial feeling of a rocking dance  
club.  
PAVILION  
THEATER1  
THEATER2  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of an exhibition  
hall with a high ceiling.  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large theater  
where the seating capacity is about 600.  
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a small theater  
where the seating capacity is about 300.  
NOTE  
When “THEATER1” or “THEATER2” is activated while playing  
back 2-channel analog or digital source, the built-in Dolby Pro  
Logic II decoder is activated and the  
indicator lights up.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Surround/DSP modes  
Available Surround/DSP modes vary depending on the speaker settings and the incoming signals. See the table below.  
• The numbers inside the parentheses following the incoming signal type indicate the number of the front channels and that of the  
surround channels. For example, (3/2) indicates that the signals are encoded with three front signals (left/right/center) and two (stereo)  
surround signals.  
• For EX/ES/PLIIx setting, see page 22.  
The name of the mode shown below is the display indication.  
EX/ES/PLIIx setting  
Incoming Signal Type  
AUTO  
ON  
PLIIx MOVIE  
PLIIx MUSIC  
OFF  
Dolby Digital Surround EX  
DOLBY D EX*2*5  
DOLBY D EX*2  
DOLBY D EX*2*3  
D + PLIIx MU*2  
DOLBY D  
Dolby Digital (3/2, 2/2)  
Dolby Digital (3/1, 2/1, 3/0, 1/0)  
Dolby Digital (Dual Mono)  
DTS-ES Discrete*1  
DOLBY D  
DOLBY D EX*2  
DOLBY D EX*2*3  
DOLBY D  
D + PLIIx MU*2  
DOLBY D  
DUAL MONO  
ES DISCRETE*2 ES DISCRETE*2  
DTS +  
DTS +  
DTS +  
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2  
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2  
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2  
DTS  
DTS  
DTS  
DTS-ES Matrix*1  
ES MATRIX*2  
DTS  
ES MATRIX*2  
DTS (3/2, 2/2)*1  
DTS + NEO:6*2  
DTS (3/1, 2/1, 3/0, 1/0)  
DTS (Dual Mono)  
DTS  
DUAL MONO  
Dolby Digital (2/0)  
DTS (2/0)  
PLII MOVIE  
PLII MUSIC  
NEO:6CINEMA  
NEO:6 MUSIC  
PLIIx MOVIE*4/PLIIx MUSIC*4/NEO:6CINEMA/NEO:6 MUSIC  
Lenear PCM  
Analog  
DVD MULTI  
None  
*1 DTS 96/24 processing is not applied when the EX/ES/PLIIx setting is activated. If you want to apply the processing, set the EX/ES/  
PLIIx setting to “EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF” (see page 22).  
*2 When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK SPK: NO” (see page 21), Virtual Surround Back is activated for the  
modes.  
*3 When using PLIIx Movie to reproduce Dolby Digital or DTS software, this receiver applies Dolby Digital EX (DOLBY D EX) or DTS plus  
Dolby Digital EX (DTS +  
EX) processing (6.1-channel reproduction) to the software.  
*4 When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK SPK: NO” (see page 21), “PLIIx MOVIE” is changed to “PLII MOVIE”  
and “PLIIx MUSIC” is changed to “PLII MUSIC.”  
*5 For some Dolby Digital Surround EX software, Dolby Digital 5.1-channel reproduction (“DOLBY D”) may be applied. In this case, select  
“EX/ES/PLIIx: ON” to apply “DOLBY D EX.”  
About the DSP modes  
• The following DSP modes are available regardless of incoming signal type:  
HALL1, HALL2, LIVE CLUB, DANCE CLUB, PAVILION, THEATER1, THEATER2  
• When an incoming signal is a multi-channel (more than 2-channel) digital signal, “MONO FILM” is not available.  
You cannot select “ALL CH ST” when the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21).  
Virtual Surround Back  
This function creates the great surround effect from the behind as if you have connected the surround back speaker. The VIRTUAL  
SB (Surround Back) indicator lights up on the display.  
If you have connected (and activated) the surround speakers, you can use Virtual Surround Back without connecting the surround  
back speaker.  
Virtual Surround Back is activated when “EX/ES/PLIIx” is set to other than “EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF” and when playing back the software  
including the following signals:  
– Dolby Digital Surround EX  
– DTS-ES  
– Dolby Digital or DTS with more than 4-channels  
Virtual Surround Back is activated when one of the Surround modes is selected.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On the front panel:  
2
Activating the Surround/DSP modes  
Available Surround/DSP modes vary depending on the incoming  
1, 3  
signals. For details, see page 38.  
Activating one of the Surround/DSP modes automatically  
recalls the memorized settings and adjustments.  
Before you start, remember...  
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is  
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
• To adjust the speaker output level, see page 29.  
• To adjust the effect level for the DSP mode (except All  
Channel Stereo mode,) see page 31.  
1 Select and play any source other than “DVD  
MULTI.”  
• To add “wraparound” sound effect to “PLII MUSIC”  
(PANORAMA control,) see page 31.  
• Make sure you have selected the input mode (analog or  
digital) correctly.  
• To adjust the sound localization of the center channel  
for “NEO:6 MUSIC” (center gain,) see page 31.  
2 Press SURROUND.  
To adjust the vertical localization of the center channel  
for Surround/DSP modes (except “PLII MUSIC,PLIIx  
MUSIC,Neo6: MUSIC,and “ALL CH ST”) (center  
alignment,) see page 31.  
MULTI JOG now works for selecting Surround/DSP modes.  
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select the Surround/DSP  
mode you want.  
Ex.: When “DOLBY D” is selected for Dolby Digital multi-  
channel software:  
NOTES  
You cannot use any Surround/DSP modes when selecting “DVD  
MULTI” as the playback source.  
• The on-screen display appears on the TV screen to show the  
Surround/DSP mode name for 5 seconds when you select the  
Surround/DSP mode.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
AUTO SURR  
HALL1  
Surround modes*  
HALL2  
To cancel the function, set “SUPERIMPOSE” to  
“SUPERIMPOSE: OFF” (see page 25).  
LIVE CLUB  
PAVILION  
THEATER2  
ALL CH ST  
(Back to the beginning)  
DANCE CLUB  
THEATER1  
MONO FILM  
SURR OFF  
From the remote control:  
1
When operating the receiver  
using the remote control, set the  
mode selector to  
To cancel Surround/DSP modes  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
Turn MULTI JOG so that “SURR OFF” appears on the display.  
NOTE  
The initial setting is “AUTO SURR.”  
* Available Surround modes vary depending on the incoming  
signals. For details, see “Using the Surround/DSP modes” on  
page 38.  
2
1 Select and play any source other than “DVD  
When you select “AUTO SURR” (Auto Surround)  
You can enjoy the Surround mode easily.  
MULTI.”  
• For details about the Surround modes, see pages 34 to 36.  
• When “AUTO SURR” is activated, the AUTO SR indicator lights  
up on the display.  
• Make sure you have selected the input mode (analog or  
digital) correctly.  
2 Press SURROUND repeatedly to select the  
How does “AUTO SURR” work?  
Surround/DSP mode you want.  
• If a multi-channel signal comes in, an appropriate Surround  
mode will be selected automatically.  
Ex.: When “DOLBY D” is selected for Dolby Digital multi-  
channel software:  
• If a Dolby Digital 2-channel or DTS 2-channel signal with  
surround signal comes in, “PLII MOVIE” will be selected.  
• If a Dolby Digital 2-channel or DTS 2-channel signal without  
surround signal, or a Linear PCM signal comes in, “SURR  
OFF (stereo)” will be selected.  
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE  
LPCM  
L
C
R
PL  
NEO : 6  
DSP 3D  
AUTO SR  
ATT  
HP  
MHz  
kHz  
DOLBY D  
DTS AAC  
96 / 24  
S . WFR LFE  
LS SB RS  
AUTO SURR  
HALL1  
Surround modes*  
HALL2  
NOTES  
LIVE CLUB  
PAVILION  
THEATER2  
ALL CH ST  
(Back to the beginning)  
DANCE CLUB  
THEATER1  
MONO FILM  
SURR OFF  
• “AUTO SURR” does not take effect in the following cases:  
– While playing an analog source.  
– While selecting one of the fixed digital decode modes—  
“DOLBY D” or “DTS” (see page 13).  
• While listening with the headphones, the 3D HEADPHONE  
mode (see pages 36 and 37) is activated without respect to the  
type of software played back.  
To cancel Surround/DSP modes  
• When “AUTO SURR” is selected, sound may not come out at  
the beginning of playback. If it occurs, select a Surround mode  
manually.  
Press SURROUND repeatedly so that “SURR OFF” appears on  
the display.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections 2: Video cable connection  
This receiver is equipped with three types of the video terminals—  
composite video, S-video, and component video, and the signals  
coming into this receiver through one type of video terminals can  
output only through the terminal of the same type. So you need to  
connect the video components to this receiver using one of the  
following three ways.  
• When using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, set  
the video input for the DVD player and the VCR correctly (see  
“Selecting the component video input mode—DVD VIDEO  
INPUT/VCR VIDEO INPUT” on page 25); otherwise, the correct  
input for this receiver will not be selected on the TV.  
AV COMPU LINK  
remote control  
system  
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to  
operate JVC’s video components (TV, DVD player*, and VCR)  
through this receiver.  
Case 1*:  
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver  
through the S-video terminals, connect this receiver to the  
TV’s video input 1 terminal using S-video cables.  
This receiver is equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which has  
added a function to operate JVC’s video components through the  
component video jacks. To use this remote control system, you  
need to connect the video components you want to operate,  
following the diagrams below and the procedures on page 41.  
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your video components.  
S-video cable  
S-video cable  
Source  
equipment  
RX-F31S  
TV  
* “DVD player” on pages 40 and 41 can be replaced with “DVD  
recorder.”  
To video input 1  
Connections 1: AV COMPU LINK connection  
Case 2*:  
TV  
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver  
through the composite video jacks, connect this receiver  
to the TV’s video input 2 terminal (composite video input)  
using composite video cables.  
AV  
AV  
COMPU LINK-III  
COMPU LINK EX  
Composite video cable  
Composite video cable  
Monaural mini-plugs  
(not supplied)  
Source  
equipment  
RX-F31S  
TV  
To video input 2  
(Composite)  
AV  
COMPU  
LINK-III  
Case 3:  
220V  
110V  
127V  
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver  
through the component video jacks, connect this receiver  
to the TV’s video input 2 terminals (component video  
input) using component video cables.  
230 -  
240V  
Component video cable  
Component video cable  
Monaural  
mini-plugs  
(not supplied)  
AV  
COMPU LINK  
Source  
equipment  
RX-F31S  
TV  
To video input 2  
(Component)  
DVD player  
AV  
COMPU LINK  
* When using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, set  
“DOWN MIX” and “Y/C SEPARATE” to “OFF”; otherwise, this  
system does not work correctly. For details about each setting,  
see page 25.  
VCR  
IMPORTANT:  
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot control the  
DBS tuner connected to the DBS IN jacks.  
NOTES  
• When connecting the receiver and aTV with the AV COMPU LINK  
EX terminal by using a component video cable, you cannot use  
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode (see page 41).  
• When connecting only the VCR and DVD player to this receiver,  
connect it directly to the receiver using cable with the monaural  
mini-plugs.  
You can connect only the TV with AV COMPU LINK EX or AV  
COMPU LINK-III terminal to the AV COMPU LINK-III terminal.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One-touch DVD play  
Connecting procedure  
Simply by starting playback on the DVD player, you can enjoy the  
DVD playback without setting other switches manually.  
• When the DVD player is connected through the analog input  
jacks on this receiver (and analog input is selected), the  
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to  
“DVR/DVD” or “DVD MULTI.”  
1 If you have already plugged your VCR, DVD  
player,TV, and this receiver into the AC  
outlets, unplug their AC power cords first.  
• When the DVD player is connected through the digital input  
terminal on this receiver (and digital input is selected), the  
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to  
“DVR/DVD DGT.”  
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the  
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.  
2 Connect your VCR, DVD player,TV, and this  
receiver as follows, using the cables with the  
monaural mini-plugs (not supplied).  
• See “Connections 1” on the previous page.  
3 Connect the audio input/output jacks on the  
VCR, DVD player,TV, and this receiver using  
the audio cables.  
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode  
• When you select “TV” (or “TV DIGITAL) as the source to play on  
the receiver, the TV automatically changes the input mode to  
the TV tuner so that you can watch TV.  
• When you select “DVR/DVD” (or “DVR/DVD DGT”), “DVD  
MULTI,VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL), or “DBS” (or “DBS DIGITAL)  
as the source to play on the receiver, the TV automatically  
changes the input mode to the appropriate position (either video  
input 1 or video input 2) so that you can view the playback  
picture.  
• See pages 7 to 10.  
4 Connect the video input/output jacks on the  
VCR, DVD player,TV, and this receiver using  
the S-video cables, composite video cables,  
or component video cables.  
• See “Connections 2” on the previous page.  
5 Plug the AC power cords of the connected  
components and this receiver into the AC  
outlets.  
NOTE  
This function does not work when you connect this receiver and  
the TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal using a component  
video cable. In this case, reconnect the TV referring to Case 1 or  
Case 2 on page 40.  
6 When turning on the TV for the first time after  
the AV COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV  
volume to the minimum using the TV volume  
control on the TV.  
Automatic power on/off  
The TV, DVD player, and VCR turn on and off along with the  
receiver.  
7 Turn on other connected components first,  
then turn on this receiver.  
When you turn on the receiver;  
• If the previously selected source is “TV” (or “TV DIGITAL) or  
“DBS” (or “DBS DIGITAL), only the TV will turn on automatically.  
• If the previously selected source is “DVR/DVD” (or “DVR/DVD  
DGT”) or “DVD MULTI,the TV and DVD player will turn on  
automatically.  
• If the previously selected source is “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL),  
the TV and VCR will turn on automatically.  
When you turn off the receiver, the TV, DVD player, and VCR will  
turn off.  
• When turning on the VCR, use the remote control supplied  
with this receiver (press VCR  
).  
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use  
the five basic functions listed below.  
Remote control of the TV, DVD player, and VCR using this  
remote control  
See pages 42 and 43 for details.  
NOTE  
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each  
component.  
If you turn off the receiver while recording on the VCR, the VCR  
will not turn off, but continue recording.  
One-touch video play  
Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the  
VCR, you can enjoy the video playback without setting other  
switches manually. The receiver automatically turns on and  
changes the source to “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL).  
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the  
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.  
When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab, press the  
play (3) button on the VCR or on the remote control. So, you can  
get the same result.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 VCR  
Operating other  
JVC products  
Set the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
You can use the supplied remote control to operate not only  
this receiver but also other JVC products.  
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.  
Some JVC VCRs can accept two types of the control signals—  
remote codes “A” and “B.”  
– When operating a VCR whose remote control code is set to  
“A,set the manufacturer’s code to “01.”  
– When operating a VCR whose remote control code is set to  
“B,set the manufacturer’s code to “02.”  
The initial setting is “01.” For details about the setting, see  
“Changing the transmittable signals for operating a VCR” on  
page 45.  
To operate other products, aim the remote control directly at the  
remote sensor on the target product.  
You can always perform the following operation:  
VCR Turn on or off the VCR.  
:
7 TV  
After pressing VCR, you can perform the following operations on  
the VCR.  
CHANNEL +/–:  
Change the channel numbers on the VCR.  
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.  
Start playback.  
1 – 9, 0:  
3:  
Set the mode selector to  
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
7:  
Stop playback.  
8:  
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.  
Fast-wind a tape.  
¡:  
1:  
Rewind a tape.  
REC PAUSE:  
Enter recording pause. To start recording,  
press this button then 3.  
7 DVD recorder or DVD player  
To operate the DVD  
recorder, set the mode  
selector to “DVR.”  
You can always perform the following operations:  
To operate the DVD player,  
set the mode selector to  
“DVD.”  
TV  
:
Turn on or off the TV.  
TV VOL +/–:  
TV/VIDEO:  
Adjust the volume on the TV.  
Change the input mode (either video input  
or TV tuner) on the TV.  
After pressing TV, you can perform the following operations on the  
TV.  
CHANNEL +/–:  
1 – 9, 0, 100+:  
Change the channel numbers.  
Select the channel numbers.  
TV RETURN (10): Function as the TV RETURN button.  
(Switches between the previous channel  
and the current channel.)  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After setting the mode selector correctly, you can perform the  
following operations on the DVD recorder or DVD player.  
For various playback:  
(one touch replay):  
See the instructions supplied with the DVD recorder or DVD  
player for details.  
Move the playback position back 10 seconds  
before the current position.  
RETURN:  
CANCEL:  
Return to the main menu during menu  
operation.  
7 Changing the remote control code for DVD  
recorder  
Cancel the programmed track, etc.  
Some JVC DVD recorders can accept four types of the control  
signals.You can assign one of the four codes to the remote  
control supplied with this receiver for operating your DVD  
recorder. For details, refer to the manual supplied with the  
DVD recorder.  
Only for DVD recorder operations:  
CHANNEL +/–: Change the channel numbers.  
Initial setting: 03  
DVD/HDD:  
Select the DVD recorder or HDD deck. (Only for  
a DVD recorder incorporated with HDD deck.)  
1 Set the mode selector to “DVR.”  
(skip):  
Move the playback position ahead 30 seconds  
after the current position.  
2 Press and hold DVR/DVD  
3 Press DVR/DVD.  
.
1 – 9, 0:  
Select a channel number (while stopped) or a  
chapter/title number, track number (while playing  
back). Press ENTER to enter the number.  
4 Enter the remote control code you want using  
buttons 1 – 4, and 0.  
REC MODE:  
REC PAUSE:  
Select the recording mode.  
EX.: To enter the code “2”, press 0, then 2.  
Enter recording pause. To start recording,  
press 3.  
Code for DVR  
Number to enter  
1
2
3
4
01  
02  
03  
04  
DISPLAY:  
Change the display information.  
Only for DVD player operations:  
5 Release DVR/DVD  
.
fs/Rate*:  
Show the sampling frequency.  
Now, the remote control code has been changed.  
TITLE/GROUP: Make the numeric buttons work for selecting the  
title/group number.  
You can always perform the following operation:  
ZOOM:  
Zoom in and out.  
DVR/DVD  
3:  
:
Turn on or off the DVD recorder or DVD player.  
Start playback.  
1 – 10, 0, +10: Select a chapter/title number, track number,  
menu item, etc.  
DVD/CARD:  
Select the disc or memory card to play. (Only for  
a DVD player incorporated with memory card  
slots.)  
7:  
Stop playback.  
8:  
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.  
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter.  
¢:  
4:  
DIMMER:  
THUMBNAIL:  
SLIDE:  
Change the display brightness.  
Return to the beginning of the current (or  
previous) chapter.  
Show the thumbnail screen for JPEG discs.  
Start the slide show playback for JPEG discs.  
¡:  
1:  
Fast-forward playback.  
Fast-reverse playback.  
3D/S.EFFECT: Apply the 3D effect.  
PAGE: Show browsable still pictures on DVD Audio  
discs.  
TOP MENU/MENU:  
Display the menu recorded on discs.  
* Press and hold when using these buttons.  
ON SCREEN:  
5//3/2:  
ENTER:  
Shows the on-screen bar.  
Select an item on the menu screen.  
Enter the selected item, channel number,  
chapter/title number, or track number (if  
required).  
If these buttons do not function normally, use the remote  
control supplied with your DVD recorder or DVD player.  
Refer also to the manuals supplied with the DVD recorder  
or DVD player for details.  
You can also use the following buttons to operate JVC DVD  
recorder and/or DVD player if it supports the corresponding  
function:  
For various settings:  
AUDIO:  
SUBTITLE:  
SET UP:  
VFP:  
Select the audio language/channel.  
Select the subtitle language.  
Display the Preference display.  
Show the picture adjustment screen.  
PROGRESSIVE*: Change the scanning mode.  
ANGLE: Select the view angle.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manufacturers’ codes for TV  
Manufacturer  
Codes  
Operating other  
manufacturers’  
products  
JVC  
Akai  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
Bell+Howell  
Centurion  
Coronad  
Daewoo  
Emerson  
Fisher  
06, 07, 08  
09, 10, 11, 12, 13  
14  
GE•Pana  
GE•RCA  
Gold Star  
Hitachi  
15, 16  
17  
18, 19  
20, 21  
22, 23  
24  
25  
25  
By changing the transmittable signals, you can use the  
supplied remote control to operate other manufacturers’  
products.  
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.  
To operate those components with the remote control, first you  
need to set the manufacturers’ codes each for the TV, VCR, and  
DBS.  
• After replacing batteries of the remote control, set the  
manufacturers’ codes again.  
KTV  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Mitsubishi  
Panasonic  
Philips  
26, 27  
24  
Pioneer  
Proscan  
Quasar  
Radioshack  
RCA  
28  
29  
30  
31  
Changing the transmittable signals for operating  
a TV  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
02, 17, 32, 33, 34, 35  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Sears  
36, 37  
14  
38  
1 Press and hold TV  
2 Press TV.  
.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons  
Sharp  
Sony  
39  
40  
1 – 9, and 0.  
Symphonic  
Toshiba  
Zenith  
41, 42  
38  
43, 44  
See “Manufacturers’ codes for TV” on the right.  
4 Release TV  
.
Now, you can perform the following operations on the TV.  
Initial setting: 01  
TV  
:
Turn on or off the TV.  
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without  
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot  
operate the equipment.  
TV VOL +/–:  
TV/VIDEO:  
Adjust the volume on the TV.  
Change the input mode (either TV or  
VIDEO).  
After pressing TV, you can perform the following operations on  
the TV.  
CHANNEL +/–:  
Change the channel numbers.  
Select the channel numbers.  
1 – 9, 0, 100+ (+10):  
See the instructions supplied with the TV for details.  
5 Try to operate your TV by pressing TV  
.
When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct  
code.  
If more than one code is listed for your brand of TV, try each  
one until the correct one is entered.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manufacturers’ codes for VCR  
Changing the transmittable signals for operating  
a VCR  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Codes  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
01, 02, 03, 04  
1 Press and hold VCR  
2 Press VCR.  
.
Aiwa  
Akai  
Bell+Howell  
Daewoo  
Emerson  
Fisher  
05  
06, 07, 08  
09  
10  
11, 12, 13, 14, 15  
16, 17, 18, 19  
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons  
1 – 9, and 0.  
See “Manufacturers’ codes for VCR” on the right.  
G.E.  
20, 21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
20, 26  
4 Release VCR  
.
Go Video  
Gold Star  
Go-Video A  
Go-Video B  
Hitachi  
Now, you can perform the following operation on the VCR.  
VCR Turn on or off the VCR.  
:
Magnavox  
Mitsubishi  
NEC  
27, 28, 29  
30, 31, 32, 33  
34, 35  
After pressing VCR, you can perform the following operations  
on the VCR.  
Panasonic  
Philips  
RCA  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Scott  
Sharp  
Shintom  
Sony  
Symphonic  
Teknica  
Toshiba  
Zenith  
36, 37  
27  
38  
39, 40, 41  
16, 17, 18, 19  
42  
43, 44  
45  
46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51  
52  
53, 54  
55  
56  
CHANNEL +/–:  
Change the channel numbers on the  
VCR.  
1 – 9, 0:  
3:  
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.  
Start playback.  
7:  
Stop playback.  
8:  
Pause playback.  
¡:  
1:  
Fast-wind a tape.  
Rewind a tape.  
See the instructions supplied with the VCR for details.  
5 Try to operate your VCR by pressing VCR  
.
Initial setting: 01  
When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct  
code.  
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without  
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot  
operate the equipment.  
If more than one code is listed for your brand of VCR, try each  
one until the correct one is entered.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the transmittable signals for operating  
Changing the transmittable signals for operating  
a DVD player  
a DBS tuner  
Set the mode selector to “DVD.”  
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”  
1 Press and hold DVR/DVD  
2 Press DVR/DVD.  
.
1 Press and hold DBS  
2 Press DBS.  
.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons  
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons  
1 – 9, and 0.  
1 – 9, and 0.  
See “Manufacturers’ codes for DVD player” below.  
See “Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner” below.  
4 Release DVR/DVD  
.
4 Release DBS  
.
Now, you can perform the following operation on the DVD  
player.  
Now, you can perform the following operation on the DBS  
tuner.  
DVR/DVD  
:
Turn on or off the DVD player.  
DBS  
:
Turn on or off the DBS tuner.  
3:  
Start playback.  
After pressing DBS, you can perform the following operations  
on the DBS tuner.  
1:  
Return to the beginning of the current  
chapter (or fast-forward for some models).  
¡:  
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter  
(or fast-reverse for some models).  
CHANNEL +/–:  
1 – 9, 0:  
Change the channel numbers on the  
DBS tuner.  
7:  
Stop playback.  
Select the channel numbers on the  
DBS tuner.  
8:  
Pause playback.  
MENU:  
Display the menu recorded on DVD  
VIDEO discs.  
See the instructions supplied with the DBS tuner for details.  
5//3/2:  
ENTER:  
1 – 9, 0:  
Select an item on the menu screen.  
Enter the selected item.  
5 Try to operate your DBS tuner by pressing  
DBS  
.
When your DBS tuner turns on or off, you have entered the  
correct code.  
Select the chapter number.  
See the instructions supplied with the DVD player for details.  
If more than one code is listed for your brand of DBS tuner,  
try each one until the correct one is entered.  
5 Try to operate your DVD player by pressing  
DVR/DVD  
.
Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner  
When your DVD player turns on or off, you have entered the  
correct code.  
Manufacturer  
Codes  
Echostar  
G.I.  
40  
01, 41  
02  
03, 04, 05, 06  
42  
43  
07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13,  
14, 15  
16, 17, 18  
19  
20, 21, 22  
23, 24, 44  
25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30  
31, 32  
45  
If more than one code is listed for your brand of DVD player,  
try each one until the correct one is entered.  
Gemini  
Hamlin  
Hitachi  
Hughes  
Jerrold  
Manufacturers’ codes for DVD player  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Hitachi  
Codes  
01  
12  
Macom  
Magnavox  
Oak  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Primestar  
RCA  
S. Atlanta  
Samsung  
Sony  
Kenwood  
Mitsubishi  
Onkyo  
Panasonic  
Philips  
05, 08  
10  
15, 16  
04  
07  
Pioneer  
Samsung  
Sony  
03  
14  
02  
46  
33, 34, 35  
36  
Toshiba  
Yamaha  
06  
09  
47  
Tocom  
Toshiba  
Zenith  
37  
48  
38, 39  
Initial setting: 01  
NOTE  
You cannot use this remote control to operate other  
manufacturers’ DVD recorder.  
Initial setting: 01  
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without  
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot  
operate the equipment.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If  
there are any problems you cannot solve, contact your JVC’s  
service center.  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
The power cord is not plugged in.  
SOLUTION  
The power does not come on.  
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.  
The receiver turns off (enters standby  
mode).  
Speakers are overloaded because of high  
volume.  
1. Stop the playback source.  
2. Turn on the receiver again, then turn the  
volume down.  
Speakers are overloaded because of a  
short circuit at the speaker terminals.  
Check the speaker wiring. If speaker wiring  
is not short-circuited, contact your dealer.  
The receiver is overloaded because of a  
high voltage.  
Consult your dealer after unplugging the  
power cord.  
“OVER HEAT” flashes on the display,  
then the receiver turns off.  
The receiver is overloaded because of high Turn on the receiver again. If the receiver  
volume or long time usage.  
turns off soon, consult your dealer after  
unplugging the power cord.  
No sound from speakers.  
Speaker signal cables are not connected.  
Check speaker wiring, then reconnect if  
necessary (see page 6) after unplugging  
the power cord.  
Connections are incorrect.  
Check the audio connections (see pages 7  
to 11) after unplugging the power cord.  
An incorrect source is selected.  
Muting is activated.  
Select the correct source.  
Press MUTING to cancel the mute (see  
page 15).  
An incorrect input mode (analog or digital)  
is selected.  
Select the correct input mode (analog or  
digital).  
TV Direct is activated.  
Deactivate TV Direct (see page 14).  
Sound from one speaker only.  
Speaker signal cables are not connected  
properly.  
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if  
necessary (see page 6) after unplugging  
the power cord.  
Bass sound is reinforced too much  
when listening in stereo.  
Appropriate bass level is not selected.  
The sounds may be intermittently distorted  
Adjust audio position level (see page 14).  
Sounds are intermittently distorted or  
the noise is heard by the outside noise or the noise may be heard by the outside  
This is not a malfunction. But if this  
continues, turn on the receiver again.  
such as a lightning discharge.  
noise such as a lightning discharge but the  
sound will be restored automatically.  
No picture is displayed on the monitor. Connections are incorrect.  
Input mode is incorrect.  
Check the video connections (see pages 7  
to 10) after unplugging the power code.  
Check the component video input mode  
(see page 25).  
Remote control does not operate as  
you intend.  
The remote control is not ready for your  
intended operation.  
Set the mode selector correctly, then press  
the corresponding source selecting button  
or SOUND before operation  
Remote control does not work.  
There is an obstruction hiding the remote  
sensor on the receiver.  
Remove the obstruction.  
Batteries are weak.  
Replace batteries.  
The mode selector is set to the incorrect  
position.  
Set the mode selector to the proper  
position.  
Buttons cannot be used.  
TV Direct is activated.  
Deactivate TV Direct (see page 14).  
Continuous hiss or buzzing during FM Incoming signal is too weak.  
reception.  
Connect an outdoor FM antenna or contact  
your dealer.  
The station is too far away.  
Select another station.  
The wrong antenna is being used.  
Check with your dealer to be sure you have  
the correct antenna.  
Antennas are not connected properly.  
Check the connections.  
Occasional cracking noise during FM  
reception.  
Ignition noise from automobiles.  
Move the antenna farther from automobile  
traffic.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video  
Video Input Sensitivity/Impedance:  
Specifications  
Composite video: DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS:  
1 V(p-p)/75  
S-video: DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS:  
Y (luminance):  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
C (chrominance, burst):  
Component: DVR/DVD, VCR:  
Y (luminance):  
0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
PB, PR:  
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Video Output Level/Impedance:  
Designs and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Composite video: DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
S-video: DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:  
Y (luminance):  
C (chrominance, burst):  
Component: MONITOR OUT:  
Y (luminance):  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Amplifier  
Output Power  
0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
At stereo operation:  
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Negative  
Front channels:  
100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven  
into 6 at 1 kHz with no more than 10%  
total harmonic distortion.  
PB, PR:  
Synchronization:  
At surround operation:  
Front channels:  
100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven  
into 6 at 1 kHz with no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
FM tuner (IHF)  
Tuning Range:  
Usable Sensitivity:  
Monaural:  
87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz  
Center channel:  
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 6 at  
1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total  
harmonic distortion.  
12.8 dBf (1.2 µV/75 )  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
Monaural:  
Surround channels: 100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven  
into 6 at 1 kHz, with no more than 0.8%  
total harmonic distortion.  
16.0 dBf (1.7 µV/75 )  
37.5 dBf (20.5 µV/75 )  
Stereo:  
Stereo Separation at OUT(REC): 35 dB at 1 kHz  
Surround back channel:  
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 6 at  
1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total  
harmonic distortion.  
AM tuner  
Tuning Range:  
* Measured on AC 110 V, 127 V, 220 V, and 240 V.  
531 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
Audio  
General  
Audio Input Sensitivity/Impedance:  
Power Requirements:  
AC 110 V/127 V/220 V/230 V – 240 V  
adjustable with the voltage selector,  
50 Hz/60 Hz  
,
DVR/DVD (DVD MULTI), VCR, DBS, TV:  
330 mV/47 kΩ  
Audio Input (DIGITAL IN)*:  
Power Consumption:  
120 W (at operation)  
Coaxial: DIGITAL IN 1(DVR/DVD):  
5 W (in standby mode)  
0.5 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Optical: DIGITAL IN 2(DBS), 3(VCR):  
–21 dBm to –15 dBm  
Dimensions (W x H x D): 435 mm x 70 mm x 317.2 mm  
Mass: 6.3 kg  
(660 nm 30 nm)  
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS (with  
sampling frequency—32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz).  
Audio Output Level:  
DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:  
330 mV  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (’66 IHF/DIN): 80 dB/62 dB  
Frequency Response (8 ):  
Bass Boost:  
20 Hz to 20 kHz ( 1 dB)  
+4 dB 1 dB at 100 Hz  
Equalization (at DSP operation):  
Center frequency:  
Control range:  
63 Hz, 250 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 16 kHz  
8 dB  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A.,  
Canada, and U.K.)  
AM LOOP  
SUBWOOFER CENTER  
SURR-R  
SURR-L  
1(DVR/DVD) 2(DBS)  
3(VCR) DIGITAL OUT  
VOLTAGE  
ANTENNA  
CAUTION:SPEAKER  
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16  
SELECTOR  
110V  
Y
PB  
PR  
220V  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND  
PCM/  
STREAM  
BACK  
VCR  
RIGHT LEFT  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
FM 75  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
IN  
DVD MULTI IN  
AM EXT  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL IN  
AUDIO  
230 -  
240V  
L
127V  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
R
AV  
VCR  
DVR/DVD  
IN  
SUB-  
VCR  
DVR  
OUT (REC)  
DVR/DVD  
IN (PLAY)  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
(PLAY)  
DBS  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COMPU  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO  
DVR  
OUT  
(REC)  
IN  
DBS  
IN  
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
WOOFER  
OUT (REC)  
(PLAY)  
(PLAY)  
OUT  
LINK-III  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
110V  
220V  
230 -  
240V  
127V  
CAUTION for mains (AC) line  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your  
mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the  
position of the voltage selector switch provided on  
the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset  
the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a  
damage or risk of fire/electric shock.  
EN  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0605RYMMDWJEIN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Indesit Freezer C 139 UK User Manual
Intel Computer Hardware 8I945PE FS User Manual
JL Audio Car Speaker SB GM CLREXT 10W3v2 User Manual
John Deere Lawn Mower 6230 ROPS User Manual
Johnson Controls Door S1 CD065T01 User Manual
JVC Car Stereo System LVT2089 001A User Manual
Jwin CD Player JX CD7160 User Manual
KitchenAid Cooktop 8285364 User Manual
KitchenAid Dishwasher KUDI01FL User Manual
KitchenAid Oven KGSK901SBL02 User Manual